Handleiding Jeep Cherokee - 2015 (pagina 768 van 772) (Engels)

617805

768

Verklein

Vergroot

Pagina terug

1/772

Pagina verder

Cherokee

Chrysler Group LLC

OWNER’S MANUAL

2015 Cherokee

15KL74-126-AA First Edition Printed in U.S.A.

2015

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA

With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name

Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the

name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.

DRIVING AND ALCOHOL

Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of

accidents.

Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood

alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are

drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-

drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-

portation.

WARNING!

Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.

Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are

slower, and your judgment is impaired when you

have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

This manual illustrates and describes the operation of

features and equipment that are either standard or op-

tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a

description of features and equipment that are no longer

available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please

disregard any features and equipment described in this

manual that are not on this vehicle.

Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes

in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or

improvements to its products without imposing any

obligation upon itself to install them on products previ-

ously manufactured.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION PAGE

INTRODUCTION .............................................................3

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE .............................9

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737

INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS

! INTRODUCTION ........................4

! ROLLOVER WARNING ...................4

! HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ..............5

! WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ..............7

! VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ........7

! VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ....8

INTRODUCTION

Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group

LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision

workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all

essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.

This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-

tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint

you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.

It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various

customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to

read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-

tions and recommendations in this manual will help

assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it

should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-

ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.

When it comes to service, remember that your authorized

dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-

nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfac-

tion.

ROLLOVER WARNING

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate

than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher

ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than

many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in

a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an

unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because

of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of

control it may roll over when some other vehicles may

not.

Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other

unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle

4INTRODUCTION

control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result

in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal

injury. Drive carefully.

Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts pro-

vided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the

U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing

seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or

more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by

two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted

person is significantly more likely to die than a person

wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section

contains the information you desire.

Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the

items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and

illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.

The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual

contains a complete listing of all subjects.

Consult the following table for a description of the

symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout

this Owner’s Manual:

Rollover Warning Label

INTRODUCTION 5

6INTRODUCTION

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against op-

erating procedures that could result in a collision or

bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-

dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you

do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss

important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-

tions.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the

left front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is

visible from outside of the vehicle through the wind-

shield. The VIN number also is stamped into the right

front body, on the right front seat cross member (visible

through an opening in the carpet) and appears on the

Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a

window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration, and the

title.

The VIN is also stamped on either right or left hand side

of the engine block.

Vehicle Identification Number

INTRODUCTION 7

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!

Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could

seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and

may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or

death.

Right Front Body VIN Location

8INTRODUCTION

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

! A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS .............12

▫ Ignition Node Module (IGNM) — If Equipped. .12

▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) ..............13

▫ Key Fob — If Equipped ..................14

▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message ..........15

! SENTRY KEY® .........................16

▫ Replacement Keys .....................18

▫ Customer Key Programming ..............18

▫ General Information ....................18

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .19

▫ Rearming Of The System .................19

▫ To Arm The System ....................19

▫ To Disarm The System ...................20

▫ Security System Manual Override ...........21

! ILLUMINATED ENTRY ...................22

! REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) ...........22

▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate ..........24

▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate ............25

▫ Using The Panic Alarm ..................25

▫ Programming Additional Transmitters .......26

▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement ...........26

▫ General Information ....................29

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .29

▫ How To Use Remote Start ................30

▫ Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information

Display (DID) — If Equipped ..............31

▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode...............31

▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The

Vehicle .............................32

▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The

Vehicle ..............................32

▫

Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped . .33

▫ Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer

Activation — If Equipped ................33

! DOOR LOCKS .........................34

▫ Manual Door Locks .....................34

▫ Power Door Locks .....................35

▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear

Doors ..............................37

! KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ .................38

! WINDOWS ...........................44

▫ Power Windows .......................44

▫ Wind Buffeting .......................47

! LIFTGATE ............................47

▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped .............49

! OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..........52

▫ Important Safety Precautions ..............52

10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Seat Belt Systems ......................53

▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ........65

▫ Child Restraints .......................92

▫ Transporting Pets .....................115

! ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .116

! SAFETY TIPS .........................116

▫ Transporting Passengers .................116

▫ Exhaust Gas .........................117

▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The

Vehicle .............................118

▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside

The Vehicle .........................120

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS

Your vehicle uses either a key start ignition system or

keyless ignition system. The key start ignition system

consists of a either a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) transmitter and an Ignition Node Module (IGNM).

The keyless ignition system consists of a Key Fob with

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a Keyless

Ignition Node (KIN).

Ignition Node Module (IGNM) — If Equipped

The Ignition Node Module (IGNM) operates similar to an

ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with

detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent posi-

tions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position

is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When

released from the START position, the switch automati-

cally returns to the ON/RUN position.

Ignition Node Module (IGNM)

1—OFF

2—ACC(ACCESSORY)

3—ON/RUN

4—START

12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)

This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition

switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger

compartment.

The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN System) has four oper-

ating positions, three of which are labeled and will

illuminate when in position. The three positions are OFF,

ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth position is START,

during start RUN will illuminate.

NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with

the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may

have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back up

method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put

the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the

Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and

push to operate the ignition switch.

Keyless Ignition Node (KIN System)

1—OFF

2—ACC(ACCESSORY)

3—ON/RUN

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13

Key Fob — If Equipped

The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in

the rear of the Key Fob.

The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle

should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.

You can keep the emergency key with you when valet

parking.

To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch

on the face of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and

then pull the key out with your other hand.

Emergency Key Removal (IGNM System)

14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key

into the lock cylinders with either side up.

Ignition Or Accessory On Message

Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or

ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind

you to place the ignition in the OFF position. In addition

to the chime, the ignition or accessory on message will

display in the cluster.

NOTE: The power window switches, radio, power sun-

roof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active

for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF

position. Opening either front door will cancel this

feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer

to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-

ment Panel” for further information.

Emergency Key Removal (KIN System)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15

WARNING!

• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key

Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is

dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or

others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-

dren should be warned not to touch the parking

brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selec-

tor.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or

in a location accessible to children, and do not

leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with

Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN

mode. A child could operate power windows, other

controls, or move the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not leave children or animals inside parked

vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may

cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always

remove key from the ignition and lock all doors

when leaving the vehicle unattended.

SENTRY KEY®

The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthor-

ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The

system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation

is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked

or unlocked.

16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node

(KIN) and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle

operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are pro-

grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate

the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank

if an invalid Key Fob.

After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the

Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a

bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it

indicates that there is a problem with the system. In

addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,

it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start

the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the

engine being shut off after two seconds.

If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal

vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10

seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the system.

Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as

possible by an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

• Do not make modifications or alterations to the

immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to

the immobilization system may result in a loss of

security protection.

• The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not com-

patible with some aftermarket remote starting sys-

tems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle

starting problems and loss of security protection.

All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have

been programmed to the vehicle electronics.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17

Replacement Keys

NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the

vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the

vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it

cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.

CAUTION!

• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and

lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-

tended.

• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,

always remember to place the ignition in the OFF

position.

At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided

with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).

Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is

required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.

Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-

rized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a

blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob

is one that has never been programmed.

NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer Sys-

tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an

authorized dealer.

Customer Key Programming

Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be

performed at an authorized dealer.

General Information

The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15

and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is

subject to the following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.

18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• This device must accept any interference that may be

received, including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved

by the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED

The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors

for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter-N-Go™

Start/Stop button for unauthorized operation. While the

Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for

door locks and liftgate release are disabled. If something

triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will pro-

vide the following audible and visible signals: the horn

will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash,

and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster

will flash.

Rearming Of The System

If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to

disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn

off after 29 seconds, 5 seconds between cycles, up to 8

cycles if the trigger remains active and then the Vehicle

Security Alarm will rearm itself.

To Arm The System

Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:

1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the “OFF”

position (refer to #Starting Procedures# in #Starting

And Operating# for further information).

• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,

make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.

• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-

Go™, make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF

and the key is physically removed from the ignition.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19

2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the

vehicle:

• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch

with the driver and/or passenger door open.

• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry

Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the

same exterior zone (refer to #Keyless Enter-N-Go™#

in #Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle# for

further information).

• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) transmitter.

3. If any doors are open, close them.

To Disarm The System

The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of

the following methods:

• Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless

Entry (RKE) transmitter.

• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle with a

valid Key Fob available in the same exterior zone (if

equipped), refer to #Keyless Enter-N-Go™ # in #Things

To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle# for further

information.

• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF

position.

• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ,

press the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Start/Stop button

(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).

• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-

Go™ , insert a valid key into the ignition switch and

turn the key to the ON position.

20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button

on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the

Vehicle Security Alarm.

• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during

power liftgate entry. Pressing the liftgate button will

not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone

enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any

door the alarm will sound.

• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior

power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.

The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your

vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the

system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-

ously described arming sequences has occurred, the

Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether

you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle

and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,

disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery

becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will

remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the

exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this

occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

Security System Manual Override

The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the

doors using the manual door lock plunger.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21

ILLUMINATED ENTRY

The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the

doors or open any door.

This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the

outside mirrors — if equipped. Refer to “Mirrors” in

“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-

ther information.

The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds

or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition

switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.

NOTE:

• The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-

tesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in

the #Dome Defeat# position (extreme top position).

• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the

dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position

(extreme bottom position).

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)

The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,

open the power liftgate, or activate the Panic Alarm from

distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a

hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE

transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to

activate the system.

NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above

disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit-

ter buttons for all RKE transmitters.

22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Emergency Key Removal (KIN) Emergency Key Removal (IGNM)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23

To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate

Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE

transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice

within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The

turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock

signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.

If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to

“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know Before

Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks

This feature lets you program the system to unlock either

the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the

UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the

current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Flash Lamps With Lock

This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when

the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit-

ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change

the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-

formation.

Headlight Illumination On Approach

This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds

when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.

The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles

equipped through Uconnect®. To change the current

setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To Lock The Doors And Liftgate

Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-

ter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights

will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the

signal.

If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to

“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know Before

Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

Sound Horn With Lock

This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors

are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be

turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,

refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your

Instrument Panel” for further information.

Using The Panic Alarm

To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold

the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one

second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated,

the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off,

and the interior lights will turn on.

The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless

you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a

second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH

(24 km/h) or greater.

NOTE:

• The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition

switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the

Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights

and horn will remain on.

• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the

vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the

Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted

by the system.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25

Programming Additional Transmitters

Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be

performed at an authorized dealer.

Transmitter Battery Replacement

The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032

battery.

NOTE:

• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back

housing or the printed circuit board.

1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical

latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways

with your thumb and then pull the key out with your

other hand.

Emergency Key Removal (IGNM)

26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

2. Separating RKE halves requires screw removal (if

equipped) and gently prying the two halves of the

RKE transmitter apart with the emergency key. Make

sure not to damage the seal during removal.

Emergency Key Removal (KIN) Remove Screw From Transmitter Case

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27

3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over

(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a

solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the

battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign

on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery

Separating Ignition Node Module (IGNM) Transmitter

Case

Separating Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) Transmitter

Case

28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the

new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause

battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it

with rubbing alcohol.

4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two

halves together.

General Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and

RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the

following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.

• This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved

by the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal

distance, check for these two conditions:

1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of

the battery is a minimum of three years.

2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station

tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB

radios.

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-

niently from outside the vehicle while still

maintaining security. The system has a range of

approximately 300 ft (91 m).

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29

NOTE:

• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic

transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.

• Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter

may reduce this range.

How To Use Remote Start

All of the following conditions must be met before the

engine will remote start:

• Gear Selector in PARK

• Doors closed

• Hood closed

• Liftgate/Flipper Glass closed

• Hazard switch off

• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)

• Ignition key removed from ignition switch

• Battery at an acceptable charge level

• RKE PANIC button not pushed

• System not disabled from previous remote start event

• Vehicle alarm system not active

• Ignition in Off position for Keyless Enter-N-Go™

vehicle

• Fuel level meets minimum requirement

30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or

confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-

oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon

Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in-

jury or death when inhaled.

• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters

away from children. Operation of the Remote Start

System, windows, door locks or other controls

could cause serious injury or death.

Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver

Information Display (DID) — If Equipped

The following messages will display in the EVIC/DID if

the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start

prematurely:

• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar

• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar

• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low

• Remote Start Aborted — Liftgate Ajar

• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset

• Remote Start Aborted — Too Cold

• Remote Start Aborted — Time Expired

The message will stay active until the ignition is turned to

the ON/RUN position.

To Enter Remote Start Mode

Push and release the REMOTE START button on

the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds.

The vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights

will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if

programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle

will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31

NOTE:

• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the

vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.

• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during

Remote Start mode.

• For security, power window and power sunroof op-

eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is

in the Remote Start mode.

• The engine can be started two consecutive times with

the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be

cycled by pushing the START/STOP button twice (or

the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN

position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a

third cycle.

To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The

Vehicle

Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or

allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.

NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system

will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START

button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote

Start request.

To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle

Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the

UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the

doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if

equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,

push and release the START/STOP button. If the START/

STOP button is not present, insert the Key Fob into the

ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON/RUN

position.

32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-

Go™ feature, the ignition switch must be in the

ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle.

• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-

Go™ feature, the message “Remote Start Active —

Insert Key and Turn To Run” will display in the

EVIC/DID until you insert the key. Refer to “Elec-

tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver

Information Display” in “Understanding Your Instru-

ment Panel” for further information.

• For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™

feature, the message “Remote Start Active — Push

Start Button” will display in the EVIC/DID until you

push the START button.

Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped

When remote start is activated, the heated steering

wheel, and driver heated seat features will automatically

turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver

vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the

remote start is activated. These features will stay on

through the duration of remote start or until the ignition

switch is cycled to the ON/RUN position.

The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and

deactivated through the Uconnect® SETTINGS. For more

information on Remote Start Comfort System operation

refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your

Instrument Panel.”

Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer

Activation — If Equipped

When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient

temperature is less than 40° F (4.4° C), the wiper De-Icer

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33

will be enabled. On exiting remote start resume previous

operation except, if the De-Icer is active, the De-Icer timer

and operation will continue.

DOOR LOCKS

Manual Door Locks

To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each door

trim panel forward. To unlock the front doors, pull the

inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the door

lock button until the red indicator is visible. To unlock the

rear doors, rotate the door lock button until the red

indicator is visible.

If the door lock button is locked (no red indicator visible)

when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore,

make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before

closing the door.

NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock

the liftgate.

WARNING!

• For personal security and safety in the event of a

collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as

well as when you park and leave the vehicle.

• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key

Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to

be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Children should be

warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal

or the transmission gear selector.

(Continued)

34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or

in a location accessible to children, and do not

leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with

Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN

mode. A child could operate power windows, other

controls, or move the vehicle.

Power Door Locks

A power door lock switch is located on each of the front

door trim panels. Use this switch to lock or unlock the

doors and liftgate.

The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the

Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry) system. For further

information, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things

To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.

Power Door Lock Switch

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35

If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition

is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any front door

is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents

you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle.

Place the ignition to the OFF position or closing the door

will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open, and the

ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, a chime will

sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob.

Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped

The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.

When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically

when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The

auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your

authorized dealer or through the Uconnect® Settings in

your radio.

Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit

The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with

power door locks if:

1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-

abled.

2. All doors are closed.

3. The transmission shift lever was not in PARK, then is

placed in PARK.

4. Any door is opened.

Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming

To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Set-

tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for

further information.

NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature

in accordance with local laws.

36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear

Doors

To provide a safer environment for small children riding

in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a

Child-Protection Door Lock system.

To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade

screwdriver (or ignition key) and rotate the dial to the

LOCK or UNLOCK position. When the system on a door

is engaged, that door can only be opened by using the

outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the

unlocked position.

Child-Protection Door Lock Function

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37

NOTE:

• When the child lock system is engaged, the door can

be opened only by using the outside door handle even

though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.

• After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock

system, always test the door from the inside to make

certain it is in the desired position.

• After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock sys-

tem, always test the door from the inside to make

certain it is in the desired position.

• For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the

lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the win-

dow, and open the door with the outside door handle.

WARNING!

Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.

Remember that the rear doors can only be opened

from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are

engaged.

KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™

The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the

vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a

feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you

to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to

push the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.

38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to

“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-

ment Panel” for further information.

• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been

raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock

sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re-

sponse time.

• If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive Entry Door

Handle and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds, the

vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the

security alarm.

To Unlock From The Driver’s Side

With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft

(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the front driver

door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.

NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed all

doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front

driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver

Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to

“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-

ment Panel” for further information.

Grab The Door Handle To Unlock

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39

To Unlock From The Passenger Side

With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft

(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front

passenger door handle to unlock all four doors and the

liftgate automatically.

NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger

door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door

unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st

Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).

Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE

Transmitter In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)

To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a

Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the

Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door

unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch

is in the OFF position.

FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry.

There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe

search in any passive entry vehicle.

1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry RKE

transmitter while a door is ajar.

2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door

handle while a door is ajar.

3. A lock request is made by the door panel switch while

the door is ajar.

When any of these situations occur, after all ajar doors are

shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a

Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside the car and it does

not find any Passive Entry RKE transmitters outside the

car, then the car will unlock and alert the customer.

40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a

valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the

vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is

detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock

the doors when any of the following conditions are true:

• The doors are manually locked using the door lock

knobs

• There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside

the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive

Entry door handle

• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the

door panel switch and then close the doors

To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate

The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the

electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry RKE

transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the

electronic liftgate release to open with one fluid motion.

NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in

EVIC/DID if equipped, all doors will unlock when you

push the electronic release on the liftgate. If #Unlock

Driver Door 1st Press# is programmed in Uconnect®, the

liftgate will unlock when you push the electronic release

on the liftgate For further information, refer to

“Uconnect®” in “Understanding Your Instrument

Panel”.

To Lock The Liftgate

With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft

(1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the passive entry lock button

located to the right of electronic liftgate release.

NOTE: The liftgate passive entry lock button will only

lock the liftgate, the liftgate unlock feature is built into

the electronic liftgate release.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41

To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate

With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters

within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door

handles, push the door handle LOCK button to lock all

four doors.

Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door

handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).

Electronic Liftgate Release/Liftgate Passive Entry

Location

Push The Door Handle Button To Lock

42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait

two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,

using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to

allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling

the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and

unlocking.

• If Passive Entry is disabled using Uconnect® System,

the key protection described in #Preventing Inadver-

tent Locking of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter in

Vehicle# remains active/functional.

• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE

transmitter battery is dead.

The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the lock

button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.

DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43

WINDOWS

Power Windows

The window controls on the driver’s door control all the

door windows.

There are single window controls on each passenger door

trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.

The window controls will operate only when the ignition

is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect®, the

power window switches will remain active for up to 10

minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.

Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The

time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-

formation.

WARNING!

Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do

not let children play with power windows. Do not

leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a

location accessible to children, and do not leave the

(Continued)

Power Window Switches

44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-

Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,

particularly unattended children, can become en-

trapped by the windows while operating the power

window switches. Such entrapment may result in

serious injury or death.

AUTO-Down Feature

The driver door power window switch and some model

passenger door power window switches have an AUTO-

down feature. Push the window switch to the second

detent, release, and the window will go down automati-

cally.

To open the window part way, push the window switch

to the first detent and release it when you want the

window to stop.

To stop the window from going all the way down during

the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.

AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection

Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and

the window will go up automatically.

To stop the window from going all the way up during the

AUTO operation, push down on the switch briefly.

To close the window part way, lift the window switch to

the first detent and release it when you want the window

to stop.

NOTE:

• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-

closure, it will reverse direction and then go back

down. Remove the obstacle and use the window

switch again to close the window.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45

• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger

the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-

closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the

first detent and hold to close the window manually.

WARNING!

There is no anti-pinch protection when the window

is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the

window before closing.

Reset Auto-Up

Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window

probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:

1. Pull the window switch up to close the window

completely and continue to hold the switch up for an

additional two seconds after the window is closed.

2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second

detent to open the window completely and continue

to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds

after the window is fully open.

Window Lockout Switch

The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim

panel allows you to disable the window controls on the

rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,

push and release the window lockout button (setting it in

the DOWN position). To enable the window controls,

push and release the window lockout button again

(setting it in the UP position).

46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of

pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the

ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the

windows down, or the sunroof or Sky Slider™ (if

equipped) in certain open or partially open positions.

This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the

buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then open

the front and rear windows together to minimize the

buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof or Sky

Slider™ open, adjust the sunroof or Sky Slider™ opening

to minimize the buffeting or open any window.

LIFTGATE

To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate

The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the

electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry RKE

transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the

electronic liftgate release to open with one fluid motion.

Window Lockout Switch

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47

NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in

EVIC/DID if equipped, all doors will unlock when you

push the electronic release on the liftgate. If #Unlock

Driver Door 1st press# is programmed in Uconnect®, the

liftgate will unlock when you press the electronic release

on the liftgate For further information, refer to

“Uconnect®” in “Understanding Your Instrument

Panel”.

To Lock The Liftgate

With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft

(1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the passive entry lock button

located to the right of electronic liftgate release.

NOTE: The liftgate passive entry lock button will only

lock the liftgate, the liftgate unlock feature is built into

the electronic liftgate release.

NOTE: Use the power door LOCK switch on either front

door trim panel or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

transmitter to lock and unlock the liftgate. The manual

door locks on the doors and the driver’s door lock

cylinder will not lock and unlock the liftgate.

Liftgate Entry

48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous

exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas-

sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the

liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.

Power Liftgate — If Equipped

The power liftgate may be opened by pushing

the electronic liftgate release (refer to Keyless

Enter-N-Go™ located in Things To Know Be-

fore Starting) or by pushing the LIFTGATE

button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

Push the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter twice

within five seconds, to open the power liftgate. Once the

liftgate is open, pushing the button twice within five

seconds a second time will close the liftgate.

The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by

pushing the LIFTGATE button located on the left side of

the steering wheel on the instrument panel, or closed by

pushing the LIFTGATE button located on left rear trim

panel, near the liftgate opening. Push the LIFTGATE

button located on left rear trim panel once will close the

liftgate only, this button cannot be used to open the

liftgate.

When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter is

pushed two times, the turn signals will flash twice to

signal that the liftgate is opening or closing (if Flash

Lamps with Lock is enabled in the Uconnect® settings)

and the liftgate chime will be audible. For further infor-

mation, refer to #Uconnect®# in #Understanding Your

Instrument Panel#.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49

NOTE:

• In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an

emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open

the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be

accessed through a snap-in cover located on the lift-

gate trim panel.

• If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time,

the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset

power liftgate functionality.

WARNING!

During power operation, personal injury or cargo

damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is

clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched

before driving away.

NOTE:

• The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the

vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph

(0 km/h).

• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures

below −22°F (−30°C) or temperatures above 150°F

(65°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice

from the liftgate before pushing any of the power

liftgate switches.

• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is

closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically

reverse to the closed or open position, provided it

meets sufficient resistance.

• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the

liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips

will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.

50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• The power liftgate must be in the full open position for

rear liftgate close button on the left rear trim, near the

liftgate opening to operate. If the liftgate is not fully

open, push the Liftgate button on the Key Fob to fully

open the liftgate, and then push it again to close.

• If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the

power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the

full open position.

• If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the

power liftgate is opening, the liftgate motor will dis-

engage to allow manual operation.

• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions

within the same cycle, the system will automatically

stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manu-

ally.

• If your liftgate is power closing and you put the

vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continue to power

close. However, vehicle movement may result in a

detection of an obstruction.

WARNING!

• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous

exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your

passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep

the liftgate closed when you are operating the

vehicle.

• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,

make sure that all windows are closed, and the

climate control blower switch is set at high speed.

Do not use the recirculation mode.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS

Some of the most important safety features in your

vehicle are the restraint systems:

• Seat Belt Systems

• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags

• Child Restraints

Important Safety Precautions

Please pay close attention to the information in this

section. It tells you how to use your restraint system

properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as

possible.

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the

risk of harm from a deploying air bag:

1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride

buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing

child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,

move the seat as far back as possible and use the

proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)

3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle

seat belt properly (Refer to #Child Restraints#) should

be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child

restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chil-

dren who do not use child restraints or belt-

positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled

up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind

them or under their arm.

5. You should read the instructions provided with your

child restraint to make sure that you are using it

properly.

52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

6. All occupants should always wear their lap and

shoulder belts properly.

7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved

back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front

Air Bags room to inflate.

8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your

vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the

side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space

between you and the door and you could be injured.

9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be

modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact

the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided

under #If You Need Assistance.#

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of

an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child

12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-

facing child restraint.

• Only use rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle

with a rear seat.

Seat Belt Systems

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even

on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver

and could cause a collision that includes you. This can

happen far away from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they

can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some

of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown

from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53

ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the

inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should

be belted at all times.

Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System

(BeltAlert)

BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver

and outboard front passenger (if equipped with out-

board front passenger BeltAlert) to buckle their seat

belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition

switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the

driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbelted,

the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain

on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled.

The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle

speed is over 5 MPH (8 km/h) by blinking the Seat Belt

Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.

Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire

duration or until the respective seat belts are buckled.

After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder

Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts

are buckled. The driver should instruct all other occu-

pants to buckle their seat belts. If an outboard front seat

belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5

MPH (8 km/h), BeltAlert will provide both audio and

visual notification.

The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active

when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.

BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy

object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the

seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that

pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet

harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,

and cargo is properly stowed.

BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-

rized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend

deactivating BeltAlert.

54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat Belt

Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the

driver’s or outboard front passenger’s (if equipped with

BeltAlert) seat belt remains unbuckled.

Lap/Shoulder Belts

All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with

lap/shoulder belts.

The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very

sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoul-

der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under

normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt

will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the

vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more

severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work

with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In

some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.

Always wear your seat belt even though you have

air bags.

• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer

much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-

led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or

other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the

vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your

vehicle are buckled up properly.

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or

outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in

these areas are more likely to be seriously injured

or killed.

(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your

vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat

belts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your

injuries in a collision much worse. You might

suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out

of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear

your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers

safe, too.

• Two people should never be belted into a single

seat belt. People belted together can crash into one

another in a collision, hurting one another badly.

Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more

than one person, no matter what their size.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of

injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at

the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your

abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat

belt as low as possible and keep it snug.

• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In

a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the

seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If

you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take

it to your authorized dealer immediately and have

it fixed.

• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle

will not protect you properly. The lap portion could

ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-

nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the

buckle nearest you.

(Continued)

56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you

properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far

forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear

your seat belt snugly.

• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is danger-

ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of

the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck

injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause

internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder

bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that

your strongest bones will take the force in a colli-

sion.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect

you from injury during a collision. You are more

likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not

wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt

are meant to be used together.

• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a

collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect

the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,

frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-

placed immediately. Do not disassemble or modify

the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be

replaced after a collision.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and

adjust the seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front

seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles

equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and

pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the

webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go

around your lap.

Pulling Out The Latch Plate

58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch

plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low

across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove

slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder

belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch

plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces

the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle

Positioning The Lap Belt

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59

5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and

chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-

able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will

withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.

6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the

buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its

stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate

down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract

fully.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure

Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/

shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the

anchor point.

2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,

grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180° to create a

fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.

3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.

The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of

the latch plate.

4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the

folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage

In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the

shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to

position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or

squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,

and move it up or down to the position that serves you

best.

60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will

prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,

and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the

shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you

release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down

to make sure that it is locked in position.

NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is

equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows

the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward

position without pushing or squeezing the release but-

ton. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull

downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is

locked into position.

Seat Belt Extender

If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when

the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper

shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest

position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a

Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used

only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the

Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu-

pant, it must be removed.

Adjustable Anchorage

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61

WARNING!

• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically

required in order to properly fit the original seat

belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender

if, when worn, the distance between the front edge

of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of

the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.

• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can

increase the risk of serious injury or death in a

collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the

lap belt is not long enough and only use in the

recommended seating positions. Remove and store

the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts

throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is

the best way to keep the baby safe.

Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the seat belt

across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.

Keep the seat belt low so that it does not come across the

abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take

the force if there is a collision.

Seat Belt Pretensioner

The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning

devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat

belt in the event of a collision. These devices may

improve the performance of the seat belt by removing

slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners

work for all size occupants, including those in child

restraints.

NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat

belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be

worn snugly and positioned properly.

62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-

straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-

sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or

a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.

Energy Management Feature

This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy

Management feature in the front seating positions that

may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of

a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly

that is designed to release webbing in a controlled

manner.

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) — If Equipped

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be

equipped with Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors

(ALR) which are used to secure a child restraint system.

For additional information, refer to “Installing Child

Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child

Restraints” section of this manual. The table below

defines the type of feature for each seating position.

• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63

If the passenger seating position is equipped with an

ALR and is being used for normal usage:

Only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to

comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so

as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you

will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow

the webbing to retract completely in this case and then

carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary

to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section.

Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a

#click.#

In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-

matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to

remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The Automatic

Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating posi-

tions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the

Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is

installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this

feature. Children 12 years old and under should always

be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of

an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child

12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-

facing child restraint.

• Only use rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle

with a rear seat.

How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until

the entire seat belt is extracted.

64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,

you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat

belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.

How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode

Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it

to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking

Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)

locking mode.

WARNING!

• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the

switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-

ture or any other seat belt function is not working

properly when checked according to the proce-

dures in the Service Manual.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could

increase the risk of injury in collisions.

• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain

occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children

who are using booster seats. The locked mode is

only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing

child restraints that have a harness for restraining

the child.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

Air Bag System Components

Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag

system components:

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

• Air Bag Warning Light

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65

• Steering Wheel and Column

• Instrument Panel

• Knee Impact Bolsters

• Advanced Front Air Bags

• Supplemental Side Air Bags

• Supplemental Knee Air Bags

• Front and Side Impact Sensors

• Seat Belt Pretenioners

• Seat Belt Buckle Switch

• Seat Track Position Sensors

• Occupant Classification System

Advanced Front Air Bags

This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the

driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat

belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air

Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The

passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the

instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The

words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on

the air bag covers.

66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument

panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment

could cause serious injury, including death. Air

bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably

extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or

instrument panel.

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of

an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child

12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-

facing child restraint.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle

with a rear seat.

Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations

1—DriverAdvancedFrontAir

Bag

3 — Supplemental Driver Side

Knee Air Bag/Knee Bolster

2—PassengerAdvancedFront

Air Bag

4 — Supplemental Passenger

Side Knee Air bag/Knee Bolster

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67

Advanced Front Air Bag Features

The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage

driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides

output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as

determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),

which may receive information from the front impact

sensors or other system components.

The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an

impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy

output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy

output is used for more severe collisions.

This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front

passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the

inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon

seat position.

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front

passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether

the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat

belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the

Advanced Front Air Bags.

This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger

Occupant Classification System (“OCS”) that is designed

to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output

appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as

determined by the OCS.

WARNING!

• No objects should be placed over or near the air

bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel,

because any such objects could cause harm if the

vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the

air bags to inflate.

(Continued)

68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not put anything on or around the air bag

covers or attempt to open them manually. You may

damage the air bags and you could be injured

because the air bags may no longer be functional.

The protective covers for the air bag cushions are

designed to open only when the air bags are

inflating.

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more

severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work

with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In

some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Al-

ways wear your seat belts even though you have air

bags.

Advanced Front Air Bag Operation

Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-

tional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Ad-

vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk

of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Ad-

vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal

collisions, including some that may produce substantial

vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,

truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.

On the other hand, depending on the type and location of

impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes

with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a

severe initial deceleration.

Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration

over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are

not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should

have deployed.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-

sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,

away from an inflating air bag.

When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-

vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large

quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the

Advanced Front Air Bags.

The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right

side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the

way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced

Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to

blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while

helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.

Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front

Passenger Seat

The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for

this vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger Ad-

vanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occu-

pant’s seated weight, as determined by the OCS.

The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the

following:

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

• Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor

located in the front passenger seat

• Air Bag Warning Light

70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor

The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located

underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is lo-

cated beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any

weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM

uses input from the Sensor to determine the front pas-

senger’s most probable classification. The OCM commu-

nicates this information to the ORC. The ORC may

reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag deployment based on occupant classification. In

order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important

for the front passenger to be seated properly and prop-

erly wearing the seat belt.

The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger

Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the

inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if

the OCS estimates that:

• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very

light objects on it; or

• The front passenger seat is occupied by a small pas-

senger, including a child; or

• The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing

child restraint; or

• The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her

weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71

Front Passenger Seat Oc-

cupant Status

Front Passenger Air

Bag Output

Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power de-

ployment

Child, including a child in

a forward-facing child re-

straint or booster seat*

Reduced-power de-

ployment OR Full-

power deployment

Properly seated adult Full-power deployment

OR reduced-power de-

ployment

Unoccupied seat Reduced-power de-

ployment

* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,

allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag

deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front

passenger seat and never install a child restraint system,

including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front pas-

senger seat.

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of

an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child

12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-

facing child restraint.

• Only use rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle

with a rear seat.

• Children 12 years or younger should always ride

buckled up in a rear seat.

The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable

classification. The OCS estimates the seated weight on

the front passenger seat and where that weight is located.

The OCS communicates the classification status to the

72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

ORC. The ORC uses the classification to determine

whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation

rate should be adjusted.

In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is

important for the front passenger to be seated properly

and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated

passengers are:

• Sitting upright

• Facing forward

• Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfort-

ably on or near the floor

• Sitting with their back against the seatback and the

seatback in an upright position

Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small

Adults)

When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult,

occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may reduce

Seated Properly

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73

the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air

Bag. This does not mean that the OCS is working

improperly.

Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s

seated weight on the front passenger seat

The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly

positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so

may result in serious injury or death. The OCS deter-

mines the most probable classification of the occupant

that it detects.

The OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or

increased seated weight, which may result in an adjusted

inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in

a collision. This does not mean that the OCS is working

improperly.

Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the

front passenger seat may result in a reduced-power

deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.

Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the

front passenger seat may result in a full-power deploy-

ment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.

Examples of improper front passenger seating include:

• The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another

part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instru-

ment panel).

• The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns

to face the rear of the vehicle.

• The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright

position.

• The front passenger carries or holds an object while

seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.)

• Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.

74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat

and center console.

• Accessories that may change the seated weight on the

front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger

seat.

• Anything that may decrease or increase the front

passenger’s seated weight

The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable

classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is

seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output

signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s

properly seated weight input, for example:

Not Seated Properly

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75

Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly

76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• If an occupant in the front passenger seat is seated

improperly, the occupant may provide an output

signal to the OCS that is different from the occu-

pant’s properly seated weight input. This may

result in serious injury or death in a collision.

• Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with

the seatback in an upright position, your back

against the seatback, sitting upright, facing for-

ward, in the center of the seat, with your feet

comfortably on or near the floor.

• Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,

boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat.

Holding an object may provide an output signal to

the OCS that is different than the occupant’s prop-

erly seated weight input, which may result in

serious injury or death in a collision.

(Continued)

Not Seated Properly

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77

WARNING! (Continued)

• Placing an object on the floor under the front

passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working

properly, which may result in serious injury or

death in a collision. Do not place any objects on the

floor under the front passenger seat.

The Air Bag Warning Light

will turn on whenever

the OCS is unable to classify the front passenger seat

status. A malfunction in the OCS may affect the

operation of the air bag system.

If the Air Bag Warning Light

does not come on, or

stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as

you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for

service immediately.

The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS com-

ponents that may affect the Passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly

classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the

OCS components must function as designed.

Do not make any modifications to the front passenger

seat components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the

seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason,

take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only Chrysler

Group LLC approved seat accessories may be used.

The following requirements must be strictly followed:

• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or

components in any way.

• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or

cushions not designated by Chrysler Group LLC for

the specific model being repaired. Always use the

correct seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.

• Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an

aftermarket seat cover or cushion.

78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.

• At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener

be modified or replaced with any part except those

which are approved by Chrysler Group LLC .

WARNING!

Unapproved modifications or service procedures to

the passenger seat assembly, its related components,

seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the

air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This

could result in death or serious injury to the front

passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A

modified vehicle may not comply with required

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)

and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

(CMVSS).

Knee Impact Bolsters

The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the

driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-

pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front

Air Bags.

WARNING!

• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact

bolsters in any way.

• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact

bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band

radios, etc.

Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee

Air Bags

This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver

Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the

steering column and a Supplemental Passenger Knee Air

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79

Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the glove

compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide

enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working

together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and Advanced

Front Air Bags.

Supplemental Side Air Bags

Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:

1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):

Located in the outboard side of the front and rear (in

vehicles equipped with rear seat SABs) seats. The

SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG”

label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.

Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label

80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury

during certain side impact and certain rollover events, in

addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the

seat belts and body structure.

When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out-

board side of the seatback’s trim cover.

The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the

space between the occupant and the door. The SAB

moves at a very high speed and with such a high force

that it could injure you if you are not seated properly, or

if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates.

Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a

deploying air bag.

WARNING!

Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects

between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance

could be adversely affected and/or objects could be

pushed into you, causing serious injury.

Rear Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81

2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains

(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim

covering the SABICs is labeled SRS AIRBAG.

SABICs may help reduce the risk of head injury to front

and rear seat outboard occupants. SABICs may reduce

the risk of injuries in certain side impact and vehicle

rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction poten-

tial provided by the seat belts and body structure.

The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side win-

dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the

trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs

inflate with enough force to injure you if you are not

belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in

the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an

even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or

complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side

windows in certain rollover or side impact events.

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)

Label Location

82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

•

Your vehicle is equipped with left and right

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains

(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up

high enough to block the deployment of the

SABICs. The trim covering above the side win-

dows where the SABIC and its deployment path

are located should remain free from any obstruc-

tions.

• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for

the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any

accessory items in your vehicle which could alter

the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your

vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-

nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation

on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the

vehicle for any reason.

The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to

activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover

events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) de-

termines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in

a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,

based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle

damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not

Side Air Bags should have deployed.

Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint

system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to

blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are

up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously

injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should

never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or

area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an

infant or child restraint.

Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are

necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83

help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air

Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,

occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit

upright with their backs against the seats. Children must

be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat

that is appropriate for the size of the child.

WARNING!

• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean

against the door or window. Sit upright in the

center of the seat.

• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-

ment could cause you to be severely injured or

killed.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to

more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air

Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you

properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t

deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even

though you have Side Air Bags.

NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior

trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.

Side Impacts

In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in

determining the appropriate response to impact events.

The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on

the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require

Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the

Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact

84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side

impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,

including some collisions at certain angles, or some side

collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger

compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during

angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced

Front Air Bags deploy.

Rollover Events

Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover

events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of

the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro-

priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle

damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not

Side Air Bags should have deployed.

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events.

The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover

event may be in progress and whether deployment is

appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the

seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A

faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt preten-

sioners as well as the SABs and SABICs on both sides of

the vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy

the seat belt pretensioners, with or without the SABs and

SABICs, on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle

experiences a near rollover event.

If A Deployment Occurs

The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate

immediately after deployment.

NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all

collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with

the air bag system.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85

If you do have a collision, which deploys the air bags, any

or all of the following may occur:

• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions

and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags

deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric-

tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a

carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by

contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and

normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed

significantly within a few days, or if you have any

blistering, see your doctor immediately.

• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like

particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the

process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air

bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the

skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye

irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or

throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation

continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on

your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-

structions for cleaning.

Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-

ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air

bags will not be in place to protect you.

WARNING!

Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot

protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,

seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor

assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme-

diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller

System serviced as well.

NOTE:

• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,

but they will open during air bag deployment.

86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an

authorized dealer immediately.

Enhanced Accident Response System

In the event of an impact, if the communication network

remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending

on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine

whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-

tem perform the following functions:

• Cut off fuel to the engine.

• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or

until the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” posi-

tion.

• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as

the battery has power or until the ignition switch is

turned to the “OFF” position.

• Unlock the doors automatically.

System Reset Procedure

In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System

functions after an event, the ignition switch must be

changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition

OFF.

Air Bag Warning Light

The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection

in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Control-

ler (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and

interconnecting wiring associated with air bag

system electrical components.

The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of

the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the

START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in

the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag

system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87

The ORC contains a backup power supply system that

may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or

it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.

The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the

instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds

for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to

the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag

Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a mal-

function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag

Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A

single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on

again after initial startup.

The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate

the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc-

tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The

diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.

While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance

free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized

dealer service the air bag system immediately.

• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during

the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is

first turned to the ON/RUN position.

• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to

eight-second interval.

• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or

remains on while driving.

NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine

related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint

Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition

the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec-

tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag

system immediately.

88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-

ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags

to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come

on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned

on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes

on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the

air bag system immediately.

Redundant Air Bag Warning Light

If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is

detected, which could affect the Supplemental

Restraint System (“SRS”), the Redundant

Warning Light will illuminate on the instru-

ment panel.

The Redundant Warning Light will stay on until the fault

is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to alert

you that the Redundant Warning Light has come on and

a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Warning

Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driv-

ing have an authorized dealer service the vehicle imme-

diately.

For additional information regarding the Redundant

Warning Light refer to the “Instrument Panel” section of

this manual.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89

Maintaining Your Air Bag System

WARNING!

• Modifications to any part of the air bag system

could cause it to fail when you need it. You could

be injured if the air bag system is not there to

protect you. Do not modify the components or

wiring, including adding any kind of badges or

stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the

upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not

modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or

add aftermarket side steps or running boards.

• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air

bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who

works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag

system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may

not function properly if modifications are made.

Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any

air bag system service. If your seat, including your

trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any

way (including removal or loosening/tightening of

seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your

authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved

seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to

modify the air bag system for persons with dis-

abilities, contact your authorized dealer.

90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder

(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in

certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air

bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will

assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-

formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to

vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of

time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle

is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating.

• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts

were buckled/fastened.

• How far (if at all) the driver was pushing the accelera-

tor and/or brake pedal.

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of

the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a

non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by

the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-

sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)

are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-

forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of

personally identifying data routinely acquired during a

crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is

required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.

In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,

such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-

ment, can read the information if they have access to the

vehicle or the EDR.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91

Child Restraints

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all

times, including babies and children.

Every state in the United States, and every Canadian

province, requires that small children ride in proper

restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be pros-

ecuted for ignoring it.

Children 12 years or younger should ride properly

buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash

statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in

the rear seats rather than in the front.

WARNING!

In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a

projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to

hold even an infant on your lap could become so

great that you could not hold the child, no matter

how strong you are. The child and others could be

badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle

should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.

92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

There are different sizes and types of restraints for

children from newborn size to the child almost large

enough for an adult seat belt. Always check the child seat

Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat

for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instruc-

tions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual

and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.

Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has

a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety

Standards. You should also make sure that you can install

it in the vehicle where you will use it.

NOTE:

•

For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org

or call 1–866–SEATCHECK (732–8243). Canadian resi-

dents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for

additional information:

• www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedrivers-

childsafety-index-53.htm

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

Infants and

Toddlers

Children who are two years old or

younger and who have not reached the

height or weight limits of their child re-

straint

Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible

Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear

seat of the vehicle

Small Children Children who are at least two years old or

who have out-grown the height or weight

limit of their rear-facing child restraint

Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a

five-point Harness, facing forward in the

rear seat of the vehicle

Larger Children Children who have out-grown their

forward-facing child restraint, but are too

small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt

Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the ve-

hicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the

vehicle

Children Too Large

for Child Restraints

Children 12 years old or younger, who

have out-grown the height or weight limit

of their booster seat

Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of

the vehicle

94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Infants And Child Restraints

Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing

in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they

reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing

child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used

rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.

The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.

It is recommended for children from birth until they

reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.

Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or

forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats

often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing

direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used

rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant

carrier but are still less than at least two years old.

Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the

highest weight or height allowed by their convertible

child seat.

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of

an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child

12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-

facing child restraint.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle

with a rear seat.

Older Children And Child Restraints

Children who are two years old or who have outgrown

their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-

facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and

convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-

tion are for children who are over two years old or who

have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of

their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95

remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for

as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height

allowed by the child seat.

All children whose weight or height is above the

forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a

belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts

fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over

the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against

the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster

seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held

in the vehicle by the seat belt.

WARNING!

• Improper installation can lead to failure of an

infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a

collision. The child could be badly injured or

killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

directions exactly when installing an infant or

child restraint.

• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do

not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward

because it can loosen the child restraint attach-

ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting

the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has

been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.

(Continued)

96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in

the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-

ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it

loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it

could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause

serious personal injury.

Children Too Large For Booster Seats

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt

comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend

over the front of the seat when their back is against the

seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this

simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the

vehicle’s seat belt alone:

1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of

the vehicle seat?

2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front

of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the

way back?

3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder

between their neck and arm?

4. Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as possible,

touching the child’s thighs and not their stomach?

5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?

If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the

child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the

child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit

periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.

A child’s squirming or slouching can move the seat belt

out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or

neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or

use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child

correctly.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97

WARNING!

Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an

arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt

will not protect a child properly, which may result in

serious injury or death. A child must always wear

both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt

correctly.

98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint Type Combined

Weight of the

Child + Child

Restraint

Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below

LATCH –

Lower Anchors

Only

Seat Belt Only LATCH –

Lower Anchors

+ Top Tether

Anchor

Seat Belt + Top

Tether Anchor

Rear-Facing

Child Restraint

Up to 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

Rear-Facing

Child Restraint

More than

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Forward-Facing

Child Restraint

Up to 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

Forward-Facing

Child Restraint

More than

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99

Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH)

Restraint System

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-

age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower

Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system

has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-

equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages

located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the

seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the

seating position. These anchorages are used to install

LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s

seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether

anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating

positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether

anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the

following table for more information.

100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In

This Vehicle

•

Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per

seating position

•

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101

What is the weight limit (child’s

weight + weight of the child re-

straint) for using the LATCH an-

chorage system to attach the child

restraint?

65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system

until the combined weight of the

child and the child restraint is

65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt

and tether anchor instead of the

LATCH anchorage system once the

combined weight is more than

65 lbs (29.5 kg).

Can the LATCH anchorages and

the seat belt be used together to

attach a rear-facing or forward-

facing child restraint?

No Do not use the seat belt when you

use the LATCH anchorage system

to attach a rear-facing or forward-

facing child restraint.

102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Can two child restraints be at-

tached using a common lower

LATCH anchorage?

No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage

with two or more child restraints.

If the center position does not have

dedicated LATCH lower anchor-

ages, use the seat belt to install a

child seat in the center position

next to a child seat using the

LATCH anchorages in an outboard

position.

Can the rear-facing child restraint

touch the back of the front passen-

ger seat?

Yes The child seat may touch the back

of the front passenger seat if the

child restraint manufacturer also

allows contact. See your child re-

straint owner’s manual for more

information.

Can the head restraints be re-

moved?

Yes The head restraints may be re-

moved in every rear seating posi-

tion.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103

Locating The LATCH Anchorages

The lower anchorages are round bars that are

found at the rear of the seat cushion where it

meets the seatback. They are just visible when

you lean into the rear seat to install the child

restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger

along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.

Rear Seat LATCH Anchorages

104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Locating The Tether Anchorages

There are tether strap anchorages behind each

rear seating position located on the back of the

seat.

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be

equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.

Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower

anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the

anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some

rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a

tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end

to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten

the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.

Tether Anchorage Locations

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105

Center Seat LATCH

This vehicle has 5 lower LATCH anchorages in the rear

seat. Anchorages A and B are used for the right outboard

position behind the front passenger (1). Anchorages D

and E are used for the left outboard position behind the

driver (3). Anchorages C and D are used for the center

seating position (2). Do not install a LATCH—compatible

child restraint using anchorages B and C. This is not a

LATCH—compatible position in your vehicle

You can install up to two child seats using the LATCH

system at the same time. If you can fit three child

restraints in your vehicle, you must use the seatbelt to

install the center child restraint and you must use the

LATCH anchors for position (3) behind the driver. You

can use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat

belt for installing the third child seat in position (1)

behind the front passenger.

106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Options for installing two child seats using the LATCH

anchorages in this vehicle:

Right and left outboard seating positions (1 and 3):

Install the child seats in the right and left outboard

seating positions using lower anchorages A and B, and

D and E. Do not use the center seat anchorage, C. If the

child seats do not block the center seat belt webbing and

buckle, the center seat belt can be used to restraint an

occupant or child restraint in the center seating position.

2. Right outboard and center seating positions (1 and 2):

Install the first child seat in the right outboard seating

position using lower anchorages A and B. Install the

second child seat using the center anchorages, C and

D. Do not use the outer anchorage closest to the

opposite door, E. Do not use the remaining left out-

board seating position (3) for any occupant. The center

child restraint will block the seat belt buckle for this

position.

WARNING!

• Use anchorages C and D to install a LATCH-

compatible child restraint in the center seating

position (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible

child restraint using anchorages B and C. This is

not a LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.

• A child restraint installed in the center position (2)

will block the seat belt buckle for the empty left

outboard seat behind the driver (3). Do not use this

seat for another occupant.

• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more

than one child restraint.

(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107

WARNING! (Continued)

• If you are installing three child restraints next to

each other, you must use the seat belt and the center

tether anchor for the center position. You must use

the LATCH anchors to install the child seat in

position (3), behind the driver. You may use either

the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for

installing the child seat in position (1), behind the

front passenger. Please refer to “Installing the

LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for

typical installation instructions.

To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint

1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat

belt following the instructions below. See the section

“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat

Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating

position has.

2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the

tether strap of the child seat so that you can more

easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle

anchorages.

3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for

that seating position. For some second row seats, you

may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head

restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved

forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to

move it to its rear-most position to make room for the

child seat. You may also move the front seat forward

to allow more room for the child seat.

4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child

restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-

ing position.

108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the

top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child

Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-

tions to attach a tether anchor.

6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint

rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack

in the straps according to the child restraint manufac-

turer’s instructions.

7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by

pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt

path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)

in any direction.

How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:

When using the LATCH attaching system to install a

child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being

used by other occupants or being used to secure child

restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play

with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before

installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,

buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of

the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with

the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it

behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the

child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock

the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the

seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with

them.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109

WARNING!

• Improper installation of a child restraint to the

LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-

straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.

Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions

exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

• Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-

stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted

child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to

be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for

attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat

Belt

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are

equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat

belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not

necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be

“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the

webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing

retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will

make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back

into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,

refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description un-

der “Occupant Restraints.”

110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child

Restraints In This Vehicle

• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

•

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111

What is the weight limit (child’s

weight + weight of the child re-

straint) for using the Tether Anchor

with the seat belt to attach a forward

facing child restraint?

Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when

using the seat belt to install a for-

ward facing child restraint, up to

the recommended weight limit of

the child restraint.

Can the rear-facing child restraint

touch the back of the front passen-

ger seat?

Yes Contact between the front passen-

ger seat and the child restraint is

allowed, if the child restraint

manufacturer also allows contact.

Can the head restraints be re-

moved?

Yes The head restraints may be re-

moved in every rear seating posi-

tion.

Can the buckle stalk be twisted to

tighten the seat belt against the belt

path of the child restraint?

No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a

seating position with an ALR re-

tractor.

112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating

position. For some second row seats, you may need to

recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a

better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and

rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its

rear-most position to make room for the child seat.

You may also move the front seat forward to allow

more room for the child seat.

2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor

to pass it through the seat belt path of the child

restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the seat belt

path.

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a

“click”.

4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight

against the child seat.

5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of

the seat belt until you have pulled all the seat belt

webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing

to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing

retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the

seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.

6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is

locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-

bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.

7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the

lap portion around the child restraint while you push

the child restraint rearward and downward into the

vehicle seat.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113

8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the

seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect

the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether

strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints

Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to

attach a tether anchor.

9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by

pulling back and forth on the child seat at the seat belt

path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)

in any direction.

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the

seat belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether

Anchorage:

1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to

install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.

You may need to move the seat forward to provide

better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top

tether anchorage for that seating position, move the

child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one

is available.

2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path

for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If

your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head

restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,

route the tether strap under the head restraint and

between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head

restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard

side of the head restraint.

114 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to

the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.

4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child

restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

WARNING!

• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to

increased head motion and possible injury to the

child. Use only the anchorage position directly

behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top

tether strap.

• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,

make sure the tether strap does not slip into the

opening between the seatbacks as you remove

slack in the strap.

Transporting Pets

Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.

An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly

injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in

a collision.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses

or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

Tether Anchorage Locations

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 115

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the engine and

drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).

After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or

55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the

limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.

Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-

mental and should be avoided.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a

high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes

should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions

under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-

mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Mainte-

nance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.

CAUTION!

Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil

in the engine or damage may result.

NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its

first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This

should be considered a normal part of the break-in and

not interpreted as a problem.

SAFETY TIPS

Transporting Passengers

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO

AREA.

116 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• Do not leave children or animals inside parked

vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may

cause serious injury or death.

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,

inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people

riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously

injured or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your

vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat

belts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

Exhaust Gas

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon

monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.

Breathing it can make you unconscious and can

eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),

follow these safety tips:

• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in

confined areas any longer than needed to move

your vehicle in or out of the area.

• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/

rear doors open, make sure that all windows are

closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is

set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation

mode.

(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 117

WARNING! (Continued)

• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the

engine running, adjust your heating or cooling

controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the

blower at high speed.

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into

the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust

system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust

system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the

vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is

damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-

plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,

damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open

seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes

to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,

inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised

for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The

Vehicle

Seat Belts

Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for

cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be

replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the

system.

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a

collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after

a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,

torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat

belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.

Air Bag Warning Light

The light should come on and remain on for

four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the

ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is

118 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the

light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have

the system checked by an authorized dealer.

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place

the blower control on high speed. You should be able to

feel the air directed against the windshield. See your

authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-

able.

Floor Mat Safety Information

Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your

vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area

unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they

cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals

or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

WARNING!

Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of

vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-

sonal injury.

• Always make sure that floor mats are properly

attached to the floor mat fasteners.

• Never place or install floor mats or other floor

coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly

secured to prevent them from moving and interfer-

ing with the pedals or the ability to control the

vehicle.

• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top

of already installed floor mats. Additional floor

mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the

pedal area and interfere with the pedals.

(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 119

WARNING! (Continued)

• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always

properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have

been removed for cleaning.

• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the

driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-

jects can become trapped under the brake pedal

and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle

control.

• If required, mounting posts must be properly in-

stalled, if not equipped from the factory.

Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or

mounting can cause interference with the brake

pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of

control of the vehicle.

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside

The Vehicle

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear

patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects

lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts

and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.

Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires

(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and

exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn

signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument

panel.

120 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Door Latches

Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.

Fluid Leaks

Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,

engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline

fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are

suspected, the cause should be located and corrected

immediately.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 121

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

! MIRRORS ............................130

▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . .130

▫ Assist And 9–1–1 Rearview Mirror — If

Equipped ...........................131

▫ Outside Mirrors ......................137

▫ Power Mirrors .......................138

▫ Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped.......139

▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ...........140

▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .140

▫ Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If

Equipped ...........................141

! BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF

EQUIPPED ...........................141

▫ Rear Cross Path ......................146

▫ Modes Of Operation ...................148

▫ General Information....................149

! SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149

▫ Power Seats — If Equipped ..............150

▫ Manual Seats — If Equipped .............152

▫ Front Heated Seats — If Equipped .........154

▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped .......156

▫ Head Restraints ......................157

▫ 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold-Flat

Feature ............................159

! DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .162

▫ Programming The Memory Feature .........163

▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry

Transmitter To Memory .................164

▫ Memory Position Recall .................165

▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat ...................165

! TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD .........166

! LIGHTS .............................168

▫ Headlight Switch .....................168

▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .......169

▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With

Automatic Headlights Only) .............169

▫ Headlight Time Delay ..................169

▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If

Equipped ...........................170

▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If

Equipped ...........................172

▫ Lights-On Reminder ...................172

▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped ...............172

▫ Multifunction Lever ...................173

▫ Turn Signals .........................174

▫ Lane Change Assist ...................174

▫ High/Low Beam Switch ................174

124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Flash-To-Pass ........................174

▫ Front Map/Reading Lights ...............175

▫ Interior Lights .......................176

▫ Battery Saver Feature ..................178

! WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ......178

▫ Windshield Wiper Operation .............179

▫ Intermittent Wiper System ...............180

▫ Windshield Washer Operation.............181

▫ Mist ...............................182

▫ Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped . . . .183

▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ........183

! TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .185

HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED . .186

! ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF

EQUIPPED ...........................187

▫ To Activate ..........................188

▫ To Set A Desired Speed .................189

▫ To Deactivate ........................189

▫ To Resume Speed .....................189

▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............189

▫ To Accelerate For Passing ................191

! ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF

EQUIPPED ...........................191

▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .194

▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .195

▫ To Activate/Deactivate..................196

▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed .............197

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125

▫ To Cancel ...........................197

▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198

▫ To Resume ..........................198

▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............199

▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC ......201

▫ Overtake Aid ........................205

▫ ACC Operation At Stop .................205

▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu .......206

▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance ........207

▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC .......210

▫ General Information....................214

▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control

Mode ..............................215

! FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH

MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED ............218

▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With

Mitigation Operation ...................218

▫ Turning FCW ON Or OFF ...............220

▫ Changing FCW And Active Braking Status. . . .222

▫ FCW Limited Warning ..................222

▫ Service FCW Warning ..................223

! LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED .............223

▫ LaneSense Operation ...................223

▫ Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF............224

▫ LaneSense Warning Message..............225

▫ Changing LaneSense Status ..............234

126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

! PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF

EQUIPPED ...........................234

▫ ParkSense® Sensors ....................235

▫ ParkSense® Warning Display .............235

▫ ParkSense® Display ....................235

▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® ........240

▫ Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist

System .............................241

▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System ..........241

▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions.......241

! PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST

— IF EQUIPPED .......................244

▫ ParkSense® Sensors ....................246

▫ ParkSense® Warning Display .............247

▫ ParkSense® Display ....................247

▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® ........256

▫ Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System . . .257

▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System ..........258

▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions.......258

! PARKSENSE® ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —

IF EQUIPPED .........................261

▫ Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense® Active

Park Assist System.....................262

▫ Parallel Parking Space Assistance

Operation/Display.....................264

▫ Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance

Operation/Display.....................274

! PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF

EQUIPPED ...........................286

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127

! GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .288

▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .289

▫ Programming A Rolling Code .............290

▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code .........292

▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming ......293

▫ Using HomeLink® ....................295

▫ Security ............................295

▫ Troubleshooting Tips ...................295

▫ General Information....................296

! POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — IF

EQUIPPED ...........................297

▫ Opening Sunroof — Express ..............299

▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode .........299

▫ Closing Sunroof — Express...............300

▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode ..........300

▫ Venting Sunroof — Express ..............300

▫ Opening Power Shade — Express ..........300

▫ Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode .....301

▫ Closing Power Shade — Express ...........301

▫ Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode ......301

▫ Pinch Protect Feature ...................301

▫ Wind Buffeting .......................302

▫ Sunroof Maintenance ...................302

▫ Ignition OFF Operation .................302

! ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS ...........302

! POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED ........306

128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WIRELESS CHARGING PAD — IF EQUIPPED . .308

▫ Wireless Charging Pad Operation ..........309

! CUPHOLDERS ........................311

! STORAGE ............................312

▫ Glove Compartment ...................312

▫ Console Storage Compartment ............313

▫ Flip ’n Stow™ Front Passenger Seat Storage — If

Equipped ...........................315

! CARGO AREA FEATURES ................316

▫ Cargo Load Floor .....................316

▫ Cargo Extension Panels .................316

▫ Cargo Tie-Down Hooks And Loops ........316

▫

Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped . .318

▫ Rear Storage Bins .....................319

! REAR WINDOW FEATURES ..............320

▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer .............320

▫ Rear Window Defroster .................321

! ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . .322

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129

MIRRORS

Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped

A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is

a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-

shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with

a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for

mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,

left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be

adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.

Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced

by moving the small control under the mirror to the night

position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror

should be adjusted while the small control under the

mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).

Adjusting Rearview Mirror

130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Assist And 9–1–1 Rearview Mirror — If Equipped

A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is

a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-

shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with

a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for

mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,

left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be

adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.

If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and

a 9-1-1 button.

Assist And 9–1–1 Mirror

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131

NOTE: The ASSIST and 9–1–1 features operate through

the Uconnect® Access service. These buttons will only

operate as long as your Uconnect® Access service is

active. Refer to your “Uconnect® System supplement

manual” for further information.

ASSIST Call

The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you

to any one of the following support centers:

• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a

tow, just press the Assist button and you’ll be con-

nected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance

will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.

Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.

• Uconnect® Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support

for Uconnect® Access and Uconnect® Access Via

Mobile features.

• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other

vehicle issues.

9-1-1 Call

1. Press the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.

NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,

there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call

system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the

9-1-1 Call connection, press the 9-1-1 Call button on the

Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the

Phone Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn the

green LED light on the Rearview Mirror off.

2. The LED light located between the Assist and 9-1-1

buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a

connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.

132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1

operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit

the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1

operator:

• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.

• The vehicle brand.

• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.

4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator

through the vehicle audio system to determine if

additional help is needed.

NOTE: Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s

9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 opera-

tor may be able to open a voice connection with the

vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once

the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection with the

vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator should be able to

speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear

sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call

system will attempt to remain connected with the 9-1-1

operator until the 9-1-1 operator terminates the connec-

tion.

5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate

emergency responders and provide them with impor-

tant vehicle information and GPS coordinates.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133

WARNING!

• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,

fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions

or location), do not wait for voice contact from a

9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle

immediately and move to a safe location.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehi-

cle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket

electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical sys-

tem. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a

signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-

ference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,

never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way

mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your

vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas

on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BAT-

TERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING

DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE

UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES,

AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.

(Continued)

134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system

could cause the air bag system to fail when you

need it. You could be injured if the air bag system

is not there to help protect you.

9-1-1 Call System Limitations

Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1

Call system capabilities.

9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and

Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.

If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the

following may occur at the time the malfunction is

detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:

• The Rearview Mirror light located between the Assist

and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated

red.

• The Phone Screen will display the following message

“Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your

dealer.”

• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle phone

requires service. Please contact your dealer.”

WARNING!

• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you

will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview

Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized

dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.

• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on

the air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel

if a malfunction in any part of the system is

detected. If the air bag Warning Light is illumi-

nated, have an authorized dealer service the ORC

system immediately.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135

Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors

beyond Chrysler Group LLC’s control may prevent or

stop the 9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but

are not limited to, the following factors:

• The ignition key has been removed from the ignition

and the delayed accessories mode is active.

• The ignition key is in OFF position.

• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.

• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are

damaged during a crash.

• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-

nected during a vehicle crash.

• Wireless and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals

are unavailable or obstructed.

• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.

• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.

• Wireless network congestion.

• Weather.

• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.

NOTE: Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s

wireless and GPS antennas. You could prevent wireless

and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle

from placing an emergency call. Wireless and GPS signal

reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function

properly.

General Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)

This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)

this device must accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause undesired operation.

136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never

spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.

Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the

mirror clean.

Outside Mirrors

To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)

to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight

overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.

NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will

give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the

lane next to your vehicle.

WARNING!

Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side

convex mirror will look smaller and farther away

than they really are. Relying too much on your

passenger side convex mirror could cause you to

collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your

inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a

vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137

Power Mirrors

The power mirror switches are located on the driver’s

door trim panel.

Models With Express Window Feature

Press and release the mirror select button marked L (left)

or R (right) and then press one of the four arrow buttons

to move the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing.

The selection will time out after 30 seconds of inactivity

to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position

following an adjustment.

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,

you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit-

ter or the memory switch on the instrument panel to

return the power mirrors to pre-programmed positions.

Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The

Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.

Models Without Express Window Feature

Press the mirror select button marked L (left) or R (right)

and then press one of the four arrow buttons to move the

mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing.

Power Mirror Switches

1 — Mirror Direction Control

2—LeftAndRightMirrorSelect

138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped

The switch for the power folding mirrors is located

between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).

Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in,

pressing the switch a second time will return the mirrors

to the normal driving position.

NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph

(16 km/h) the folding feature will be disabled.

If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle

speed is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they

will automatically unfold.

Resetting the Power Folding Outside Mirrors

You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the

following occurs:

• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.

• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/

unfolded.

• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.

• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving

speeds.

Power Folding Mirror Switch

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139

To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold them

by pressing the button. (This may require multiple button

pushes). This resets them to their normal position.

Heated Mirrors — If Equipped

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This

feature can be activated whenever you turn on the

rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear

Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of

Your Vehicle” for further information.

Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped

An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use

the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the

mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automati-

cally. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If Equipped

The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for addi-

tional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out

the sun.

1. Fold down the sun visor.

2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.

3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to

extend it.

BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF

EQUIPPED

The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-

based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to

detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,

motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the

rear/front/side of the vehicle.

When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will

momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors

to let the driver know that the system is operational. The

BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any

forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode

when the vehicle is in PARK.

Rear Detection Zones

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141

The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane

width on both sides of the vehicle (12 ft or 3.8 m). The

zone length starts at the outside mirror and extends

approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the

vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on

both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches

approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert

the driver of vehicles in these areas.

NOTE:

• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about

rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de-

tection zones.

• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if

your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually

verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle

and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or

other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends

beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the

BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire

time the vehicle is in a forward gear.

The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are

located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road

contamination so that the BSM system can function

properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where

the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bum-

per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.)

The BSM system will provide a visual alert in the

appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object.

If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to

an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible

chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and

detected object are present on the same side at the same

time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In

addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be

muted.

142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three

different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to

see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an

alert during these types of zone entries.

Entering From The Side

Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either

side of the vehicle.

Warning Light Location

Side Monitoring

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143

Entering From The Rear

Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either

side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative

speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).

Overtaking Traffic

If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed

less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in

the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning

light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed

between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph

(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.

Rear Monitoring

Overtaking/Approaching

144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on

stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,

berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert

on such objects. This is normal operation and your

vehicle does not require service.

The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are

traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in

adjacent lanes.

Overtaking/Passing Stationary Objects

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145

WARNING!

The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to

help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-

clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped

with the BSM system, always check your vehicles

mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn

signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can

result in serious injury or death.

Rear Cross Path

The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the

driver when backing out of parking spaces where their

vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed

slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the

rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will

then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an

oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.

Opposing Traffic

146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of

the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of

the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately

3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of

approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot

situations.

NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can

be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the

sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the

system will not be able to alert the driver.

When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the

driver is alerted using both the visual and audible

alarms, including reducing the radio volume.

WARNING!

RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be

used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a

parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when

backing up, even when using RCP. Always check

carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and

be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other

vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back-

ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or

death.

RCP Detection Zones

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147

Modes Of Operation

Three selectable modes of operation are available in the

Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/

Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Blind Spot Alert Lights Only

When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM

system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side

view mirror based on a detected object. However, when

the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode,

the system will respond with both visual and audible

alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an

audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.

Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime

When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,

the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-

priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the

turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an

alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime

will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de-

tected object are present on the same side at the same

time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In

addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be

muted.

NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the

BSM system, the radio is also muted.

When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with

both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is

present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio

is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the

RCP state always requests the chime.

Blind Spot Alert Off

When the BSM system is turned off there will be no

visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP

systems.

148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating

mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle

is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and

used.

General Information

This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency

that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications

Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada

Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. The device may not cause harmful interference.

2. The device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration of the device.

Changes or modifications to any of these systems by

other than an authorized service facility could void

authorization to use this equipment.

SEATS

Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the

vehicle.

WARNING!

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or

outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in

these areas are more likely to be seriously injured

or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your

vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat

belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are

more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149

Power Seats — If Equipped

Some models may be equipped with a power driver’s

seat. The power seat switch is located on the outboard

side of the seat near the floor. Use the switch to move the

seat up, down, forward or rearward.

Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward

The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward.

Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward, the

seatback will move in the direction of the switch. Release

the switch when the desired position has been reached.

Power Seat Switch Power Seat Recliner Switch

150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the

shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.

In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,

which could result in serious injury or death.

Power Lumbar — If Equipped

Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats

may be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar

switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat.

Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or

decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or

downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.

Power Lumbar Switch

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151

Manual Seats — If Equipped

Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment

On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting

bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor.

While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the

seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have

reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,

move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that

the seat adjusters have latched.

WARNING!

• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.

Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of

control which could cause a collision and serious

injury or death.

• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat

belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious

injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted

seat belt.

Front Seat Adjustment

152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment

To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the

outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired

position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift

the lever, lean forward and release the lever.

WARNING!

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the

shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.

In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,

which could result in serious injury or death.

Recline Lever

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153

Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped

The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by

using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat.

Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push

downward on the lever to lower the seat height.

Front Heated Seats — If Equipped

The front heated seats control buttons are located within

the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the control

buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.

• Press the heated seat button

once to turn the High

setting ON.

• Press the heated seat button

a second time to turn

the Low setting ON.

• Press the heated seat button

a third time to turn

the heating elements OFF.

If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will auto-

matically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 min-

utes of continuous operation. At that time, the display

will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The

LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after ap-

proximately 45 minutes.

Seat Height Adjustment

154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats

to operate.

Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start

On models that are equipped with remote start, the

heated seats can be programed to come on during a

remote start.

This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect®

system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understand-

ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin

because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,

spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-

tion or other physical condition must exercise care

when using the seat heater. It may cause burns

even at low temperatures, especially if used for

long periods of time.

• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that

insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.

This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting

in a seat that has been overheated could cause

serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-

ture of the seat.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155

Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped

Located in the seat cushion and seat back are small fans

that draw the air from the passenger compartment and

move air through fine perforations in the seat cover to

help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher

ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds,

HIGH and LOW.

The front ventilated seats control buttons are located

within the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the

control buttons through the climate screen or the controls

screen.

• Press the ventilated seat button

once to choose

HIGH.

• Press the ventilated seat button

a second time to

choose LOW.

• Press the ventilated seat button

a third time to

turn the ventilated seat OFF.

NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated

seats to operate.

Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start

On models that are equipped with remote start, the

ventilated seats can be programed to come on during a

remote start.

This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect®

system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understand-

ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Head Restraints

Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury

by restricting head movement in the event of a rear

impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top

of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.

WARNING!

The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-

erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu-

pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad-

justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a

vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted

or removed could cause serious injury or death in the

event of a collision.

Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats

The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with

Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear

impact the RHRs will automatically extend forward

minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants

head and the RHR.

The RHRs will automatically return to their normal

position following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not

return to their normal position see your authorized

dealer immediately.

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head

restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the release

button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push

downward on the head restraint.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157

NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by

qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either

of the head restraints require removal, see your autho-

rized dealer.

WARNING!

Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head

Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD

players. These items may interfere with the operation

of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a

collision and could result in serious injury or death.

Rear Head Restraints

The rear head restraints have two positions UP and

DOWN. When the center seat is being occupied the head

restraint should be in the raised position. When there are

no occupants in the center seat the head restraint can be

lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head

restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the release

button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push

downward on the head restraint.

Release Button

158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold-Flat

Feature

To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be

folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still

maintains some rear seating room.

NOTE: Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary

to position the front seat to its mid-track position. Also,

be sure that the front seats are fully upright and posi-

tioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down

easily.

WARNING!

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,

inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people

riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously

injured or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your

vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat

belts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

Release Button

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159

Rear Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment

Lift up on the adjusting bar located at the front of the seat

near the floor and release it when the seat is at the desired

position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and

rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters

have latched.

To Lower The Rear Seat

1. Lift the seatback release lever located on the upper

outer edge of the seat or pull the pull strap located on

the middle outer edge of the seat.

2. Fold the rear seatback completely forward.

Rear Seatback Release Lever And Pull Strap

160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To Raise The Rear Seat

NOTE: If interference from the cargo area prevents the

seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty

returning the seat to its proper position.

Raise the seatback and lock it into place.

WARNING!

Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into

position. If the seatback is not securely locked into

position the seat will not provide the proper stability

for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly

latched seat could cause serious injury.

Recliner Adjustment

The rear seatback also reclines for additional passenger

comfort. Pull on the pull strap while sitting in the rear

seat to recline the seatback.

WARNING!

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the

shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.

In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,

which could result in serious injury or death.

Rear Seat Recliner Pull Strap

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161

DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED

This feature allows the driver to store up to two different

memory profiles, for easy recall through a memory

switch. Each memory profile contains desired position

settings for the driver seat and side mirrors and a set of

desired radio station presets.

The memory switch is located on the driver’s side door

panel. The switch contains 3 buttons, a S (SET) button to

activate the memory save function, the number (1)

memory button and the number (2) memory button. The

memory switch allows the driver to recall either of the

two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the

appropriate number button on the switch.

Driver Memory Switch

162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Programming The Memory Feature

To create a new memory profile, perform the following:

NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an

existing profile from memory.

1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the ON position.

2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-

ences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets).

3. Press and release the SET button on the memory

switch, then press the number (1) button within five

seconds. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID), will

display which memory position is being set.

If desired, a second memory profile can be stored into

memory as follows:

1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the ON position.

2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-

ences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets).

3. Press and release the SET button on the memory

switch, then press the number (2) button within five

seconds. The EVIC/DID will display which memory

position is being set.

NOTE:

• For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission,

memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in

PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a

memory profile.

• For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, the

vehicle speed must be at 0 mph (0 km/h) to recall a

memory profile.

• To set a memory profile to your RKE transmitter, refer

to “Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry

Transmitter To Memory” in this section.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163

Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry

Transmitter To Memory

Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can be

programmed to recall one of two pre-programmed

memory profiles with a press of the UNLOCK button on

the RKE transmitter.

NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you

must select the “Memory To FOB” feature through the

Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings”

in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further

information.

To program your RKE transmitters, perform the follow-

ing:

1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the OFF position.

2. Select the desired memory profile 1 or 2.

NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer

to #Programming The Memory Feature# in this section for

instructions on how to set a memory profile.

3. Press and release the SET button on the memory

switch, then within five seconds press and release the

button labeled 1 or 2 accordingly. “Memory Profile

Set” (1 or 2) will display in the EVIC/DID.

4. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE

transmitter within 10 seconds.

NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your

memory settings by pressing the SET (S) button, and

within 10 seconds, followed by pressing the UNLOCK

button on the RKE transmitter.

164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Memory Position Recall

NOTE:

• For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission,

the vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory posi-

tions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in

PARK, a message will display in the EVIC/DID.

• For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, the

vehicle speed must be at 0 mph (0 km/h) to recall

memory positions. If a recall is attempted with the

vehicle speed above 0 mph (0 km/h), a message will

display in the EVIC/DID.

To recall the memory settings for driver one, press

MEMORY button number 1 or the UNLOCK button on

the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.

To recall the memory setting for driver two, press

MEMORY button number 2 or the UNLOCK button on

the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2.

A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the

MEMORY buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When a

recall is cancelled, the driver seat will stop moving. A

delay of one second will occur before another recall can

be selected.

Easy Entry/Exit Seat

This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to

enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the

vehicle.

The distance the driver seat moves depends on where

you have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the

vehicles ignition to the OFF position.

• When you cycle the vehicles ignition to the OFF

position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60

mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than

or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165

The seat will return to its previously set position when

you cycle the vehicles ignition to the ACC or RUN

position.

• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the

driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)

forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no

benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit

or Easy Entry.

Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy

Entry and Easy Exit position.

NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when

the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy

Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through

the programmable features in the Uconnect® system.

Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable

Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for

further information.

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD

Two latches must be released to open the hood.

1. Pull the hood release lever located under the drivers

side of the instrument panel.

Hood Release

166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and pull the safety

latch release lever forward (toward you). The safety

latch release lever is located behind the center front

edge of the hood.

CAUTION!

To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to

close it. Lower the hood until it is open approxi-

mately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should

secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless

the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.

WARNING!

Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your

vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open

when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.

Failure to follow this warning could result in serious

injury or death.

Hood Safety Latch Release Lever Location

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167

LIGHTS

Headlight Switch

The headlight switch is located on the left side of

the instrument panel. This switch controls the

operation of the headlights, parking lights, auto-

matic headlights — if equipped, instrument panel lights,

instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog

lights — if equipped.

Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent

for parking light and instrument panel light operation.

Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for

headlight, parking light and instrument panel light op-

eration.

Headlight Switch

168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Headlights — If Equipped

This system automatically turns the headlights on or off

according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,

rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the last detent for

automatic headlight operation. When the system is on,

the headlight time delay feature is also on. This means

the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you

place the ignition into the OFF position. To turn the

automatic system off, move the headlight switch out of

the AUTO position.

NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-

lights will come on in the automatic mode.

Headlights On With Wipers (Available With

Automatic Headlights Only)

When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on

after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is

placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature

is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off

when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by

this feature.

NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be

turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to

“Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Fea-

tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for

further information.

Headlight Time Delay

This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination

for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your

vehicle in an unlit area.

To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF

position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off

the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval

begins when the headlight switch is turned off.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169

If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place

the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the

delay.

If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will

turn off in the normal manner.

NOTE:

• The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of

placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this

feature.

• The headlight delay time is programmable using the

Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further

information.

Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If

Equipped

The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system

provides increased forward lighting at night by automat-

ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera

mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera

detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches

from high beams to low beams until the approaching

vehicle is out of view.

NOTE:

• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be

turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to

“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-

ment Panel” for further information.

• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights

of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to

remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,

170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

and other obstructions on the windshield or camera

lens will cause the system to function improperly.

• To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam Sensitiv-

ity Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam

Sensitivity Control (not recommended), toggle high-

beam lever 6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of

ignition ON. System will return to default setting upon

ignition off.

If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp

Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed

to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized

dealer.

To Activate

1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight

position.

2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward

front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.

NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is

at or above 15 mph (24 km/h).

To Deactivate

1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward

in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal

operation of low beams).

2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to

reactivate the system.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped

The Daytime Running Lights will turn On when the

engine is started and remain On unless the headlamps

are turned ON, the parking brake is applied, or the

engine is shut Off.

NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the

vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can

be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System, refer

to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-

ment Panel” for further information.

Lights-On Reminder

If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition

is in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert the

driver when the driver’s door is opened.

Fog Lights — If Equipped

The front fog light switch is built into the headlight

switch.

To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking

lights or the low beam headlights and press the

headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either

press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the

headlight switch.

Fog Light Switch

172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates

when the fog lights are turned on.

NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam

headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the

high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.

Multifunction Lever

The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn

signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The

multifunction lever is located on the left side of the

steering column.

Multifunction Lever

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173

Turn Signals

Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows

on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show

proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.

NOTE:

• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is

a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light

bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is

moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is

defective.

• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the EVIC/

DID and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle

is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn

signal on.

• When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a turn

signal is activated, the Daytime Running Lamp will

turn off on the side of the vehicle in which the turn

signal is flashing. The Daytime Running Lamp will

turn back on when the turn signal is turned off.

Lane Change Assist

Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond

the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash

three times then automatically turn off.

High/Low Beam Switch

Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch

the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever

toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.

Flash-To-Pass

You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by

lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This

will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is

released.

174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Front Map/Reading Lights

The front map/reading lights are mounted in the over-

head console. Each light can be turned on by pressing a

switch on either side of the console. To turn the lights off,

press the switch a second time. These lights also turn on

when a door is opened, or when the UNLOCK button on

the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed,

or when the dimmer control is turned completely up-

ward to the second detent.

There are courtesy lights located above the front seats.

The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the lens.

To turn the lights off, press the lens a second time.

Front Map/Reading Light Switches

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175

Interior Lights

The interior lights come on when a door is opened.

To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off

automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to

the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights

were switched on manually or are on because a door is

open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk

light. To restore interior light operation, either place the

ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light

switch.

Instrument Panel Dimmer Control

The instrument panel dimmer control is part of the

headlight switch and is located on the drivers side of the

instrument panel.

With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the

instrument panel dimmer control upward will increase

the brightness of the instrument panel lights and lighted

cupholders — if equipped.

Instrument Panel Dimmer

176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Ambient Light Control — If Equipped

Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or down-

ward to increase or decrease the brightness of the ambi-

ent light located in the overhead console, door handle

lights, under I/P lights, door map pocket lights, and

cubby bin lights.

Dome Light Position

Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control completely

upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights.

The interior lights will remain on when the instrument

panel dimmer control is in this position.

Interior Light Defeat (OFF)

Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control to the ex-

treme bottom OFF position. The interior lights will

remain off when the doors are open.

Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)

Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to

the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays

such as the odometer, Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID), and

radio when the position lights or headlights are on.

Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177

Battery Saver Feature

To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off

automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is

moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the

interior lights were switched on manually or are on

because a door is open.

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the

windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the

steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotat-

ing a switch, located on the end of the lever. For infor-

mation on the rear wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window

Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Ve-

hicle”.

Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever

178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Windshield Wiper Operation

Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent

positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low

wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper

operation.

CAUTION!

Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents

the windshield wiper blades from returning to the

“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is

turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park”

position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.

Windshield Wiper Operation

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179

Intermittent Wiper System

Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when

weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a

variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving

speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be

regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds

between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second

(fourth detent).

NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph

(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.

Intermittent Wiper Operation

180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Windshield Washer Operation

To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward you

and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled

while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on

and operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is

released, and then resume the intermittent interval pre-

viously selected.

If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off

position, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles,

then turn off.

Windshield Washer Operation

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181

WARNING!

Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield

could lead to a collision. You might not see other

vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of

the windshield during freezing weather, warm the

windshield with the defroster before and during

windshield washer use.

Mist

Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make

occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever

upward to the Mist position and release for a single

wiping cycle.

NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer

pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the

windshield. The wash function must be used in order to

spray the windshield with washer fluid.

Mist Control

182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield Wiper

De-Icer feature that may be activated under the following

conditions:

• Activation By Front Defrost — The Windshield Wiper

De-Icer shall be activated automatically in the case of a

cold weather manual start with full front defrost, the

blower speed level is greater than 5, and when the

ambient temperature is below 40° F (4.4° C).

• Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield Wiper

De-Icer shall be activated automatically when the rear

defrost is turned on and when the ambient tempera-

ture is below 40° F (4.4° C).

• Activation By Remote Start Operation — When re-

mote start is active and the outside ambient tempera-

ture is less than 40° F (4.4° C), the Windshield Wiper

De-Icer shall be enabled. On exiting remote start

resume previous operation except, if the Windshield

Wiper De-Icer timer and operation shall continue.

Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped

This feature senses moisture on the windshield and

automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The

feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray

from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate

the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings

to activate this feature.

The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the

multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least

sensitive, and wiper delay position four is the most

sensitive. Setting three should be used for normal rain

conditions. Settings one and two can be used if the driver

desires less wiper sensitivity. Setting four can be used if

the driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch

in the OFF position when not using the system.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183

NOTE:

• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the

wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.

• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly

when ice, or dried salt water is present on the wind-

shield.

• Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone

may reduce Rain Sensing performance.

• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off

using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect®

Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”

for further information.

The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the

wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the

following conditions:

• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is

first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not

operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed

is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem-

perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).

• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the

ignition is ON, and the automatic transmission is in

the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will

not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle

speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift

lever/gear selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL

position.

184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped

with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are

not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start

mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed

the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing

wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and

no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.

TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column

upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or

shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is

located below the steering wheel at the end of the

steering column.

To unlock the steering column, push the control handle

downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column,

move the steering wheel upward or downward as de-

sired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull

the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired.

Tilt/Telescoping Lever

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185

To lock the steering column in position, push the control

handle upward until fully engaged.

WARNING!

Do not adjust the steering column while driving.

Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-

ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause

the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to

follow this warning may result in serious injury or

death.

HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED

The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps

warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering

wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated

steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up

to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. The

heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn

on when the steering wheel is already warm.

The heated steering wheel control button is located

within the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the

control button through the climate screen or the controls

screen.

• Press the heated steering wheel button

once to

turn the heating element ON.

• Press the heated steering wheel button

a second

time to turn the heating element OFF.

NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated

steering wheel to operate.

186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start

On models that are equipped with remote start, the

heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on

during a remote start through the Uconnect® system.

Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your

Instrument Panel” for further information.

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin

because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,

spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-

tion, or other physical conditions must exercise

care when using the steering wheel heater. It may

cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if

used for long periods.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that

insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering

wheel covers of any type and material. This may

cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over

accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph

(40 km/h).

The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the

right side of the steering wheel.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187

NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-

tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut

down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at

the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control

System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic

Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired

vehicle set speed.

To Activate

Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed

control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information

Display (DID) will illuminate. To turn the system off,

push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise

Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be

turned off when not in use.

Electronic Speed Control Buttons

1—ON/OFF 4—SET-/DECEL

2—SET+/ACCEL 5—CANCEL

3—RESUME

188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on

when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally

set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.

You could lose control and have an accident. Always

leave the system OFF when you are not using it.

To Set A Desired Speed

Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON.

NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed

and on level ground before pressing the SET (+) or SET (-)

button.

When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press

the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the

accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected

speed.

To Deactivate

A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL

button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the

vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with-

out erasing the set speed from memory.

Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition

switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.

To Resume Speed

To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button

and release. Resume can be used at any speed above

20 mph (32 km/h).

To Vary The Speed Setting

To Increase Speed

When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-

crease speed by pushing the SET + button.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189

The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen

speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pressing the SET + button once will result ina1mph

increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the

button results in an increase of 1 mph.

• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will

continue to increase until the button is released, then

the new set speed will be established.

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h

increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the

button results in an increase of 1 km/h.

• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will

continue to increase until the button is released, then

the new set speed will be established.

To Decrease Speed

When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de-

crease speed by pushing the SET - button.

The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen

speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pressing the SET - button once will result ina1mph

decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the

button results in a decrease of 1 mph.

• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will

continue to decrease until the button is released, then

the new set speed will be established.

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h

decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the

button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.

190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will

continue to decrease until the button is released, then

the new set speed will be established.

To Accelerate For Passing

Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the

pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills

The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the

vehicle set speed.

NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains

speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on

moderate hills is normal.

On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so

it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed

Control.

WARNING!

Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the

system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-

hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you

could lose control and have an accident. Do not use

Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads

that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF

EQUIPPED

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving

convenience provided by cruise control while traveling

on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a

safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191

ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in

light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant

need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar

sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a

vehicle directly ahead of you.

NOTE:

• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,

ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.

• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will

apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed

the original set speed) automatically to maintain a

preset following distance, while matching the speed of

the vehicle ahead.

WARNING!

• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience

system. It is not a substitute for active driving

involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibil-

ity to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather

conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle

ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to

ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road

conditions. Your complete attention is always re-

quired while driving to maintain safe control of

your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can

result in a collision and death or serious personal

injury.

• The ACC system:

• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,

and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a

traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).

(Continued)

192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-

tions into account, and may be limited upon

adverse sight distance conditions.

• Does not always fully recognize complex driving

conditions, which can result in wrong or missing

distance warnings.

• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while

following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle

for approximately 3 minutes in the stop position.

If the target vehicle does not start moving within

3 minutes the parking brake will be activated,

and the ACC system will be cancelled.

You should switch off the ACC system:

• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,

heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,

in highway construction zones).

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;

when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-

covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill

slopes.

• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.

• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a

constant speed.

The Cruise Control system has two control modes:

• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an

appropriate distance between vehicles.

• Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control mode

for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional

information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise

Control Mode” in this section.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193

NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control

will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of

the mode selected.

You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control

buttons. The two control modes function differently.

Always confirm which mode is selected.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation

The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the

steering wheel) operates the ACC system.

Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons

1—NORMAL(FIXEDSPEED)CRUISECONTROLON/OFF

2—SET+/ACCEL

3—RESUME

4—SET-/DECEL

5—DISTANCESETTING—INCREASE

6—ADAPTIVECRUISECONTROL(ACC)ON/OFF

7—DISTANCESETTING—DECREASE

8—CANCEL

194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications

to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive

Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.

Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above

0 mph (0 km/h).

The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph

(32 km/h).

When the system is turned on and in the READY state,

the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or

Driver Information Display (DID) displays “ACC

Ready.”

When the system is OFF, the EVIC/DID displays “Adap-

tive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”

NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following

conditions:

• When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.

• When you apply the brakes.

• When the parking brake is set.

• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, RE-

VERSE or NEUTRAL.

• When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.

• When the brakes are overheated.

• When the driver door is open.

• When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195

To Activate/Deactivate

Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the EVIC/DID

displays “ACC Ready.”

To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive

Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this

time, the system will turn off and the EVIC/DID will

display “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”

Adaptive Cruise Control Ready

Adaptive Cruise Control Off

196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system

on when not in use is dangerous. You could acciden-

tally set the system or cause it to go faster than you

want. You could lose control and have a collision.

Always leave the system off when you are not using

it.

To Set A Desired ACC Speed

When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the

SET + button or the SET - button and release. The

EVIC/DID will display the set speed.

If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below

20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to

20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle

speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be

the current speed of the vehicle.

NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle

in front of your vehicle in close proximity.

Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do

not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set

speed. If this occurs:

• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in

the EVIC/DID.

• The system will not be controlling the distance be-

tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle

speed will only be determined by the position of the

accelerator pedal.

To Cancel

The following conditions cancel the system:

• The brake pedal is applied.

• The CANCEL button is pressed.

• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197

• The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the

Drive position.

• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-

tem (ESC/TCS) activates.

• The vehicle parking brake is applied.

• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.

• Driver door is opened at low speeds.

• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.

• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.

To Turn Off

The system will turn off and clear the set speed in

memory if:

• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button

is pressed.

• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control

ON/OFF button is pressed.

• The ignition is turned OFF.

• You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.

To Resume

If there is a set speed in memory press the RES (resume)

button and then remove your foot from the accelerator

pedal. The EVIC/DID will display the last set speed.

NOTE:

• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two

seconds, then the driver will either have to press the

RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to

reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed.

• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle

in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.

198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

The Resume function should only be used if traffic

and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed

that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and

road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate

or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to

follow these warnings can result in a collision and

death or serious personal injury.

To Vary The Speed Setting

To Increase Speed

While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by

pressing the SET + button.

The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen

speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pressing the SET + button once will result ina1mph

increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the

button results in an increase of 1 mph.

• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will

continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the

button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected

in the EVIC/DID.

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h

increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the

button results in an increase of 1 km/h.

• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will

continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the

button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected

in the EVIC/DID.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199

To Decrease Speed

While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by

pressing the SET - button.

The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen

speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pressing the SET - button once will result ina1mph

decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the

button results in a decrease of 1 mph.

• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will

continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the

button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-

flected in the EVIC/DID.

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h

decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the

button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.

• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will

continue to decrease in 10 km/h increments until the

button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-

flected in the EVIC/DID.

NOTE:

• When you override and push the SET + button or SET

- buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed

of the vehicle.

• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the

engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle

sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system

will automatically slow the vehicle.

200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop

when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle

follows a target vehicle to a standstill, after two

seconds the driver will either have to press the RES

(resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to

reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed.

• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up

hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on

moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting

may occur while climbing uphill or descending down-

hill. This is normal operation and necessary to main-

tain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the

ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature

exceeds normal range (overheated).

Setting The Following Distance In ACC

The specified following distance for ACC can be set by

varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),

three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).

Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC

calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This

distance setting displays in the EVIC/DID.

Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201

Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long) Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)

202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To increase the distance setting, press the Distance Set-

ting — Increase button and release. Each time the button

is pressed, the distance setting increases by one bar

(longer).

To decrease the distance setting, press the Distance

Setting — Decrease button and release. Each time the

button is pressed, the distance setting decreases by one

bar (shorter).

If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the

set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the

same lane, the EVIC/DID displays the “Sensed Vehicle

Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed

automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless

of the set speed.

The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:

• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set

speed.

• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of

the sensor.

Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203

• The distance setting is changed.

• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on

ACC Activation).

The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-

ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if

necessary.

NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the

ACC system applies the brakes.

A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts

that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to

maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert

“BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC/DID and a chime will

sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum

braking capacity.

NOTE: The “Brake!” Screen in the EVIC/DID is a warn-

ing for the driver to take action and does not necessarily

mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is

applying the brakes autonomously.

Brake Alert

204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Overtake Aid

When driving with ACC engaged and following a target

vehicle, the system will provide an additional accelera-

tion to assist in passing vehicles in front. This additional

acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left

turn signal. In locations with left hand drive traffic,

Overtake Aid is active only when passing on the left

hand side of the Target vehicles.

When a vehicle goes from a location with left hand drive

traffic to a location with right hand drive traffic, the ACC

system will automatically detect traffic direction. In this

condition, Overtake Aid is active only when passing on

the right side of the Target vehicle. This additional

acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the right

turn signal. In this condition the ACC system will no

longer provide Overtake Aid on the left side until it

determines that the vehicle has moved back to a location

with left hand drive traffic.

ACC Operation At Stop

In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle to

a standstill while following a target vehicle, if the target

vehicle starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle

coming to a standstill, your vehicle will resume motion

without the need for any driver action.

If the target vehicle does not start moving within two

seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the driver

will either have to press the RES (resume) button, or

apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the

existing Set Speed.

NOTE: After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a

standstill for approximately 3 consecutive minutes, the

parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system will

be cancelled.

While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the

driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is opened,

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205

the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system

will be cancelled.

WARNING!

When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must

ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or

objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow

these warnings can result in a collision and death or

serious personal injury.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu

The EVIC/DID displays the current ACC system set-

tings. The EVIC/DID is located in the center of the

instrument cluster. The information it displays depends

on ACC system status.

Press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/

OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of

the following displays in the EVIC/DID:

Adaptive Cruise Control Off

When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap-

tive Cruise Control Off.”

Adaptive Cruise Control Ready

When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has

not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise

Control Ready.”

Press the SET + or the SET- button (located on the

steering wheel) and the following will display in the

EVIC/DID:

ACC SET

When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the

instrument cluster.

The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC

activity occurs, which may include any of the following:

206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• Distance Setting Change

• System Cancel

• Driver Override

• System Off

• ACC Proximity Warning

• ACC Unavailable Warning

• The EVIC/DID will return to the last display selected

after five seconds of no ACC display activity

Display Warnings And Maintenance

“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”

Warning

The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”

warning will display and also a chime will indicate when

conditions temporarily limit system performance.

This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as

in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become

temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud,

dirt or ice. In these cases, the EVIC/DID will display

“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and

the system will deactivate.

The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”

message can sometimes be displayed while driving in

highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or

ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the

vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when

the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path

this warning may temporarily occur.

NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar

Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise

Control is still available. For additional information refer

to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this

section.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207

If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should

examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of

an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the

vehicle behind the lower grille.

To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor-

tant to note the following maintenance items:

• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the

sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage

the sensor lens.

• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so

could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and

require a sensor realignment.

• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due

to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.

• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,

including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.

Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or

malfunction.

When the condition that deactivated the system is no

longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive

Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by

simply reactivating it.

NOTE:

• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar

Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than

once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or

other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at

your authorized dealer.

208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an after-

market grille or modifying the grille is not recom-

mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit

ACC/FCW operation.

“Clean Front Windshield” Warning

The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front

Windshield” warning will display and also a chime will

indicate when conditions temporarily limit system per-

formance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibil-

ity, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC

system may also become temporarily blinded due to

obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and

fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the EVIC/DID

will display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean

Front Windshield” and the system will have degraded

performance.

The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front

Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while

driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW

system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas.

Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking

any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may

temporarily occur.

If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should

examine the windshield and the camera located on the

back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may

require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.

When the condition that created limited functionality is

no longer present, the system will return to full function-

ality.

NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean

Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more

than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or

other obstruction, have the windshield and forward

facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209

Service ACC/FCW Warning

If the system turns off, and the EVIC/DID displays

“ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required”or “Cruise/

FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an

internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that

limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still

drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be tempo-

rarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again

later, following a key cycle. If the problem persists, see

your authorized dealer.

Precautions While Driving With ACC

In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection

issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpect-

edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to

intervene.

Towing A Trailer

NOTE: Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.

Offset Driving

ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is

offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging

in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance

to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and

out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to

brake or accelerate unexpectedly.

Offset Driving Condition Example

210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Turns And Bends

When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system

may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for

stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once

the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume

your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC

system functionality.

NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.

Turn Or Bend Example

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211

Using ACC On Hills

When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in

your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic

conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC perfor-

mance may be limited.

Lane Changing

ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the

lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,

ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and

it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC

system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until

it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient

distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be atten-

tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.

ACC Hill Example

212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Narrow Vehicles

Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of

the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they

have moved fully into the lane. There may not be

sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.

Lane Changing Example

Narrow Vehicle Example

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213

Stationary Objects And Vehicles

ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary

vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations

where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and

the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be

attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.

General Information

This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency

that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications

Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada

Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. The device may not cause harmful interference.

2. The device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration of the device.

Changes or modifications to any of these systems by

other than an authorized service facility could void

authorization to use this equipment.

Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example

214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control

Mode

In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal

(Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available

for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed)

Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a

set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate

the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be

operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).

To change between the different control modes, press the

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button

which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed)

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pressing of the

NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CON-

TROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (chang-

ing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Con-

trol mode.

WARNING!

In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will

not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity

warning does not activate and no alarm will sound

even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since

neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the

vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to

maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and

the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is

selected.

To Set A Desired Speed

Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic

Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has

reached the desired speed, press the SET (+) or

SET (-) button and release. Release the accel-

erator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215

Once a speed has been set a message (CRUISE CON-

TROL SET TO MPH/KM) will appear indicating what

speed was set. This light will turn on when the electronic

speed control is SET.

To Vary The Speed Setting

To Increase Speed

When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Con-

trol is set, you can increase speed by pressing the SET +

button.

The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of

U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pressing the SET + button once will result ina1mph

increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the

button results in an increase of 1 mph.

• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will

continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the

button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected

in the EVIC/DID display.

To Decrease Speed

When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,

you can decrease speed by pressing the SET - button.

The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed

of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pressing the SET - button once will result ina1mph

decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the

button results in a decrease of 1 mph.

216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will

continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the

button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-

flected in the EVIC/DID display.

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h

decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the

button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.

• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will

continue to decrease in 10 km/h increments until the

button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-

flected in the EVIC/DID display.

To Cancel

The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed

Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the

memory:

• The brake pedal is applied.

• The CANCEL button is pressed.

• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-

tem (ESC/TCS) activates.

• The vehicle parking brake is applied.

• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-

heated).

• The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the

Drive position.

To Resume Speed

To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button

and release. Resume can be used at any speed above

20 mph (32 km/h).

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217

To Turn Off

The system will turn off and erase the set speed in

memory if:

• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control

ON/OFF button is pressed.

• The ignition is turned off.

• You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.

• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is

pressed.

FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH

MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation

Operation

The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with

mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings,

visual warnings (within the EVIC/DID), and may apply

a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential

frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are

intended to provide the driver with enough time to react,

avoid or mitigate the potential collision.

NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward

looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller

(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.

When the system determines that a forward collision is

probable, the driver will be provided with audible and

visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning.

If the driver does not take action based upon these

progressive warnings, then the system will provide a

limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle

and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver

reacts to the warnings by braking and the system deter-

mines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by

218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the

system will compensate and provide additional brake

force as required.

If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event

begins at a speed below 20 mph (32 km/h), the system

may provide the maximum braking possible to mitigate

the potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision

Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle com-

pletely, the system will hold the vehicle at standstill for

two seconds and then release the brakes.

When the system determines a collision with the vehicle

in front of you is no longer probable, the warning

message will be deactivated.

FCW Message

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219

NOTE:

• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph

(2 km/h).

• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than

vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the

course prediction. This is expected and is a part of

normal FCW activation and functionality.

• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such

misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events

within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW

will be deactivated until the next key cycle.

• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If

the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should

be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the

surroundings.

WARNING!

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to

avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect

every type of potential collision. The driver has the

responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the

vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow

this warning could lead to serious injury or death.

Turning FCW ON Or OFF

NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows

the system to warn you of a possible collision with the

vehicle in front of you.

The forward collision button is located on the switch

panel below the Uconnect® display.

220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To turn the FCW system OFF, press the forward collision

button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).

To turn the FCW system back ON, press the forward

collision button again to turn the system ON (LED turns off).

• Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system

from warning you of a possible collision with the

vehicle in front of you.

• Changing the FCW sensitivity - Near vs. Far. Far warns

the driver of a possible collision earlier and Near

warns the driver later.

• Changing the Active Braking status to “Off” prevents

the system from providing limited active braking, or

additional brake support if the driver is not braking

adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision,

but maintains the audible and visual warnings.

NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from

one key cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it

will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.

Forward Collision Button

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221

Changing FCW And Active Braking Status

The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are

programmable through the Uconnect® System. Refer to

“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-

ment Panel” for further information.

The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting and the

Active Braking is the “On” setting, this allows the system

to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in

front of you when you are farther away and it applies

limited braking. This gives you the most reaction time to

avoid a possible collision.

Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows

the system to warn you of a possible collision with the

vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This

setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,

which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.

NOTE:

• The system will retain the last setting selected by the

driver after ignition shut down.

• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as

overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the

path of the car, stationary objects that are far away,

oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or

higher rate of speed.

• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable

screens.

FCW Limited Warning

If the system turns off, and the EVIC/DID displays

“ACC/FCW Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Lim-

ited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” momentarily,

there may be a condition that limits FCW functionality.

Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal

conditions, the active braking may not be fully available.

222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Once the condition that limited the system performance

is no longer present, the system will return to its full

performance state. If the problem persists, see your

authorized dealer.

Service FCW Warning

If the system turns off, and the EVIC/DID displays:

• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required

• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required

This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although

the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have

the system checked by an authorized dealer.

LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED

LaneSense Operation

The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above

37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The

LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to

detect lane markings and measure vehicle position

within the lane boundaries.

When both lane markings are detected and the driver

unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal

applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warn-

ing in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to

prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.

If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the

lane, the LaneSense system provides a visual warning

through the EVIC/DID to prompt the driver to remain

within the lane boundaries.

The driver may manually override the haptic warning by

applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.

When only a single lane marking is detected and the

driver unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no

turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a

visual warning through the EVIC/DID to prompt the

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223

driver to remain within the lane. When only a single lane

marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be

provided.

NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the

LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are

on the steering wheel and provides an audible warning

to the driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on

the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver

does not return their hands to the wheel.

Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF

The default status of LaneSense is “OFF”.

The LaneSense button is located on the switch panel

below the Uconnect® display.

LaneSense Warning Button

224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To turn the LaneSense system ON, press the LaneSense

button to turn the system ON (LED turns off). A “Lane

Sense On” message is shown in the EVIC/DID.

To turn the LaneSense system OFF, press the LaneSense

button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).

NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system

state ON or OFF from the last ignition cycle when the

ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.

LaneSense Warning Message

The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift

condition through the Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID).

Lane Sense On Message

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225

3.5 EVIC Screen — If Equipped

When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines are gray

when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected

and the LaneSense indicator is solid white.

Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected

• When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense

indicator is solid white when only the left lane mark-

ing has been detected and the system is ready to

provide visual warnings in the EVIC if an uninten-

tional lane departure occurs.

• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been

approached and is in a lane departure situation, the

left thick lane line flashes from white to gray, the left

thin line remains solid white and the LaneSense indi-

cator changes from solid white to flashing yellow.

System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)

226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar

behavior for a right lane departure when only the right

lane marking has been detected.

Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected

• When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn

from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane

markings have been detected. The LaneSense indicator

is solid green when both lane markings have been

detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual

warnings in the EVIC and a torque warning in the

steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure oc-

curs.

Lane Approached (Flashing White To Gray Thick

Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227

• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situa-

tion, the left thick lane line and the left thin line turn

solid white. The LaneSense indicator changes from

solid green to solid yellow. At this time torque is

applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction

of the lane boundary.

• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane

the steering wheel will turn to the right.

Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)

Lane Sensed (Solid White Thick Line, Solid White Thin

Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)

228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been

approached and is in a lane departure situation, the

left thick lane line flashes from white to gray, the left

thin line remains solid white and the LaneSense indi-

cator changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At

this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the

opposite direction of the lane boundary.

• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane

the steering wheel will turn to the right.

NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar

behavior for a right lane departure.

Lane Approached (Flashing White To Gray Thick Line,

Solid White Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229

7.0 DID Screen — If Equipped

When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines are gray

when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected

and the LaneSense indicator is solid white.

Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected

• When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense

indicator is solid white when only the left lane mark-

ing has been detected and the system is ready to

provide visual warnings in the DID if an unintentional

lane departure occurs.

• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been

approached and is in a lane departure situation, the

left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin

line remains solid yellow and the LaneSense indicator

changes from solid white to flashing yellow.

System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)

230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar

behavior for a right lane departure when only the right

lane marking has been detected.

Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected

• When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn

from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane

markings have been detected. The LaneSense indicator

is solid green when both lane markings have been

detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual

warnings in the DID and a torque warning in the

steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure oc-

curs.

Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid

Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231

• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situa-

tion, the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid

yellow. The LaneSense indicator changes from solid

green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to

the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane

boundary.

• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane

the steering wheel will turn to the right.

Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)

Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow

Thin Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)

232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been

approached and is in a lane departure situation, the

left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left

thin line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense indicator

changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this

time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the

opposite direction of the lane boundary.

• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane

the steering wheel will turn to the right.

NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar

behavior for a right lane departure.

Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid

Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233

Changing LaneSense Status

The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity

of the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity

(early/late) that you can configure through the

Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings”

in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further

information.

NOTE:

• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph

(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).

• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.

• The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel

whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes,

traction control system, electronic stability control,

forward collision warning, etc.).

PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF

EQUIPPED

The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual

and audible indications of the distance between the rear

fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.

during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense® System

Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and

recommendations.

ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or

disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is

changed to the ON/RUN position.

ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever/gear

selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this

shift lever/gear selector position, the system will remain

active until the vehicle speed is increased to approxi-

mately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE

and above the system’s operating speed, a warning will

appear within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center

234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) indicating

the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will become

active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds

less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).

ParkSense® Sensors

The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/

bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is

within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect

obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in

(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal

direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-

tion of the obstacle.

ParkSense® Warning Display

The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if

Sound and Display is selected from the Customer -

Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® Sys-

tem. Refer to #Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the

EVIC/DID. It provides visual warnings to indicate the

distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the de-

tected obstacle. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” for

further information.

ParkSense® Display

When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the EVIC/DID will

display the park assist ready system status.

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing

a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s

distance and location relative to the vehicle.

If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the

display will show a single solid arc in the center rear

region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the

vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will

show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the

sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235

If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear

region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the

left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast

sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,

the display will show the single arc moving closer to the

vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.

Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc

Slow Tone/Solid Arc

236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Slow Tone/Solid Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning

display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous

tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-

tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:

Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc

238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING ALERTS

Rear Dis-

tance

(in/cm)

Greater

than

79 in

(200 cm)

79-59 in

(200-150 cm)

59-47 in

(150-120 cm)

47-39 in

(120-100

cm)

39-25 in

(100-65

cm)

25-12 in

(65-30 cm)

Less than

12 in

(30 cm)

Arcs —

Left

None None None None None 2nd

Flashing

1st

Flashing

Arcs —

Center

None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flash-

ing

2nd

Flashing

1st

Flashing

Arcs —

Right

None None None None None 2nd

Flashing

1st

Flashing

Audible

Alert

Chime

None Single 1/2-

Second Tone

(for rear cen-

ter only)

Slow

(for rear cen-

ter only)

Slow

(for rear

center

only)

Fast

(for rear

center

only)

Fast Continu-

ous

Radio Vol-

ume Re-

duced

No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239

NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio,

if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.

Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®

ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the

ParkSense® switch, located on the switch panel below

the Uconnect® display.

When the ParkSense® switch is pressed to disable the

system, the instrument cluster will display the

“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five sec-

onds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or

“Driver Information Display (DID)” for further informa-

tion. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the

system is disabled, the EVIC/DID will display the

“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is

in REVERSE.

The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when

ParkSense® is disabled or requires service. The

ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF when the system is

enabled. If the ParkSense® switch is pressed, and re-

quires service, the ParkSense® switch LED will blink

momentarily, and then the LED will be ON.

ParkSense® Switch

240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist

System

During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park

Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the

instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per

ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE

UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the

“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”

message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” for further

information. When the shift lever/gear selector is moved

to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted

condition, the EVIC/DID will display the #PARKSENSE

UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS# or

#PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED#

message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under

this condition, ParkSense® will not operate.

If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN-

SORS” appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) make

sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear

fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt

or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the

message continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.

If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”

appears in the EVIC/DID, see an authorized dealer.

Cleaning The ParkSense® System

Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap

and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not

scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-

age the sensors.

ParkSense® System Usage Precautions

NOTE:

• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,

dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system oper-

ating properly.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241

• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could

affect the performance of ParkSense®.

• When you turn ParkSense® OFF, the instrument clus-

ter will display “PARKSENSE OFF” Furthermore, once

you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn

it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.

• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE

position and ParkSense® is turned OFF, the EVIC/

DID will display “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as

long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

• ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the

radio when it is sounding a tone.

• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care

not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not

be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.

Failure to do so can result in the system not working

properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an

obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide

a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/

bumper.

• Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense®

system OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer

hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the

rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the

system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor

problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE

SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the

EVIC/DID.

• ParkSense® should be disabled when the liftgate is in

the open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. An

open liftgate could provide a false indication that an

obstacle is behind the vehicle.

242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to

recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.

Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not

detected at all. Obstacles located above or below

the sensors will not be detected when they are in

close proximity.

• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using

ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time

when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended

that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when

using ParkSense®.

WARNING!

• Drivers must be careful when backing up even

when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully

behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure

to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,

obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.

You are responsible for safety and must continue to

pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so

can result in serious injury or death.

(Continued)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243

WARNING! (Continued)

• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recom-

mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-

bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the

vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can

result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles

because the hitch ball will be much closer to the

obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker

sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors

could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem-

bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false

indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST

— IF EQUIPPED

The ParkSense® Park Assist system provides visual and

audible indications of the distance between the rear

and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing

up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver.

If your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Transmis-

sion, the vehicle brakes may be automatically applied

and released when performing a reverse parking maneu-

ver if the system detects a possible collision with an

obstacle.

NOTE:

• The driver can override the automatic braking func-

tion by pressing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense® off

via ParkSense® switch, or changing the gear while the

automatic brakes are being applied.

• Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not

available.

• Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a

faulted condition detected with the ParkSense® Park

Assist system or the Braking System Module.

244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• The automatic braking function may only be applied if

the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid collid-

ing with a detected obstacle.

• The automatic braking function may not be applied

fast enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of

the vehicle from the left and/or right sides.

• The automatic braking function can be enabled/

disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features

section of the Uconnect® System.

• ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration

state for the automatic braking function through igni-

tion cycles.

The automatic braking function is intended to assist the

driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected ob-

stacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.

If your vehicle is equipped with a Manual Transmission,

the automatic braking function in REVERSE gear is not

available.

NOTE:

• The driver is always responsible for controlling the

vehicle.

• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to

substitute the driver.

• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s

acceleration and braking and is responsible for the

vehicle’s movements.

Refer to ParkSense® System Usage Precautions for limi-

tations of this system and recommendations.

ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or

disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is

changed to the ON/RUN position.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245

ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in

REVERSE or DRIVE (NON-REVERSE for manual trans-

mission). If ParkSense® is enabled at one of these shift

lever positions, the system will remain active until the

vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph

(11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and above the

system’s operating speed, a warning will appear in the

EVIC/DID indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The

system will become active again if the vehicle speed is

decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph

(9 km/h).

ParkSense® Sensors

The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/

bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is

within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect

obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in

(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal

direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-

tion of the obstacle.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with the ParkSense®

Active Park Assist system, six sensors will be located in

the rear fascia/bumper. Refer to the #ParkSense® Active

Park Assist System# section for further information.

The six ParkSense® sensors, located in the front fascia/

bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is

within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect

obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in

(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal

direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-

tion of the obstacle.

246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

ParkSense® Warning Display

The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if

Sound and Display is selected from the Customer -

Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® Sys-

tem. Refer to #Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver

Information Display (DID). It provides visual warnings

to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper

and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.

Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or

7# Driver Information Display (DID)” for further infor-

mation.

ParkSense® Display

Rear Park Assist

When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the EVIC/DID will

display the park assist ready system status.

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing

a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s

distance and location relative to the vehicle.

If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the

display will show a single solid arc in the center rear

region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the

vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will

show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the

sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.

If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear

region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the

left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast

sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247

the display will show the single arc moving closer to the

vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.

Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc

Slow Tone/Solid Arc

248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Slow Tone/Solid Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning

display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous

tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-

tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:

Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc

250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING ALERTS

Rear Dis-

tance

(in/cm)

Greater

than

79 in (200

cm)

79-59 in

(200-150 cm)

59-47 in

(150-120 cm)

47-39 in

(120-100

cm)

39-25 in

(100-65

cm)

25-12 in

(65-30 cm)

Less than

12 in

(30 cm)

Arcs —

Left

None None None None None 2nd Flash-

ing

1st Flash-

ing

Arcs —

Center

None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flash-

ing

2nd Flash-

ing

1st Flash-

ing

Arcs —

Right

None None None None None 2nd Flash-

ing

1st Flash-

ing

Audible

Alert

Chime

None Single 1/2-

Second Tone

(for rear cen-

ter only)

Slow

(for rear cen-

ter only)

Slow

(for rear

center

only)

Fast

(for rear

center

only)

Fast Continu-

ous

Radio Vol-

ume Re-

duced

No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251

NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio,

if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.

Front Park Assist

When the vehicle is in DRIVE or NON-REVERSE for

manual transmission, the ParkSense® Warning screen

will be displayed when an obstacle is detected.

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing

a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s

distance and location relative to the vehicle.

If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the

display will show a single arc in the center front region.

As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display

will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle. A

fast sound tone will be produced when reaching the 2nd

flashing arc and will change to a continuous sound tone

when the 1st flashing arc appears.

If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front

region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the

left and/or right front region and will produce a fast

sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,

the display will show the single arc moving closer to the

vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.

No Tone/Solid Arc

252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

No Tone/Flashing Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning

display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous

tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-

tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:

Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc

254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING ALERTS

Front Distance

(in/cm)

Greater than

47 in (120 cm)

47-39 in

(120-100 cm)

39-25 in

(100-65 cm)

25-12 in

(65-30 cm)

Less than

12 in (30 cm)

Arcs — Left None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing

Arcs — Center None 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing

Arcs — Right None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing

Audible Alert

Chime

None None None Fast Continuous

Radio Volume

Reduced

No No No Yes Yes

NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio,

if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255

Front Park Assist Audible Alerts

ParkSense® will turn off the Front Park Assist audible

alert (chime) after approximately three seconds when an

obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and

brake pedal is applied.

Adjustable Chime Volume Settings

Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected

from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the

Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Un-

derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-

tion.

If the Uconnect® System is equipped, chime volume

settings will not be accessible from the EVIC/DID.

The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and

HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.

ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state

through ignition cycles.

Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®

ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the

ParkSense® switch, located on the switch panel below

the Uconnect® display.

When the ParkSense® switch is pressed to disable the

system, the instrument cluster will display the

ParkSense® Switch

256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five sec-

onds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or

“Driver Information Display (DID)” for further informa-

tion. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the

system is disabled, the EVIC/DID will display the

“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is

in REVERSE.

The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when

ParkSense® is disabled or requires service. The

ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF when the system is

enabled. If the ParkSense® switch is pressed, and re-

quires service, the ParkSense® switch LED will blink

momentarily, and then the LED will be ON.

Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System

During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® System

has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster

will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it

will display the #PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE

REAR SENSORS#, #PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE

FRONT SENSORS#,orthe#PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-

ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED# message for five seconds.

When the shift lever is moved to Reverse and the system

has detected a faulted condition, the Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display

(DID) will display a #PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE

REAR SENSORS#, #PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE

FRONT SENSORS# or #PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE

SERVICE REQUIRED# pop up message for five seconds.

After five seconds, a car graphic will be displayed with

#UNAVAILABLE# at either the front or rear sensor loca-

tion depending on where the fault is detected. The

system will continue to provide arc alerts for the side that

is functioning properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the

#PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS#,

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257

#PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN-

SORS#,or#PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-

QUIRED# messages if an object is detected within the five

second pop-up duration. The car graphic will remain

displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer

to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or #

Driver Information Display (DID)” for further informa-

tion.

If #PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS#

or #PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN-

SORS# appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) make

sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear

fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and

clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then

cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear see

an authorized dealer.

If the #PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-

QUIRED# message appears in the EVIC/DID, see an

authorized dealer.

Cleaning The ParkSense® System

Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap

and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not

scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-

age the sensors.

ParkSense® System Usage Precautions

NOTE:

• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,

ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense®

system operating properly.

• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could

affect the performance of ParkSense®.

258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• When you turn ParkSense® off, the instrument cluster

will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once

you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn

it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.

• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE

position and ParkSense® is turned off, the instrument

cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as

the vehicle is in REVERSE.

• ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the

radio when it is sounding a tone.

• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care

not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not

be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.

Failure to do so can result in the system not working

properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an

obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it

could provide a false indication that an obstacle is

behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.

• Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense®

system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer

hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the

rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the

system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor

problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE

SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the

instrument cluster.

• ParkSense® should be disabled when the liftgate is in

the open position. An opened liftgate could provide a

false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

• There may be a delay in the object detection rate if the

object is moving. This will cause the automatic braking

application to be delayed.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259

CAUTION!

• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to

recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.

Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not

detected at all. Obstacles located above or below

the sensors will not be detected when they are in

close proximity.

• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using

ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time

when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended

that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when

using ParkSense®.

WARNING!

• Drivers must be careful when backing up even

when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully

behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure

to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,

obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.

You are responsible for safety and must continue to

pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so

can result in serious injury or death.

(Continued)

260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recom-

mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-

bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the

vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can

result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles

because the hitch ball will be much closer to the

obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker

sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors

could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem-

bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false

indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

PARKSENSE® ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —

IF EQUIPPED

The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is intended to

assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular park-

ing maneuvers by identifying a proper parking space,

providing audible/visual instructions, and controlling

the steering wheel. The ParkSense® Active Park Assist

system is defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver

maintains control of the accelerator, shift lever and

brakes. Depending on the driver’s parking maneuver

selection, the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is

capable of maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a

perpendicular parking space on either side (i.e., driver

side or passenger side).

NOTE:

• The driver is always responsible for controlling the

vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and

must intervene as required.

• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to

substitute the driver.

• During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver

touches the steering wheel after being instructed to

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261

remove their hands from the steering wheel, the sys-

tem will cancel, and the driver will be required to

manually complete the parking maneuver.

• The system may not work in all conditions (e.g.

environmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow,

etc., or if searching for a parking space that has

surfaces that will absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).

• New vehicles from the dealership must have at least 30

miles accumulated before the ParkSense® Active Park

Assist system is fully calibrated and performs accu-

rately. This is due to the system’s dynamic vehicle

calibration to improve the performance of the feature.

The system will also continuously perform the dy-

namic vehicle calibration to account for differences

such as over or under inflated tires and new tires.

Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense® Active

Park Assist System

The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system can be en-

abled and disabled with the ParkSense® Active Park

Assist switch, located on the switch panel below the

Uconnect® display.

ParkSense® Active Park Assist Switch

262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To enable the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system,

press the ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch once

(LED turns on).

To disable the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system,

press the ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch again

(LED turns off).

The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will turn off

automatically for any of the following conditions:

• The parking maneuver is completed.

• Vehicle speed greater than 18 mph (30 km/h) when

searching for a parking space.

• Vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during

active steering guidance into the parking space.

• Touching the steering wheel during active steering

guidance into the parking space.

• Pressing the ParkSense® Front and Rear Park Assist

switch.

• Driver’s door is opened.

• Rear liftgate is opened.

• Electronic Stability Control/Anti-lock Braking System

intervention.

• The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will allow a

maximum of six shifts between DRIVE (automatic

transmission) or forward gear (manual transmission)

and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed

within six shifts, the system will cancel and the EVIC/

DID will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver

manually.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263

The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will only

operate and search for a parking space when the follow-

ing conditions are present:

• Gear position is in DRIVE (automatic transmission) or

in a forward gear (manual transmission).

• Ignition is in the RUN position.

• ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch is activated.

• Driver’s door is closed.

• Rear liftgate is closed.

• Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).

NOTE: If the vehicle is driven above approximately

15 mph (25 km/h), the EVIC/DID will instruct the driver

to slow down. If the vehicle is driven above approxi-

mately 18 mph (30 km/h), the system will cancel. The

driver must then reactivate the system by pressing the

ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch.

• The outer surface and the underside of the front and

rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow, ice,

mud, dirt or other obstruction.

When pressed, the LED on the ParkSense® Active Park

Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED

will turn OFF if any of the above conditions are not

present.

Parallel Parking Space Assistance Operation/

Display

When the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is

enabled the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK to

Switch to Perpendicular” message will appear in the

EVIC/DID display. You may switch to perpendicular

parking if you desire. Push the OK button on the left side

steering wheel switch to change your parking space

setting.

264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

• When searching for a parking space, use the turn

signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you

want to perform the parking maneuver. The

ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will automati-

cally search for a parking space on the passenger’s side

of the vehicle if the turn signal is not activated.

• The driver needs to make sure that the selected

parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear

of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).

• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected

parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/

clear of anything that may be overhanging or protrud-

ing into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.

from surrounding objects/vehicles).

• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should

drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the

type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.

• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking

space (example: if passing multiple available parking

spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected

parking space for the maneuver).

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265

When an available parking space has been found, and the

vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move

forward to position the vehicle for a parallel parking

sequence.

Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to

stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands

from the steering wheel.

Active ParkSense Searching Space Found — Keep Moving Forward

266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands

removed from the steering wheel, you will be instructed

to place the shift lever into the REVERSE position.

When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE

position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for

steering to complete.

Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From Wheel Space Found — Shift To Reverse

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267

The system will then instruct the driver to check their

surroundings and move backward.

NOTE:

• It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and

accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneu-

ver.

Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete Check Surroundings — Move Backward

268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• When the system instructs the driver to remove their

hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check

their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.

• The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will allow a

maximum of six shifts between DRIVE (automatic

transmission) or forward gear (manual transmission)

and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed

within six shifts, the system will cancel and the EVIC/

DID will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver

manually.

• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle

speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering

guidance into the parking space. The system will

provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that

tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible

for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.

• If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any

reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.

When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward

movement, the system will instruct the driver to check

their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.

Check Surroundings — STOP

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269

NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake

and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their

surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either

when instructed to, or when driver intervention is re-

quired.

Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver

will be instructed to place the shift lever into the DRIVE

position.

Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive

270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

When the driver places the shift lever into the DRIVE

position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for

steering to complete.

The system will then instruct the driver to check their

surroundings and move forward.

When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward

movement, the system will instruct the driver to check

their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.

Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete

Check Surroundings — Move Forward

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271

NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake

and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their

surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either

when instructed to, or when driver intervention is re-

quired.

Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver

will be instructed to place the shift lever into the RE-

VERSE position.

Check Surroundings — STOP

Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse

272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE

position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for

steering to complete.

The system will then instruct the driver to check their

surroundings and move backward.

Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete

Check Surroundings — Move Backward

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273

Your vehicle is now in the parallel park position. When

the maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed to

check the vehicle’s parking position. If the driver is

satisfied with the vehicle position, they should shift to

PARK. The #Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking

Position# message will be momentarily displayed.

Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance

Operation/Display

When the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is

enabled, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK to

Switch to Perpendicular” message will show in the

EVIC/DID display. Push the OK button on the left side

steering wheel switch to change your parking space

setting to a perpendicular maneuver. You may switch

back to parallel parking if you desire.

Once the driver presses OK for a perpendicular parking

maneuver, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK to

Switch to Parallel” message will appear in the EVIC/DID

display.

Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position

274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

• When searching for a parking space, use the turn

signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you

want to perform the parking maneuver. The

ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will automati-

cally search for a parking space on the passenger’s side

of the vehicle if the turn signal is not activated.

• The driver needs to make sure that the selected

parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear

of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).

• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected

parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/

clear of anything that may be overhanging or protrud-

ing into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.

from surrounding objects/vehicles).

Active ParkSense Searching Display

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275

• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should

drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the

type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.

• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking

space (example: if passing multiple available parking

spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected

parking space for the maneuver).

When an available parking space has been found, and the

vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move

forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular

parking sequence.

Space Found — Keep Moving Forward

276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to

stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands

from the steering wheel.

Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands

removed from the steering wheel, you will be instructed

to place the shift lever into the REVERSE position.

Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From Wheel Space Found — Shift To Reverse

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277

When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE

position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for

steering to complete.

The system will then instruct the driver to check their

surroundings and move backward.

Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete

Check Surroundings — Move Backward

278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

• It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and

accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneu-

ver.

• When the system instructs the driver to remove their

hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check

their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.

• The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will allow a

maximum of six shifts between DRIVE (automatic

transmission) or forward gear (manual transmission)

and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed

within six shifts, the system will cancel and the EVIC/

DID will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver

manually.

• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle

speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering

guidance into the parking space. The system will

provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that

tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible

for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.

• If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any

reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.

When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward

movement, the system will instruct the driver to check

their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279

NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake

and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their

surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either

when instructed to, or when driver intervention is re-

quired.

Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver

will be instructed to place the shift lever into the DRIVE

position.

Check Surroundings — STOP

Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive

280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

When the driver places the shift lever into the DRIVE

position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for

steering to complete.

The system will then instruct the driver to check their

surroundings and move forward.

Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete

Check Surroundings — Move Forward

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281

When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward

movement, the system will instruct the driver to check

their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.

NOTE:

It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and

stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings

and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when instructed

to, or when driver intervention is required.

Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver

will be instructed to place the shift lever into the RE-

VERSE position.

Check Surroundings — STOP

Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse

282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE

position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for

steering to complete.

The system will then instruct the driver to check their

surroundings and move backward.

Your vehicle is now in the perpendicular park position.

When the maneuver is complete, the driver will be

instructed to check the vehicle’s parking position. If the

driver is satisfied with the vehicle position, they should

Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete

Check Surroundings — Move Backward

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283

shift to PARK. The #Active ParkSense Complete - Check

Parking Position# message will be momentarily dis-

played.

CAUTION!

• The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is only

a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every

obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs

might be temporarily detected or not detected at

all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors

will not be detected when they are in close prox-

imity.

• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the

ParkSense® Active Park Assist system in order to

be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected.

It is recommended that the driver looks over his/

her shoulder when using the ParkSense® Active

Park Assist system.

Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position

284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• Drivers must be careful when performing parallel

or perpendicular parking maneuvers even when

using the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system.

Always check carefully behind and in front of your

vehicle, look behind and in front of you, and be

sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other ve-

hicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back-

ing up and moving forward. You are responsible

for safety and must continue to pay attention to

your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in

serious injury or death.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Before using the ParkSense® Active Park Assist

system, it is strongly recommended that the ball

mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected

from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for

towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or

damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch

ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the

rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con-

tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball

mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its

size and shape, giving a false indication that an

obstacle is behind the vehicle.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285

PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF

EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear

Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen

image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever

the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be

displayed in the touchscreen display along with a caution

note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the

screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The

ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the vehicle

above the rear License plate.

NOTE: The ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera has pro-

grammable modes of operation that may be selected

through the Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect®

Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for

further information.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera

delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and

the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the

vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay

turned ON), the camera image will continue to be

displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of

REVERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph

(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the

vehicles ignition is cycled to the OFF position.

When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the

image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its

projected backup path based on the steering wheel

position. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center

of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a

hitch/receiver.

When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid on the

image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.

Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of

the vehicle.

286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The following table shows the approximate distances for

each zone:

Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle

Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)

Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)

Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)

WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when

using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always

check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to

check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-

structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are

responsible for the safety of your surroundings and

must continue to pay attention while backing up.

Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287

CAUTION!

• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only

be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is

unable to view every obstacle or object in your

drive path.

• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be

driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to

stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-

mended that the driver look frequently over his/her

shoulder when using ParkView®.

NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds

up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,

and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.

GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED

HomeLink® replaces up to three remote controls (hand-

held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage

door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security

systems. The HomeLink® unit operates off your vehicle’s

battery.

The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the headliner

or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink®

channels.

The HomeLink® indicator is located above the center

button.

288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-

rity Alarm is active.

Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®

Ensure your vehicle is parked outside of the garage

before you begin programming.

For more efficient programming and accurate transmis-

sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that

a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of

the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®

system.

To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN

position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink®

buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds, or until the red

indicator flashes.

NOTE:

• Erasing all channels should only be performed when

programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not

erase channels when programming additional buttons.

• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please

call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at

HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

HomeLink® Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289

Programming A Rolling Code

For programming garage door openers that were manu-

factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be

identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located

where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door

opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to

open and close the door. The name and color of the

button may vary by manufacturer.

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

Training The Garage Door Opener

1—DoorOpener 2—TrainingButton

290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8

cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to

program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator

light in view.

3. Simultaneously push and hold both the HomeLink®

button you want to program and the hand-held trans-

mitter button.

4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-

cator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly

and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the

frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-

lease both buttons after the indicator light changes

from slow to rapid.

5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),

locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can

usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is

attached to the garage door opener/device motor.

Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN-

ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices

there may be a light that blinks when the garage door

opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.

NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next

step after the LEARN button has been pushed.

6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed

HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two

seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device

activates, programming is complete.

NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti-

vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to

complete the training.

To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,

repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT

erase the channels.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button

(Rolling Code)

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,

follow these steps:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, place

the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON.

2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until

the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do

not release the button.

3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-

ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining

steps.

Programming A Non-Rolling Code

For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured

before 1995.

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8

cm) away from the HomeLink® button you would like

to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator

light in view.

3. Simultaneously push and hold both the HomeLink®

button you want to program and the hand-held trans-

mitter button.

4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-

cator light. HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly

and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the

frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-

lease both buttons after the indicator light changes

from slow to rapid.

5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button

and observe the indicator light.

292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-

ming is complete and the garage door/device should

activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.

• To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,

repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT

erase the channels.

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button

(Non — Rolling Code)

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,

follow these steps:

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, place

the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON.

2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until

the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do

not release the button.

3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-

ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all

remaining steps.

Canadian/Gate Operator Programming

For programming transmitters in Canada/United States

that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after

several seconds of transmission.

Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-

nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-

mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®

to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this

Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to

time-out in the same manner.

It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling

process to prevent possible overheating of the garage

door or gate motor.

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8

cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to

program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator

light in view.

3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button,

while you press and release (“cycle”) your hand-held

transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has

successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-

cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when

fully trained.

4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash

rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take

up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage

door may open and close while you are programming.

5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button

and observe the indicator light.

NOTE:

• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-

ming is complete and the garage door/device should

activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.

• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,

repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT

erase the channels.

If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for

programming, plug it back in at this time.

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button

(Canadian/Gate Operator)

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,

follow these steps:

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until

the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do

not release the button.

3. Without releasing the button proceed with

“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and

follow all remaining steps.

Using HomeLink®

To operate, push and release the programmed

HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the

programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate opera-

tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office light-

ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may

also be used at any time.

Security

It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn

in your vehicle.

To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20

seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all

channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be

erased.

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when

the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.

Troubleshooting Tips

If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,

here are some of the most common solutions:

• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmit-

ter.

• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener

to complete the training for a Rolling Code.

• Did you unplug the device for programming and

remember to plug it back in?

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295

If you have any problems, or require assistance, please

call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at

HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

WARNING!

Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-

ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while

programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause

serious injury or death.

WARNING!

Your motorized door or gate will open and close

while you are programming the universal trans-

ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets

or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.

Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by

Federal safety standards. This includes most garage

door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not

use a garage door opener without these safety fea-

tures. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet

HomeLink.com for safety information or assis-

tance.

General Information

This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry

Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This device must accept any interference that may be

received including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with

FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to operate the

device.

• The term IC before the certification/registration num-

ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-

fications were met.

POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — IF

EQUIPPED

The power sunroof switches are located to the left

between the sun visors on the overhead console.

Power Sunroof Switches

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297

The power shade switches are located to the right be-

tween the sun visors on the overhead console.

WARNING!

• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or

with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the

Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location

accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of

a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in

the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particu-

larly unattended children, can become entrapped

by the power sunroof while operating the power

sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in

serious injury or death.

• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown

from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could

also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten

your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-

gers are also properly secured.

(Continued)

Power Shade Switches

298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.

Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any

object, to project through the sunroof opening.

Injury may result.

Opening Sunroof — Express

A comfort stop position and full open position are the

programmed automatic stops for the sunroof open posi-

tions. The comfort stop position has been optimized to

minimize wind buffeting.

Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half

second. The sunroof will open automatically to the

comfort stop position (if the sunshade is in the closed

position when the operation is initiated the sunshade will

automatically open to the half open position prior to the

sunroof opening). Press the switch rearward and release

it again, the sunroof will open to the full open position

and automatically stop. This is called “Express Open”.

During Express Open operation, any movement of the

sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.

Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode

A comfort stop position is a programmed automatic stop

for the sunroof open position. The comfort stop position

has been optimized to minimize wind buffeting.

To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward.

The sunroof will stop automatically at the comfort stop

position (if the sunshade is in the closed position when

the operation is initiated the sunshade will automatically

open to the half open position prior to the sunroof

opening). Press and hold the switch rearward again, the

sunroof will open to the full open position and automati-

cally stop. Any release of the switch will stop the

movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a

partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and

held rearward again.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 299

Closing Sunroof — Express

Press the switch forward and release it within one-half

second and the sunroof will close automatically from any

position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-

cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express

Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop

the sunroof.

Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode

To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the

forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the

movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially

closed condition until the switch is pushed and held

forward again.

Venting Sunroof — Express

Press and release the #Vent# button within one-half sec-

ond and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This

is called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of

sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any

movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.

NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the

vent switch is pressed, the sunshade will automatically

cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof

opening to the Vent position.

Opening Power Shade — Express

Press the shade switch rearward and release it within

one-half second and the shade will automatically open to

the halfway position and stop automatically. Press the

switch a second time from the halfway position and the

shade will automatically open to the full open position

and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”.

During Express Open operation, any movement of the

shade switch will stop the shade.

300 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode

To open the shade, press and hold the switch rearward.

The shade will open and stop automatically at the

half-open position. Press and hold the shade switch

rearward again and the shade will open automatically to

the full-open position. Any release of the switch will stop

the movement and the shade will remain in a partially

opened condition until the switch is pushed and held

rearward again.

Closing Power Shade — Express

Press the switch forward and release it within one-half

second and the shade will close automatically from any

position. If the sunroof is completely closed the shade

will close fully and stop automatically. This is called

“Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any

movement of the switch will stop the shade.

NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the

half-open position. Pressing the shade close button again

will automatically close both the sunroof and shade

completely.

Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode

To close the shade, press and hold the switch in the

forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the

movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed

condition until the switch is pushed and held forward

again.

Pinch Protect Feature

This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of

the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-

struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the

sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-

tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and

release to Express Close.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 301

NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result

in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be

a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of

pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the

ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the

windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain

open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-

rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with

the rear windows open, then open the front and rear

windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the

buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-

roof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any

window.

Sunroof Maintenance

Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean

the glass panel.

Ignition OFF Operation

The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to

approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is

turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door

will cancel this feature.

NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the

Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/

Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS

Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power

outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small

electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.

The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a

“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.

Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when

302 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while

the outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly

to the battery and powered at all times.

NOTE:

• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered

outlets should be removed or turned off when the

vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against

discharge.

• To ensure proper cigar lighter operation, a MOPAR®

knob and element must be used.

CAUTION!

Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.

Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as

this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.

Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage

not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

The front power outlet is located inside the storage area

on the center stack of the instrument panel.

In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power

outlet located in the storage area of the center console.

Front Power Outlet

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 303

A third fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the left

quarter trim panel in the cargo area. This power outlet

has power available when the ignition switch is in the

ON or ACC position.

NOTE: The rear power outlet can be switched to “bat-

tery” powered all the time by moving the rear power

outlet fuse in the fuse panel. Refer to your local autho-

rized Jeep Dealer for further details.

Rear Power Outlet

Rear Power Outlet Fuse

304 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet

should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.

• Do not touch with wet hands.

• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the

vehicle.

• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric

shock and failure.

Power Outlet Fuse Locations

1—F75Fuse20AYellowFrontPowerOutlet/CigarLighterCon-

sole Bin

2—F92Fuse20AYellowRearPowerOutlet

3—F60Fuse20AYellowPowerOutletCenterConsole

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 305

CAUTION!

• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw

power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in

use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if

plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will

discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or

prevent the engine from starting.

• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,

vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat-

tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-

tently and with greater caution.

• After the use of high power draw accessories, or

long periods of the vehicle not being started (with

accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be

driven a sufficient length of time to allow the

generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.

POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED

There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the

back of the center console to convert DC current to AC

current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electron-

ics and other low power devices requiring power up to

Power Inverter Location

306 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Play-

station3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will

most power tools.

To turn on the power inverter outlet, simply plug in the

device. The outlet automatically turns off when the

device is unplugged.

The power inverter is designed with built-in overload

protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,

the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once

the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the

inverter should automatically reset. To avoid overloading

the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices

prior to using the inverter.

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.

• Do not touch with wet hands.

• Close the lid when not in use.

• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric

shock and failure.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 307

WIRELESS CHARGING PAD — IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with a wireless charging

pad located inside the upper portion of the center con-

sole. This charging pad is designed to wirelessly charge

your Qi enabled mobile phone. Qi is a standard that uses

magnetic induction to transfer power to your mobile

device.

Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi wireless

charging, be equipped with an aftermarket sleeve or

equipped with a back plate from your mobile phone

provider, or an online or local electronics retailer.

The wireless charging pad is equipped with an anti-slip

mat, an adjustable cradle to hold your mobile phone in

place and an LED indicator light.

NOTE: Visit

UconnectPhone.com for supported mo-

bile phones and compatible aftermarket sleeves.

Wireless Charging Pad

308 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Wireless Charging Pad Operation

To use the wireless charging pad, the coil in your mobile

phone needs to align with the coil in the charging pad,

which is located directly under the Qi logo. Since each

mobile phone’s coil location is different, you may need a

few attempts to locate the correct spot for your mobile

phone:

1. Place your mobile phone on the wireless charging pad,

towards the Qi logo, so that the LED turns red. If the

LED does not turn red, pick up the mobile phone and

change the location.

2. Once the LED transitions from red to flashing green,

your mobile phone is correctly placed and charging.

NOTE: The mobile phone must be aligned around the Qi

logo for the LED to transition from red to flashing green.

3. If the LED does not transition from red to flashing

green, and just turns off, pick up your mobile phone

and reposition it on the charging pad.

Mobile Phone Alignment

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 309

4. Adjust the wireless charging pad mobile phone cradle

to hold the mobile phone in position. The cradle

moves by pushing down on the finger tabs and

adjusting the cradle in or out.

NOTE: The initial adjustment will only need to be done

once as long as only one mobile phone is used. If a

different mobile phone is used, the cradle will need to be

readjusted.

The LED indicator will flash green while the mobile

phone is charging. The Qi enabled phone is able to

function normally as it is charging.

CAUTION!

Do not place your vehicle Key Fob on the wireless

charging pad, the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature may

not work properly while a mobile phone is being

charged.

Adjustable Mobile Phone Charging Pad Cradle

310 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Do not place metal object(s) between the mobile

phone and wireless charging pad. Metal object(s)

such as coins, rings or keys will become very HOT. If

metal object(s) become lodged between the mobile

phone and wireless charging pad, carefully remove

the mobile phone and allow the metal object(s) to

cool before removing. Failure to wait until the ob-

ject(s) cool could result in personal injury, including

burns.

CUPHOLDERS

There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers,

located in the center console.

Front Cupholders

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 311

There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers,

located in the center armrest.

STORAGE

Glove Compartment

The glove compartment is located on the passengers side

of the instrument panel. Pull outward on the latch to

open the glove compartment.

There is also an additional storage bin located above the

instrument panel in the center of the dash.

Rear Cupholders

312 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Console Storage Compartment

Some vehicles may be equipped with a wireless charging

pad located in the upper portion of the center console.

Refer to Wireless Charging Pad-If Equipped in this

section for more information.

To open, pull up on the latch and lift the cover.

Glove Compartment Upper Console Charging Pad

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 313

The center console has a storage area which can hold cell

phones, PDAs, and other small items.

WARNING!

Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-

ment lid in the open position. Driving with the

console compartment lid open may result in injury in

a collision.

Center Console Center Console Storage

314 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Flip ’n Stow™ Front Passenger Seat Storage — If

Equipped

Some models may be equipped with storage under the

front passenger seat cushion. Pull upward on the seat

cushion loop to open the storage compartment.

NOTE: Make sure that objects inside the bin do not

interfere with the latch before closing the seat. Push the

seat cushion downward after closing it to make sure it

latches to the base.

Passenger Seat Cushion Loop

Passenger Seat Cushion Storage Compartment

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 315

WARNING!

Be certain that the seat cushion is locked securely

into position before using the seat. Otherwise, the

seat will not provide the proper stability for passen-

gers. An improperly latched seat cushion could cause

serious injury.

CARGO AREA FEATURES

Cargo Load Floor

The cargo load floor system has a load capacity of 400 lbs

(181 kg).

To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be

folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still

maintains some rear seating room. Refer to “Seats” in this

section for further information.

Cargo Extension Panels

Cargo extension panels can be folded and unfolded.

When the rear seats are moved to the more forward

positions and the rear seat backs are folded down, the

extension panels can be unfolded manually by hand (2 of

them). The extension panels can be used to extend the

load floor to the rear seats and/or hide the gap between

the load floor and rear seats, or to assist in loading large

items into the cargo area.

Cargo Tie-Down Hooks And Loops

The tie-downs located on the cargo area floor should be

used to secure loads safely when the vehicle is moving.

Cargo tie-down loops are located on the trim panels.

316 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child

seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a

tie-down could pull loose and allow the child seat

to come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use

only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.

• To help protect against personal injury, passengers

should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear

cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes

only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats

and use seat belts.

WARNING!

The weight and position of cargo and passengers can

change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in per-

sonal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your

vehicle:

• Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits

described on the label attached to the left door or

left door center pillar.

• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put

heavier objects as low and as far forward as pos-

sible.

• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear

axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight

over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to

sway.

• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of

the seatback. This could impair visibility or be-

come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or

accident.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 317

Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped

NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to

secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or

protect passengers from loose cargo.

The removable retractable cargo area cover mounts in the

cargo area behind the top of the rear seats.

The cover, when extended, covers the cargo area to keep

items out of sight. Notches in the trim panels near the

liftgate opening secure the extended cover in place.

The cover rolls away neatly inside its housing when not

in use. You can also remove the cover from the vehicle to

make more room in the cargo area.

To install the cover, position it in the vehicle so that the

flat side of the housing faces upward. Then, insert the

right spring-loaded post (located on the end of the cover

housing) into the right attachment points.

Then, insert on the opposite end of the cover housing into

the attachment point on the opposite side of the vehicle.

Next, grab the cover handle and pull the cover toward

you. As the cover nears the liftgate opening, guide the

rear attachment posts (on both ends of the cover) into the

Retractable Cargo Area Cover

318 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

notches in the trim panels. Then, lower the cover to

position the posts into the bottom of the notches and

release the handle.

WARNING!

In a collision, a cargo cover loose in the vehicle could

cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and

strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo

cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart-

ment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken

from its mounting. Do not store in the vehicle.

Rear Storage Bins

The rear storage bins are located in the rear of the vehicle

on the sides of the load floor.

Rear Storage Bins

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 319

REAR WINDOW FEATURES

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the wind-

shield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the

steering column. The rear wiper/washer is operated by

rotating a switch, located at the middle of the lever.

Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to

the first detent for intermittent operation and to

the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.

To use the washer, push the lever forward and

hold while spray is desired. If the lever is

pushed while in the intermittent setting, the

wiper will turn on and operate for several wipe

cycles after the end of the lever is released, and then

resume the intermittent interval previously selected.

If the lever is pushed while the wiper is in the off

position, the wiper will operate for several wipe cycles,

then turn off.

NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if

the switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the

lever is released the pump will resume normal operation.

Rear Wiper/Washer Control

320 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned

OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”

position.

Rear Window Defroster

The rear window defroster button is located on

the switch bank by the manual climate controls.

Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster

and the heated outside mirrors. An indicator in the

button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is

on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off

after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five

minutes of operation, press the button a second time.

NOTE:

• The Windsheild Wiper De-Icer (if equipped) shall be

activated automatically when the Rear Defrost is

turned on and when the ambient temperature is below

40 degrees F (4.4° C).

• To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear win-

dow defroster only when the engine is operating.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 321

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to

the heating elements:

• Use care when washing the inside of the rear

window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on

the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth

and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the

heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after

soaking with warm water.

• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive

window cleaners on the interior surface of the

window.

• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED

NOTE: Roof rack and crossbars cannot be used on

vehicles equipped with Skyslider®.

The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a

luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and it

should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.

Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is

placed on the roof rack. Check the straps frequently to be

sure that the load remains securely attached.

NOTE: Crossbars can be purchased at a Chrysler dealer

through Mopar® parts.

External racks do not increase the total load carrying

capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant

and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the

luggage rack, do not exceed the maximum vehicle load

capacity.

322 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do

not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity.

Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as pos-

sible and secure the load appropriately.

• Long loads, which extend over the windshield,

such as wood panels or surfboards, should be

secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.

• Place a blanket or other protection between the

surface of the roof and the load.

• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully

when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof

rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby

truck traffic, can add sudden upward loads. This is

especially true on large flat loads and may result in

damage to the cargo or your vehicle.

WARNING!

Cargo must be securely tied down before driving

your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the

vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-

sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack

cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 323

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTENTS

! INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ..........328

! INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE ..........329

! INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM ......330

! INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS .....331

! ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER

(EVIC) ...............................340

▫ Oil Change Reset .....................351

▫ EVIC Red Telltales .....................352

▫ EVIC Yellow Telltales ...................354

▫ EVIC Selectable Menu Items .............356

! DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)......362

▫ Oil Change Reset .....................374

▫ DID Red Telltales......................375

▫ DID Yellow Telltales....................378

▫ DID Selectable Menu Items ..............380

! Uconnect® SETTINGS....................384

▫ Buttons On The Faceplate................385

▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen..............386

▫ Customer Programmable Features/Personal

Settings — Uconnect® 5.0 Settings .........386

▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®

8.4 Personal Settings ...................401

! Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED ........421

! iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . .422

! STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF

EQUIPPED ...........................422

▫ Radio Operation ......................423

▫ CD Player ...........................424

! CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE ...........424

! RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .425

▫ General Information ...................425

! CLIMATE CONTROLS ...................426

▫ Manual Climate Controls Without Touchscreen —

If Equipped .........................426

▫ Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen — If

Equipped ...........................431

▫ Dual Zone Automatic Climate Controls With

Touchscreen — If Equipped ..............436

▫ Climate Control Functions ...............443

▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ......445

▫ Operating Tips .......................447

! Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK

TIPS ................................450

▫ Introducing Uconnect® .................450

▫ Get Started ..........................451

▫ Basic Voice Commands..................452

▫ Radio ..............................454

▫ Media..............................455

326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

▫ Phone..............................456

▫ Voice Text Reply ......................458

▫ Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) ..................459

▫ Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) ................460

▫ Uconnect® Access* (8.4A/8.4AN) ..........460

▫ Register (8.4A/8.4AN) ..................461

▫ Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) ...............462

▫ Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) ..............463

▫ Yelp® (8.4A/8.4AN)....................464

▫ SiriusXM Travel Link™ (8.4A/8.4AN) .......465

▫ Additional Information .................466

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

1 — Air Demister Outlet 5 — Instrument Cluster 9 — Passenger Air Bag 13 — Stop/Start Ignition Button

2 — Air Outlet 6 — Electronic Speed Control 10 — Glove Compartment 14 — Liftgate Release Button

3—

Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC)/ Driver Information

Display (DID) Controls

7—StorageCompartment 11—LowerSwitchBank 15—DimmerSwitches

4—Horn/DriverAirBag 8—Radio 12—

Uconnect® Hard Controls/

Climate Controls/Electric Stop

Start — If Equipped

16 — Headlight Switch

328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM

330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS

1. Tachometer

Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute

(RPM x 1000).

2. High Beam Indicator

Indicates that headlights are on high beam.

3. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped

This indicator will illuminate when the front fog

lights are on.

4. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped

This indicator will illuminate when the park

lights or headlights are turned on.

5. Brake Warning Light

This light monitors various brake functions,

including brake fluid level and parking brake

application. If the brake light turns on it may

indicate that the parking brake is applied, that

the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with

the anti-lock brake system reservoir.

If the light remains on when the parking brake has been

disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the

master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake

hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the

Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake

System (ABS)/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.

In this case, the light will remain on until the condition

has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake

booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake

and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-

ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic

system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is

indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on

when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has

dropped below a specified level.

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp

cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-

tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and

the brake fluid level checked.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-

sary.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is

dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.

It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have

a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force

Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the

Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS

Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by

turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the

ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-

proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off

unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is

detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light

inspected by an authorized dealer.

332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is

applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-

tion.

NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is

applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is

necessary.

6. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or

Driver Information Display (DID)

The odometer display shows the total distance the ve-

hicle has been driven.

U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of

vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the

correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your

odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair

technician should leave the odometer reading the same

as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,

then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must

be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was

before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to

make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/

service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or

that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer

must be reset at zero.

When the appropriate conditions exist, this display

shows the EVIC/DID messages. Refer to “Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Informa-

tion Display (DID” as equipped located in “Understand-

ing Your Instrument Panel.”

7. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light

This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition

switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and

may stay on for as long as four seconds.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333

If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it

indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system

is not functioning and that service is required. However,

the conventional brake system will continue to operate

normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.

If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced

as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock

brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the

ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have

the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

8. ECO Light

This light is activated via hard button on the center stack

to display your driving habits.

9. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/

Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” in the instrument cluster will come on

when the ignition switch is turned to the

ON/RUN position. It should go out with the

engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In-

dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine

running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC

system. If this light remains on after several ignition

cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles

(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see

your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the

problem diagnosed and corrected.

334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE:

• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC

Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on

momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned

to ON/RUN.

• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the

ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off

previously.

• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking

sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds

will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the

maneuver that caused the ESC activation.

10. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator

Light — If Equipped

This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-

trol (ESC) is off.

11. Speedometer

Indicates Digital Speedometer (MPH or km/h).

12. Air Bag Warning Light

This light will turn on for four to eight seconds

as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first

turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is

either not on during starting, stays on, or turns

on while driving, have the system inspected at an autho-

rized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant

Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your

Vehicle” for further information.

13. Seat Belt Reminder Light

When the ignition switch is first turned to the

ON/RUN position, this light will turn on for four

to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb

check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will

sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335

or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat

Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain on continuously.

Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know

Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

14. Turn Signal Indicator

The arrows will flash with the exterior turn

signals when the turn signal lever is operated.

A tone will chime, and an EVIC/DID message

will appear if either turn signal is left on for

more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

NOTE: If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check

for a defective outside light bulb.

15. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recommended

by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle

has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should

determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those

tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been

equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when

one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-

nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving

on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to

overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect

the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper

tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to

336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has

not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS

low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS

malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not

operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is

combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the

system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for

approximately one minute and then remain continuously

illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-

quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-

tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure

as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety

of reasons, including the installation of replacement or

alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the

TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the

TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more

tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the

replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS

to continue to function properly.

CAUTION!

The TPMS has been optimized for the original

equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and

warning have been established for the tire size

equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-

tion or sensor damage may result when using re-

placement equipment that is not of the same size,

type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause

sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or

balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a

TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337

16. Fuel Gauge/Fuel Door Reminder

The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when

the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position. The fuel

pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the

fuel door is located.

17. Temperature Gauge

The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-

ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that

the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.

The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-

ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,

or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to

exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot engine cooling system could

damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads

“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle

with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer

drops back into the normal range. If the pointer

remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,

turn the engine off immediately and call an autho-

rized dealer for service.

WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or

others could be badly burned by steam or boiling

coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer

for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to

look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your

(Continued)

338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

WARNING! (Continued)

Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling

System Pressure Cap paragraph.

18. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of

an Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II that

monitors engine and automatic transmission con-

trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in

the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb

does not come on when turning the key from OFF to

ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.

Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,

poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after

engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light

stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In

most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will

not require towing.

CAUTION!

Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine

control system. It also could affect fuel economy and

driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic

converter damage and power loss will soon occur.

Immediate service is required.

WARNING!

A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced

above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal

operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you

drive slowly or park over flammable substances such

as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result

in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or

others.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339

19. Vehicle Security Light

This light will flash rapidly for approximately

15 – seconds when the vehicle security alarm is

arming. The light will flash at a slower speed

continuously after the alarm is set. The security

light will also come on for about three seconds when the

ignition is first turned on.

ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER

(EVIC)

The EVIC displays are located in the center portion of the

cluster and consists of eight sections:

1. Electronic Park Brake Failure — If Equipped

This telltale indicates that there is an Electronic

Park Brake Fault. Please see your authorized

dealer for assistance.

340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

2. Brake Warning Light

This light monitors various brake functions,

including brake fluid level and parking brake

application. If the brake light turns on it may

indicate that the parking brake is applied, that

the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with

the anti-lock brake system reservoir.

If the light remains on when the parking brake has been

disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the

master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake

hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the

Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake

System (ABS)/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.

In this case, the light will remain on until the condition

has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake

booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake

and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-

ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic

system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is

indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on

when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has

dropped below a specified level.

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp

cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-

tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and

the brake fluid level checked.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-

sary.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is

dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.

It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have

a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force

Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the

Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS

Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by

turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the

ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-

proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off

unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is

detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light

inspected by an authorized dealer.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is

applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-

tion.

NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is

applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

3. Engine Temperature Warning Light

This light warns of an overheated engine condi-

tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap-

proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single

chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.

If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and

stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,

shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-

hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to

normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for

service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To

Do In Emergencies” for more information.

342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

4. EVIC Display Area

The EVIC display area will normally display the main

menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main

menu. The EVIC display area also displays “pop up”

messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn-

ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall

into several categories:

• Five Second Stored Messages

When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of

message takes control of the main display area for

five seconds and then returns to the previous screen.

Most of the messages of this type are then stored (as

long as the condition that activated it remains active)

and can be reviewed from the “Messages” main

menu item. As long as there is a stored message, an

“i” will be displayed in the EVIC’s compass/outside

temp line. Examples of this message type are “Right

Front Turn Signal Lamp Out” and “Low Tire Pres-

sure”.

• Unstored Messages

This message type is displayed indefinitely or until

the condition that activated the message is cleared.

Examples of this message type are “Turn Signal On”

(if a turn signal is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver

leaves the vehicle).

• Unstored Messages Until RUN

These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start

feature. This message type is displayed until the

ignition is in the RUN state. Examples of this message

type are “Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and

“Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start”.

• Five Second Unstored Messages

When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of

message takes control of the main display area for

five seconds and then returns to the previous screen.

An example of this message type is “Automatic High

Beams On”.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343

5. LaneSense — If Equipped

The LaneSense system provides the driver with

visual and steering torque warnings when the

vehicle starts to drift out of its lane uninten-

tionally without the use of a turn signal.

• When the LaneSense system is ON and ready the

lane lines and LaneSense indicator are the color gray.

• When the LaneSense system is armed, the lane lines

change to white and the LaneSense indicator

changes to green.

• When the LaneSense system senses a lane cross

situation, the approaching lane line and the La-

neSense indicator change from white to yellow.

For further information, refer to “Lanesense — If

Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your

Vehicle”.

6. Fuel Gauge

Fuel Gauge displays the level of fuel in the fuel tank

when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.

7. Low Fuel Telltale

When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal

(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until

fuel is added.

8. Rear Axle Lock Indicator — If Equipped

This light indicates when the rear axle lock has

been activated.

9. Reconfigurable Yellow Telltale Display

• Transmission Temperature Warning Light

This light indicates that there is excessive

transmission fluid temperature that might

occur with severe usage such as trailer

towing. It may also occur when operating

344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

the vehicle in a high torque converter slip condition,

such as 4-wheel drive operation (e.g., snow plowing,

off- road operation). If this light comes on, stop the

vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster, with the

transmission in NEUTRAL until the light goes off.

CAUTION!

Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-

ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause

severe transmission damage or transmission failure.

WARNING!

If you continue operating the vehicle when the

Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi-

nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in

contact with hot engine or exhaust components and

cause a fire.

• Low Coolant Level Indicator

This telltale will turn on to indicate the

vehicle coolant level is low.

• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator

This telltale will turn on to indicate the

windshield washer fluid is low.

• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Malfunction

This light will turn on when a ACC is not

operating and needs service. For further

information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise

Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The

Features Of Your Vehicle”.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345

• LaneSense Service — If Equipped

This telltale will turn on to indicate that the

Lane Sense Departure has detected a

failure.

• Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message Indicator

This telltale will turn on to indicate the fuel

filler cap is loose.

10. Manual Speed Assist (MSA) Speed Warning Telltale

— If Equipped

This area displays the Manual Speed Assist

(MSA) speed warning telltale.

11. Speed For Electronic Cruise Control Setting

This displays the set speed of the Electronic

Speed Control.

12. Reconfigurable Telltale Area

• Hill Descent Indicator — If Equipped

The symbol illuminates (is armed) when

the 4WD Low switch is activated and the

transmission range indicator is in LOW or

REVERSE position (Off-Road Mode).

• Selec Speed Control Indicator — If Equipped

The symbol illuminates and is active only

in 4WD Low range when either the HDC

switch on the instrument panel is selected

or ROCK mode for Selec-Terrain is selected.

If the T-case is not in 4WD Low range, the following

message is displayed “Selec-Speed Unavailable”.

346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Electronic Speed Control ON

This light will turn on when the electronic

speed control is ON. For further informa-

tion, refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in

“Understanding The Features Of Your

Vehicle”.

• Electronic Speed Control SET

This light will turn on when the electronic

speed control is SET. For further information,

refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Un-

derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.

13. Reconfigurable Red Telltale Display

• Power Steering System Over Temperature — If

Equipped

If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER

TEMP” message and a icon are displayed

on the EVIC screen, it indicates that ex-

treme steering maneuvers may have oc-

curred, which caused an over temperature condition

in the power steering system. You will lose power

steering assistance momentarily until the over tem-

perature condition no longer exists. Once driving

conditions are safe, then pull over and let vehicle idle.

After five minutes, the system will cool and return to

normal operation. Refer to “Power Steering” in

“Starting and Operating” for further information.

NOTE:

• Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera-

tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under

these conditions there will be a substantial increase

in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle

speeds and during parking maneuvers.

• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer

for service.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347

• Door Ajar

This light will turn on to indicate that one

or more doors may be ajar.

• Liftgate Ajar

This light will turn on to indicate that

liftgate may be ajar.

• Oil Pressure Warning Light

This light indicates low engine oil pressure.

The light should turn on momentarily when

the engine is started. If the light turns on while

driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as

soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light

turns on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is cor-

rected. This light does not show how much oil is in

the engine. The engine oil level must be checked

under the hood.

• Charging System Light

This light shows the status of the electrical

charging system. If the light stays on or comes

on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s

non-essential electrical devices or increase engine

speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains

on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a prob-

lem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IM-

MEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.

If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting

Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.

348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light

This light informs you of a problem with

the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) sys-

tem. The light will come on when the

ignition is first turned ON and remain on

briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on

during starting, have the system checked by an

authorized dealer.

If a problem is detected, the light will come on while

the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when

the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever

is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn

off.

If the light remains lit with the engine running, your

vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an

authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If

the light is flashing when the engine is running,

immediate service is required. You may experience

reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or en-

gine stall and your vehicle may require towing.

• Oil Temperature Warning Light

This telltale indicates engine oil tempera-

ture is high. If the light turns on while

driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the

engine as soon as possible.

• Secondary Air Bag Warning Light

If the light turns on while driving, have the

system inspected at an authorized dealer as

soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Re-

straints” in “Things To Know Before Start-

ing Your Vehicle” for further information.

14. 4WD LOW Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the

four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and rear drive-

shafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349

and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range

provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide in-

creased torque at the wheels.

For further information on four-wheel drive operation

and proper use, refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation —

If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating”.

15. SERV 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light alerts the driver that the 4WD is in need of

service. If this light is illuminated, see your authorized

dealer as soon as possible.

16. Temperature Gauge

The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-

ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that

the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.

The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-

ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,

or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to

exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot engine cooling system could

damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads

“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle

with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer

drops back into the normal range. If the pointer

remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,

turn the engine off immediately and call an autho-

rized dealer for service.

WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or

others could be badly burned by steam or boiling

coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer

for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to

look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your

(Continued)

350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

WARNING! (Continued)

Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling

System Pressure Cap paragraph.

Oil Change Reset

Oil Change Due

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change

indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will

display in the EVIC for five seconds after a single chime

has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change

interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty

cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval

may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving

style.

Unless reset, this message will continue to display each

time you turn the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN

position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and

release the OK button. To reset the oil change indicator

system (after performing the scheduled maintenance)

refer to the following procedure.

1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE

START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the

ON/RUN position (do not start the engine.)

2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times

within 10 seconds.

3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE

START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the

OFF/LOCK position.

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you

start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not

reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351

EVIC Red Telltales

This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These

telltales include:

• Charging System Light

This light shows the status of the electrical charg-

ing system. If the light stays on or comes on while

driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential

electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If

the charging system light remains on, it means that the

vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging

system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-

rized dealer.

If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting

Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.

• Engine Temperature Warning Light

This light warns of an overheated engine condi-

tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap-

proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single

chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further

overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H,

a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed

to cool.

If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and

stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,

shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-

hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to

normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for

service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To

Do In Emergencies” for more information.

352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Door Ajar

This light will turn on to indicate that one or

more doors may be ajar.

• Oil Pressure Warning Light

This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If

the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut

off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound

when this light turns on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.

This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.

The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light

This light informs you of a problem with the

Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The

light will come on when the ignition is first

turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the

light does not come on during starting, have the system

checked by an authorized dealer.

If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the

engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the

vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is

placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.

If the light remains lit with the engine running, your

vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an autho-

rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is

flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is

required. You may experience reduced performance, an

elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may

require towing.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353

• Electric Power Steering Malfunction Warning Light

This telltale is on when the Electric Power

Steering is not operating and needs service.

• Air Bag Warning Light

This light will turn on for four to eight seconds

as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first

turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on

during starting, stays on, or turns on while

driving, have the system inspected at an authorized

dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”

in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for

further information.

• Oil Temperature Warning Light

This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is

high. If the light turns on while driving, stop

the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as

possible.

• Liftgate Open Warning Light

This telltale is on when the Trailer Brake has

been disconnected.

EVIC Yellow Telltales

This area will show reconfigurable yellow caution tell-

tales. These telltales include:

• Forward Collision Telltale

This telltale will turn on warn you of a possible

collision with the vehicle in front of you.

• Service Stop/Start System Telltale — If Equipped

This telltale will turn on to indicate the Stop/

Start system is not functioning properly and

service is required.

354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Service Adaptive Cruise Control Telltale

This light will turn on when a ACC is not

operating and needs service. For further infor-

mation, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of

Your Vehicle”.

• Low Fuel Telltale

When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal

(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until

fuel is added.

• Transmission Over Temperature Telltale — If

Equipped

This telltale indicates that the transmission

fluid temperature is running hot. This may

occur with severe usage, such as trailer towing.

If this telltale turns on, safely pull over and

stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEU-

TRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light

turns off.

• Service 4WD Telltale

If the light stays on or comes on during driv-

ing, it means that the 4WD system is not

functioning properly and that service is re-

quired. We recommend you drive to the near-

est service center and have the vehicle serviced

immediately.

• Diesel Wait To Start Telltale — If Equipped

The “Wait To Start” telltale will illuminate for

approximately two seconds when the ignition is

turned to the RUN position. It’s duration may be longer

based on colder operating conditions. Vehicle will not

initiate start until telltale is out. Refer to “Starting Proce-

dures” in “Starting and Operating” for further

information.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355

• LaneSence Failure Telltale

This telltale will turn on to indicate that the

LaneSense Departure has detected a failure.

• Diesel Low Diesel Exhaust Telltale — If Equipped

This telltale will turn on to indicate the Diesel

Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is low

• rear Axle Locker Telltale

This light indicates when the rear axle lock has

been activated.

• Washer Fluid Telltale

This telltale will turn on to indicate the wind-

shield washer fluid is low.

• Diesel water In Fuel Telltale — If Equipped

The “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” will illu-

minate when there is water detected in the fuel

filters. If this light remains on, DO NOT start

the vehicle before you drain the water from the

fuel filters to prevent engine damage. Refer to “Mainte-

nance Procedures/Draining Fuel/Water Separator Fil-

ters” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further

information.

• Loose Fuel Filler Cap

This telltale will turn on to indicate that the fuel

filler cap may be loose.

EVIC Selectable Menu Items

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until

the desired Selectable Menu icon is highlighted in the

EVIC.

356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Speedometer

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow

button until the Speedometer Menu item is

highlighted in the EVIC. Push the OK button to

change the speedometer scale from mph

to km/h (or vice versa).

Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until

the Vehicle Info Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC.

Push and release the RIGHT/LEFT arrow button to cycle

through the Vehicle Info sub-menus, follow the prompts

on each screen as needed.

Tire Pressure

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until

“Tire Pressure” is highlighted in the EVIC. Push and

release the RIGHT arrow button and one of the following

will be displayed:

If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is displayed

with tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON.

If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To

XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire

pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the

pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different

color than the other tire pressure value.

If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire

Pressure System” is displayed.

Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be

reset. Push and release the LEFT arrow button to return

to the main menu.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357

Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”

under “Starting and Operating” for further information.

Coolant Temperature

Transmission Temp

Oil Temp

Oil Life

Battery Voltage

Driver Assist

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu

The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The

information displayed depends on ACC system status.

Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/

OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of

the following displays in the EVIC:

Adaptive Cruise Control Off

When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap-

tive Cruise Control Off.”

Adaptive Cruise Control Ready

When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has

not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise

Control Ready.”

Push and release the SET + or the SET- button (located on

the steering wheel) and the following will display in the

EVIC:

ACC SET

When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the

instrument cluster.

358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC

activity occurs, which may include any of the following:

• Distance Setting Change

• System Cancel

• Driver Override

• System Off

• ACC Proximity Warning

• ACC Unavailable Warning

• The DID will return to the last display selected after

five seconds of no ACC display activity.

For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding The

Features Of Your Vehicle”.

LaneSense

The EVIC displays the current LaneSense system set-

tings. The information displayed depends on LaneSense

system status and the conditions that need to be met. For

further information, refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped”

in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.

Fuel Economy

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until

the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted. Push and

Hold the OK button to reset feature.

• Range

• Average Fuel Economy

• Current Fuel Economy (MPG or L/100 km)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359

Trip Info

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until

the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC (Toggle left

or right to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip information

will display the following:

• Distance

• Average Fuel Economy

• Elapsed Time

Hold the OK button to reset feature information.

Audio

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until

the Audio Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC.

Stored Messages

Screen Setup

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow

button until the Screen Setup Menu item is

highlighted in the EVIC. Push and release the OK button

to enter the sub-menus and follow the prompts on the

screen as needed. The Screen Setup feature allows you to

change what information is displayed in the instrument

cluster as well as the location that information is dis-

played.

360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items

Upper Left

• Compass

• Outside Temp (default setting)

• Time

• Range To Empty (RTE)

• Average MPG or L/100 km

• Current MPG or L/100 km

• None

Upper Right

• Compass (default setting)

• Outside Temp

• Time

• Range To Empty (RTE)

• Average MPG or L/100 km

• Current MPG or L/100 km

• None

Center

• Menu Title (Default Setting)

• Compass

• Outside Temp

• Time

• Range To Empty

• Average MPG or L/100 km

• Current MPG or L/100 km

• Trip A

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361

• Trip B

• Audio Information

• None

Restore To Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default

Settings)

• OK

• Cancel

DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)

The DID displays are located in the center portion of the

cluster and consists of eight sections:

1. LaneSense— If Equipped

The LaneSense system provides the driver with

visual and steering torque warnings when the

vehicle starts to drift out of its lane uninten-

tionally without the use of a turn signal.

• When LaneSense system is ON and ready the lane

lines and LaneSense indicator are the color gray.

362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• When LaneSense system is armed, the lane lines

change to white and the LaneSense indicator

changes to green.

• When LaneSense system senses a lane cross situa-

tion, the approaching lane line and the LaneSense

indicator change from white to yellow.

For further information, refer to “LaneSense— If

Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your

Vehicle”.

2. DID Selectable Display Area

This area displays selectable information (Compass,

Temp, Range to Empty, Trip, Average MPG or L/100 km).

3. Electronic Park Brake Failure

This telltale indicates that there is an Electronic

Park Brake Fault. Please see your authorized

dealer for assistance.

4. Brake Warning Light

This light monitors various brake functions,

including brake fluid level and parking brake

application. If the brake light turns on it may

indicate that the parking brake is applied, that

the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with

the anti-lock brake system reservoir.

If the light remains on when the parking brake has been

disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the

master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake

hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the

Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake

System (ABS)/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.

In this case, the light will remain on until the condition

has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake

booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake

and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-

ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic

system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is

indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on

when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has

dropped below a specified level.

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp

cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-

tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and

the brake fluid level checked.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is

dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have

a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force

Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the

Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS

Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by

turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the

ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-

proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off

unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is

detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light

inspected by an authorized dealer.

364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is

applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-

tion.

NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is

applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

5. Driver Information Display (DID)

The DID display area will normally display the main

menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main

menu. The DID display area also displays “pop up”

messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn-

ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall

into several categories:

• Five Second Stored Messages

When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of

message takes control of the main display area for

five seconds and then returns to the previous screen.

Most of the messages of this type are then stored (as

long as the condition that activated it remains active)

and can be reviewed from the “Messages” main

menu item. As long as there is a stored message, an

“i” will be displayed in the middle of the DID’s top

line. Examples of this message type are “Right Front

Turn Signal Lamp Out” and “Low Tire Pressure”.

• Unstored Messages

This message type is displayed indefinitely or until

the condition that activated the message is cleared.

Examples of this message type are “Turn Signal On”

(if a turn signal is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver

leaves the vehicle).

• Unstored Messages Until RUN

These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start

feature. This message type is displayed until the

ignition is in the RUN state. Examples of this message

type are “Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and

“Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start”.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365

• Five Second Unstored Messages

When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of

message takes control of the main display area for

five seconds and then returns to the previous screen.

An example of this message type is “Automatic High

Beams On”.

6. Manual Speed Assist (MSA) Speed Warning Telltale —

If Equipped

This area displays the Manual Speed Assist

(MSA) speed warning telltale.

7. Speed For Electronic Cruise Control Setting

This displays the set speed of the Electronic

Speed Control.

8. DID Selectable Display Area

This area displays selectable information (Compass,

Temp, Range to Empty, Trip, Average MPG or L/100 km).

NOTE: The system will display the last known outside

temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to

be driven several minutes before the updated tempera-

ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the

displayed temperature; therefor, temperature readings

are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.

9. Reconfigurable Telltale Area

• Hill Descent Indicator — If Equipped

The symbol illuminates (is armed) when

the 4WD Low switch is activated and the

transmission range indicator is in LOW or

REVERSE position (Off-Road Mode).

366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Selec Speed Control Indicator — If Equipped

The symbol illuminates and is active only

in 4WD Low range when either the HDC

switch on the instrument panel is selected

or ROCK mode for Selec-Terrain is selected.

If the T-case is not in 4WD Low range, the following

message is displayed “Selec-Speed Unavailable”.

• Electronic Speed Control ON

This light will turn on when the electronic

speed control is ON. For further informa-

tion, refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in

“Understanding The Features Of Your

Vehicle”.

• Electronic Speed Control SET

This light will turn on when the electronic

speed control is SET. For further information,

refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Un-

derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.

• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Distance Setting

Display

This will display the distance setting for the

ACC system. For further information, refer to

“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Under-

standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.

10. Shift Lever Status (PRNDL)

The shift lever status “P,R,N,D,L,9,8,7,6,5,4,3,2,1” are dis-

played indicating the shift lever position. Refer to “Start-

ing And Operating”.

11. Instructional Area

This area will display text to the visual warnings (i.e.,

“Push Brake To Start”).

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367

12. Amber Reconfigurable Telltale Display

• Transmission Temperature Warning Light

This light indicates that there is excessive

transmission fluid temperature that might

occur with severe usage such as trailer

towing. It may also occur when operating

the vehicle in a high torque converter slip condition,

such as 4-wheel-drive operation (e.g., snow plowing,

off- road operation). If this light comes on, stop the

vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster, with the

transmission in NEUTRAL until the light goes off.

CAUTION!

Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-

ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause

severe transmission damage or transmission failure.

WARNING!

If you continue operating the vehicle when the

Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi-

nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in

contact with hot engine or exhaust components and

cause a fire.

• Low Fuel Telltale

When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0

gal (11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain

on until fuel is added.

• Rear Axle Lock Indicator — If Equipped

This light indicates when the rear axle lock

has been activated.

368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Low Coolant Level Indicator

This telltale will turn on to indicate the

vehicle coolant level is low.

• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator

This telltale will turn on to indicate the

windshield washer fluid is low.

• 4WD LOW Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the

four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and rear

driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing

the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.

Low range provides a greater gear reduction ratio to

provide increased torque at the wheels.

For further information on four-wheel drive opera-

tion and proper use, refer to “Four-Wheel Drive

Operation — If Equipped” in “Starting And

Operating”.

• SERV 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light alerts the driver that the 4WD is in need of

service. If this light is illuminated, see your autho-

rized dealer as soon as possible.

• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Malfunction

This light will turn on when a ACC is not

operating and needs service. For further

information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise

Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The

Features Of Your Vehicle”.

• LaneSense Service — If Equipped

This telltale will turn on to indicate that the

Lane Sense Departure has detected a

failure.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369

• Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message Indicator

This telltale will turn on to indicate the fuel

filler cap is loose.

13. Odometer Display/Fuel Gauge/Temperature Gauge/

Submenu Area

• The odometer display shows the total distance the

vehicle has been driven.

U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of

vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser

the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If

your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the

repair technician should leave the odometer reading

the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he

cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero,

and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating

what the mileage was before the repair or service. It

is a good idea for you to make a record of the

odometer reading before the repair/service, so that

you can be sure that it is properly reset, or that the

door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be

reset at zero.

When the appropriate conditions exist, this display

shows the Driver Information Display (DID) mes-

sages and Submenus.

• Fuel Gauge

Fuel Gauge displays the level of fuel in the fuel tank

when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.

• Temperature Gauge

The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-

perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-

cates that the engine cooling system is operating

satisfactorily.

The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-

perature when driving in hot weather, up mountain

grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be

370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal

operating range.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot engine cooling system could

damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads

“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle

with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer

drops back into the normal range. If the pointer

remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,

turn the engine off immediately and call an autho-

rized dealer for service.

WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or

others could be badly burned by steam or boiling

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer

for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to

look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your

Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling

System Pressure Cap paragraph.

14. Red Reconfigurable Telltale Display

• Engine Temperature Warning Light

This light warns of an overheated engine

condition. As temperatures rise and the gauge

approaches H, this indicator will illuminate

and a single chime will sound after reaching a set

threshold.

If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over

and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it

off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and

idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371

return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and

call for service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats”

in “What To Do In Emergencies” for more

information.

• Power Steering System Over Temperature — If

Equipped

If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER

TEMP” message and a icon are displayed

on the DID screen, it indicates that extreme

steering maneuvers may have occurred,

which caused an over temperature condition in the

power steering system. You will lose power steering

assistance momentarily until the over temperature

condition no longer exists. Once driving conditions

are safe, then pull over and let vehicle idle. After five

minutes, the system will cool and return to normal

operation. Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting And

Operating” for further information.

NOTE:

• Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera-

tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under

these conditions there will be a substantial increase

in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle

speeds and during parking maneuvers.

• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer

for service.

• Door Ajar

This light will turn on to indicate that one

or more doors may be ajar.

• Liftgate Ajar

This light will turn on to indicate that

liftgate may be ajar.

372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Oil Pressure Warning Light

This light indicates low engine oil pressure.

The light should turn on momentarily when

the engine is started. If the light turns on while

driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as

soon as possible. A chime will sound for four minutes

when this light turns on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is cor-

rected. This light does not show how much oil is in

the engine. The engine oil level must be checked

under the hood.

• Charging System Light

This light shows the status of the electrical

charging system. If the light stays on or comes

on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s

non-essential electrical devices or increase engine

speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains

on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a prob-

lem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IM-

MEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.

If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting

Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.

• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light

This light informs you of a problem with

the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) sys-

tem. The light will come on when the

ignition is first turned ON and remain on

briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on

during starting, have the system checked by an

authorized dealer.

If a problem is detected, the light will come on while

the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the

vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is

placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373

If the light remains lit with the engine running, your

vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an

authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If

the light is flashing when the engine is running,

immediate service is required. You may experience

reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or en-

gine stall and your vehicle may require towing.

• Oil Temperature Warning Light

This telltale indicates engine oil tempera-

ture is high. If the light turns on while

driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the

engine as soon as possible.

• Air Bag Warning Light

This light will turn on for four to eight

seconds as a bulb check when the ignition

switch is first turned to the ON/RUN po-

sition. If the light is either not on during

starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the

system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as

possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things

To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further

information.

Oil Change Reset

Oil Change Due

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change

indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will

display in the DID for five seconds after a single chime

has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change

interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty

cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval

may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving

style.

Unless reset, this message will continue to display each

time you turn the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN

position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and

374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

release the OK button. To reset the oil change indicator

system (after performing the scheduled maintenance)

refer to the following procedure.

1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE

START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the

ON/RUN position (do not start the engine.)

2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times

within 10 seconds.

3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE

START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the

OFF/LOCK position.

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you

start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not

reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.

DID Red Telltales

This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These

telltales include:

• Charging System Light

This light shows the status of the electrical charg-

ing system. If the light stays on or comes on while

driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential

electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If

the charging system light remains on, it means that the

vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging

system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-

rized dealer.

If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting

Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375

• Engine Temperature Warning Light

This light warns of an overheated engine condi-

tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap-

proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single

chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further

overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H,

a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed

to cool.

If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and

stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,

shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-

hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to

normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for

service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To

Do In Emergencies” for more information.

• Door Ajar

This light will turn on to indicate that one or

more doors may be ajar.

• Oil Pressure Warning Light

This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If

the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut

off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound

when this light turns on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.

This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.

The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light

This light informs you of a problem with the

Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The

light will come on when the ignition is first

376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the

light does not come on during starting, have the system

checked by an authorized dealer.

If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the

engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the

vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is

placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.

If the light remains lit with the engine running, your

vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an autho-

rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is

flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is

required. You may experience reduced performance, an

elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may

require towing.

• Electric Power Steering Malfunction Warning Light

This telltale is on when the Electric Power

Steering is not operating and needs service.

• Air Bag Warning Light

This light will turn on for four to eight seconds

as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first

turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on

during starting, stays on, or turns on while

driving, have the system inspected at an authorized

dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”

in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for

further information.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377

• Oil Temperature Warning Light

This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is

high. If the light turns on while driving, stop

the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as

possible.

• Liftgate Open Warning Light

This telltale is on when the Trailer Brake has

been disconnected.

DID Yellow Telltales

This area will show reconfigurable yellow caution tell-

tales. These telltales include:

• Forward Collision Telltale

This telltale will turn on warn you of a possible

collision with the vehicle in front of you.

• Service Stop/Start System Telltale — If Equipped

This telltale will turn on to indicate the Stop/

Start system is not functioning properly and

service is required.

• Service Adaptive Cruise Control Telltale

This light will turn on when a ACC is not

operating and needs service. For further infor-

mation, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of

Your Vehicle”.

• Low Fuel Telltale

When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal

(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until

fuel is added.

378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Transmission Over Temperature Telltale — If

Equipped

This telltale indicates that the transmission

fluid temperature is running hot. This may

occur with severe usage, such as trailer towing.

If this telltale turns on, safely pull over and

stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEU-

TRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light

turns off.

• Service 4WD Telltale

If the light stays on or comes on during driv-

ing, it means that the 4WD system is not

functioning properly and that service is re-

quired. We recommend you drive to the near-

est service center and have the vehicle serviced

immediately.

• Diesel Wait To Start Telltale — If Equipped

The “Wait To Start” telltale will illuminate for

approximately two seconds when the ignition is

turned to the RUN position. It’s duration may be longer

based on colder operating conditions. Vehicle will not

initiate start until telltale is out. Refer to “Starting Proce-

dures” in “Starting and Operating” for further

information.

• LaneSence Failure Telltale

This telltale will turn on to indicate that the

LaneSense Departure has detected a failure.

• Diesel Low Diesel Exhaust Telltale — If Equipped

This telltale will turn on to indicate the Diesel

Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is low

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379

• rear Axle Locker Telltale

This light indicates when the rear axle lock has

been activated.

• Washer Fluid Telltale

This telltale will turn on to indicate the wind-

shield washer fluid is low.

• Diesel water In Fuel Telltale — If Equipped

The “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” will illu-

minate when there is water detected in the fuel

filters. If this light remains on, DO NOT start

the vehicle before you drain the water from the

fuel filters to prevent engine damage. Refer to “Mainte-

nance Procedures/Draining Fuel/Water Separator Fil-

ters” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further

information.

• Loose Fuel Filler Cap

This telltale will turn on to indicate that the fuel

filler cap may be loose.

DID Selectable Menu Items

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until

the desired Selectable Menu item is highlighted in the

DID.

Follow the Menu or submenu prompts as desired.

Speedometer

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until

the Speedometer Menu item is highlighted in the DID.

Push and release the OK button to change the speedom-

eter scale from mph to km/h (or vice versa).

380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until

the Vehicle Info Menu item is highlighted in the DID.

Push and release the RIGHT/LEFT arrow button to cycle

through the Vehicle Info sub-menus, follow the prompts

on each screen as needed.

Tire Pressure

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until

“Tire Pressure” is highlighted in the DID. Push and

release the RIGHT arrow button and one of the following

will be displayed:

• If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is

displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of

the ICON.

• If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To

XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire

pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the

pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different

color than the other tire pressure value.

• If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service

Tire Pressure System” is displayed.

Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be

reset. Push and release the LEFT arrow button to return

to the main menu.

Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”

under “Starting and Operating” for further information.

Coolant Temperature

Transmission Temp

Oil Temp

Oil Life

Battery Voltage

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381

Driver Assist

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu

The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The

information displayed depends on ACC system status.

Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/

OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of

the following displays in the DID:

Adaptive Cruise Control Off

When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap-

tive Cruise Control Off.”

Adaptive Cruise Control Ready

When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has

not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise

Control Ready.”

Push and release the SET + or the SET- button (located on

the steering wheel) and the following will display in the

DID:

ACC SET

When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the

instrument cluster.

The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC

activity occurs, which may include any of the following:

• Distance Setting Change

• System Cancel

• Driver Override

• System Off

• ACC Proximity Warning

• ACC Unavailable Warning

382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• The DID will return to the last display selected after

five seconds of no ACC display activity.

For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding The

Features Of Your Vehicle”.

LaneSense

The DID displays the current LaneSense system settings.

The information displayed depends on LaneSense sys-

tem status and the conditions that need to be met. For

further information, refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped”

in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.

Fuel Economy

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until

the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted in the DID.

Push and Hold the OK button to reset feature.

• Range

• Average Fuel Economy

• Current Fuel Economy (MPG or L/100 km)

Trip Info

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until

the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the DID (Toggle left

or right to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip information

will display the following:

• Distance

• Average Fuel Economy

• Elapsed Time

Hold the OK button to reset feature information.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383

Audio

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until

the Audio Menu displays in the DID.

Stored Messages

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until

the Messages Menu item is highlighted in the DID. This

feature shows the number of stored warning messages.

Pushing the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see

what the stored messages are.

Screen Setup

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until

the Screen Setup Menu displays in the DID. Push and

release the OK button to enter the sub-menus. The Screen

Setup feature allows you to change what information is

displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location

that information is displayed.

Uconnect® SETTINGS

The Uconnect® system uses a combination of buttons on

the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on

the center of the instrument panel that allow you to

access and change the customer programmable features.

Many features can vary by vehicle.

384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Buttons On The Faceplate

Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect®

system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,

there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right

Uconnect® 5.0 Buttons On Touchscreen And Buttons On

Faceplate

1—Uconnect®ButtonsOnTheFaceplate

2—Uconnect®ButtonsOnTheTouchscreen

Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Buttons On The Touchscreen

1—Uconnect®ButtonsOnTheTouchscreen

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385

side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instru-

ment panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through

menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the

center of the control knob one or more times to select or

change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).

Your Uconnect® system may also have a Screen Off and

Back buttons located below the system.

Push the Screen Off button to turn off the Uconnect®

screen. Push the Screen Off button a second time to turn

the screen on.

Push the Back button to exit out of a Menu or certain

option on the Uconnect® system.

Buttons On The Touchscreen

Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the

Uconnect® display.

Customer Programmable Features/Personal

Settings — Uconnect® 5.0 Settings

Push the MORE button on the faceplate to display the

menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect® system

allows you to access programmable features that may be

equipped such as Display, Voice, Clock & Date, Safety &

Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort,

Engine Off Options, Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/

Bluetooth®, Sirius Setup, Restore Settings, and Clear

Personal Data.

NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.

When making a selection, press the button on the touch-

screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired

mode, press and release the preferred setting and make

your selection. Once the setting is complete, either press

the Back Arrow/Done button on the touchscreen or the

Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous

menu or press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close

386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down

Arrow buttons on the right side of the screen will allow

you to toggle up or down through the available settings.

Display

After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen

the following settings will be available.

• Display Mode

When in this display you may select the “Auto” or

“Manual” display settings. To change Mode status, press

and release the “Auto” or “Manual” button on the

touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the

touchscreen.

NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display

Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause

the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control

even though the headlights are on.

• Display Brightness With Headlights ON

When in this display, you may select the overall screen

brightness with the headlights on. Adjust the brightness

with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen

or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+”

and “–” buttons on the touchscreen. Then press the arrow

back button on the touchscreen.

NOTE: To make changes to the #Display Brightness with

Headlights ON# setting, the headlights must be on and

the interior dimmer switch must not be in the #party# or

#parade# positions.

• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF

When in this display, you may select the overall screen

brightness with the headlights off. Adjust the brightness

with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387

or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+”

and “–” buttons on the touchscreen. Then press the arrow

back button on the touchscreen.

NOTE: To make changes to the #Display Brightness with

Headlights OFF# setting, the headlights must be off and

the interior dimmer switch must not be in the #party# or

#parade# positions.

• Set Language

When in this display, you may select one of multiple

languages (English / Français / Español) for all display

nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navi-

gation system (if equipped). Press the “Set Language”

button on the touchscreen, then select the desired lan-

guage button on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow

button on the touchscreen to return to the previous

menu.

• Units

When in this display, you may select to have the DID,

odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed

between US and Metric units of measure. Press “US” or

“Metric” to make your selection. Press the back arrow

button on the touchscreen to return to the previous

menu.

• Touchscreen Beep

When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the

sound heard when a button on the touchscreen is

pressed. Press the “Touchscreen Beep” button on the

touchscreen then select from “on” or “off.” Press the back

arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous

menu.

388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Voice

• Voice Response Length

When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-

sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response

Length, press the “Voice Response Length” button on the

touchscreen and select from “Brief” or “Detailed.” Press

the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the

previous menu.

• Show Command List

When in this display, you may change the Show Com-

mand List settings. To change the Show Command List

settings, press the “Show Command List” button on the

touchscreen and select from “Always,” “With Help” or

“Never.” Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen

to return to the previous menu.

Clock & Date

After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the

following settings will be available:

• Set Time

When in this display, you may set the time and format

manually. Press the “Set Time” button then choose from

a 12 hour or 24 hour format. Press the corresponding

arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then

select AM or PM. Press the back arrow button on the

touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

• Set Date

When in this display, you may set the date manually.

Press the “Set Date” button then press the corresponding

arrows above and below the current date to adjust. Press

the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the

previous menu.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389

Safety/Assistance

After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the

touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• ParkSense®

The ParkSense® system will scan for objects behind the

vehicle when the transmission shift lever/gear selector is

in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18

km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to

indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be

enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To

change the ParkSense® status, press and release the

“Sound Only” or “Sounds and Display” button. Then

press the back arrow button on the touchscreen. Refer to

“ParkSense®” in “Understanding The Features Of Your

Vehicle” for system function and operating information.

• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse

When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview

mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the

RUN position and the transmission shift lever/gear

selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will

move back to their previous position when the transmis-

sion is shifted out of REVERSE. To make your selection,

press the “Tilt Mirrors In Reverse” button on the touch-

screen and make your selection. Press the back arrow

button on the touchscreen to return to the previous

menu.

• ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines

Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear

Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see

active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera

display whenever the shift lever/gear selector is put into

REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio

touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check

390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After

five seconds, this note will disappear. To make your

selection, press the “ParkView® Backup Camera Active

Guidelines” button on the touchscreen and make your

selection. Press arrow button on the touchscreen to return

to the previous menu.

• ParkView® Backup Camera Delay

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera

delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and

the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the

vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay

turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines

will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of

“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds

8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK

or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. To set the

ParkView® Backup Camera Delay push the MORE but-

ton on the faceplate, the “settings” button on the touch-

screen, then the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on

the touchscreen. Press the “Parkview Backup camera

Delay” button on the touchscreen to turn the ParkView®

Delay ON or OFF.

• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers

When this feature is selected, the system will automati-

cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture

on the windshield. To make your selection, press the

“Rain Sensing” button on the touchscreen and make your

selection. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen

to return to the previous menu.

• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)

system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control

System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function

and operating information. To make your selection, press

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391

the “Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen and

make your selection. Press the back arrow button on the

touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

Lights

After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the

following settings will be available.

• Headlights Off Delay

When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of

the amount of time the headlights remain on after the

engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay

setting, press the “Headlight Off Delay” button on the

touchscreen, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90

seconds. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen

to return to the previous menu.

• Headlight Illumination On Approach

When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of

the amount of time the headlights remain on after the

doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,

press the “Illuminated Approach” button and choose

either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90 seconds. Press the back

arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous

menu.

• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is

in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-

proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.

The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are

turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make

your selection, press the “Lights w/Wipers” button on

the touchscreen and make your selection. Press the back

arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous

menu.

392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Auto High Beams — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights

will activate/deactivate automatically under certain con-

ditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High

Beams” button on the touchscreen and make your selec-

tion. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to

return to the previous menu. Refer to “Lights/Auto High

Beams — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features

Of Your Vehicle” for further information.

• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on

whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,

press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touch-

screen and make your selection. Press the back arrow

button on the touchscreen to return to the previous

menu.

• Flash Lights With Lock

When this feature is selected, the headlights will flash

when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be

selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature

selected. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights

w/Lock” button on the touchscreen and make your

selection. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen

to return to the previous menu.

Doors & Locks

After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-

screen the following settings will be available.

• Auto Door Locks

When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto-

matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph

(24 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto Door

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393

Locks” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”

or “Off.” Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen

to return to the previous menu.

• Auto Unlock On Exit

When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when

the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the

PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is

opened. To make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock

On Exit” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”

or “Off.” Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen

to return to the previous menu.

• Flash Lights w/Lock

When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash

when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the Passive Entry

Feature. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights

w/Lock” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”

or “Off.” Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen

to return to the previous menu.

• Horn w/Lock

When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when

the Key Fob Lock button is pressed. To make your

selection, press the “Sound Horn With Lock” button on

the touchscreen and select from “Off,” ”1st Press,” or

“2nd Press.” Press the back arrow button on the touch-

screen to return to the previous menu.

• Horn w/Remote Start — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when

the remote start is activated. To make your selection,

press the “Horn w/Remote Start” button on the touch-

screen and select from “On” or “Off.” Press the back

arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous

menu.

394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Remote Door Unlock

When “Remote Door Unlock” is selected, you may

choose from “Driver” or “All.” Select “All” to have all

doors unlock with the first push of the Key Fob. Select

“Driver” to have the only the driver door open with the

first push of the key fob.

NOTE: Passive Entry — If Equipped. If “All” is selected,

all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry door

handle is grasped. If “Driver” is selected, only the

driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is

grasped.

• Passive Entry

This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s

door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless

Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make

your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the

touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off. Press the back

arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous

menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To

Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa-

tion.

• Memory Linked to Fob — If Equipped

This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to

enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the

vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Memory

Linked to Fob” button on the touchscreen and select from

“On” or “Off.” Press the back arrow button on the

touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat

location if “Memory Linked to Fob” is set to (ON) when

the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is used to

unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in

“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-

ther information.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395

• Power Lift Gate Alert — If Equipped

This feature plays an alert when the power lift gate is

raising or lowering. To make your selection, press the

“Power Lift Gate Alert” button on the touchscreen and

select from “On” or “Off.” Press the back arrow button on

the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped

After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start”

button on the touchscreen the following settings will be

available:

• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering

Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped

When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and

heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when

temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When tempera-

tures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will

turn ON. To make your selection, press the “Auto Heated

Seats” button on the touchscreen, then select either “Off,”

“Remote Start” or “All Starts.” Press the back arrow

button on the touchscreen to return to the previous

menu.

Engine Off Options

After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the

touchscreen the following settings will be available.

• Easy Exit Seats — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will

automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.

To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit Seats”

button on the touchscreen and make your selection. Press

the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the

previous menu.

• Engine Off Power Delay

When this feature is selected, the power window

switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (if equipped),

396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if

equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to

10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening

either front door will cancel this feature. To change the

Engine Off Power Delay status press the “0 seconds,” “45

seconds,” “5 minutes” or “10 minutes” button on the

touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the

touchscreen.

• Headlight Off Delay

When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to

have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds

when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off

Delay status press the “+” or “–” button on the touch-

screen to select your desired time interval. Press the back

arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous

menu.

Compass Settings — If Equipped

After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the

touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Variance

Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic

North and Geographic North. To compensate for the

differences the variance should be set for the zone where

the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly

set, the compass will automatically compensate for the

differences, and provide the most accurate compass

heading.

NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the

instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Lap-

tops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass

module is located, and it can cause interference with the

compass sensor, and it may give false readings.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397

• Perform Compass Calibration

Press the “Calibration” button on the touchscreen to

change this setting. This compass is self-calibrating,

which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass.

When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic

until it is calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass

by pressing the “ON” button on the touchscreen and

completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free

from large metal or metallic objects). The compass will

now function normally.

Audio

After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the

following settings will be available:

• Equalizer

When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and

Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–”

buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on

the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the

touchscreen. Press the back arrow/Done button on the

touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

• Balance/Fade

This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade

settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or use the

Compass Variance Map

398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

arrows to adjust, tap the “C” icon to readjust to the center.

Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to

return to the previous menu.

• Speed Adjusted Volume

This feature increases or decreases volume relative to

vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume

press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button on the touch-

screen and select from “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” buttons on

the touchscreen. Press the back arrow/Done button on

the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

• Surround Sound — If Equipped

This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.

To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”

button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.” Press the

back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to

the previous menu.

• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped

This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level

for portable devices connected through the AUX input.

To make your selection, press the “AUX Volume Offset”

button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.” Press the

back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to

the previous menu.

• Loudness — If Equipped

This feature improves sound quality at lower volumes.

To make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on

the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.” Press the back

arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the

previous menu.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399

Phone/Bluetooth®

After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the

touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Paired Devices

This feature shows which phones are paired to the

Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer

to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.

SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped

After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-

screen, the following settings will be available:

• Channel Skip

SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of

channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to

exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make

your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the

touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip

followed by pressing the back arrow button on the

touchscreen.

• Subscription Information

New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free

limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio

with your radio. Following the expiration of the free

services, it will be necessary to access the information on

the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.

Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen

to access the Subscription Information screen.

Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To

reactivate your service, either call the number listed on

the screen or visit the provider online.

NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription

and is available for U.S. residents only.

400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Restore Settings

After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the

touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Restore Settings

When this feature is selected it will reset the Display,

Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.

To restore the settings to their default setting, press the

Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking

#Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?”

select “Yes” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the

settings are restored, a pop up appears stating #settings

reset to default.# Press the back arrow button on the

touchscreen to exit.

Clear Personal Data

After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button

on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-

able:

• Clear Personal Data

When this feature is selected it will remove personal data

including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To remove

personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”

button and a pop-up will appear asking #Are you sure

you want to clear all personal data?” select “Yes” to Clear,

or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data has been cleared, a pop

up appears stating #Personal data cleared”. Press the back

arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous

menu.

Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®

8.4 Personal Settings

Press the “Apps” or the “Controls” button on the touch-

screen, then press the “Settings” button on the touch-

screen to display the menu setting screen. In this mode

the Uconnect® system allows you to access program-

mable features that may be equipped such as Display,

Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401

& Locks, Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off Options, Audio,

Phone/Bluetooth®, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings,

Clear Personal Data, and System Information.

NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.

To adjust the setting of a programmable feature, press the

desired setting option. Once in the desired setting option,

press and release the preferred setting until a check-mark

appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has

been selected.

Once the setting is complete, press the Back Arrow

button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu

or press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of

the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow

button on the right side of the screen will allow you to

toggle up or down through the list of available settings.

Display

After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen

the following settings will be available.

• Display Mode

When in this display you may select one of the auto

display settings. To change Mode status, select from

“Day,” “Night” or “Auto” until a check-mark appears

next to the setting, showing that setting has been se-

lected. Then press the arrow back button on the touch-

screen.

NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display

Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause

the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control

even though the headlights are on.

402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Display Brightness With Headlights ON

When in this display, you may select the brightness with

the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and

“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any

point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the

touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the

touchscreen.

NOTE: To make changes to the #Display Brightness with

Headlights ON# setting, the headlights must be on and

the interior dimmer switch must not be in the #party# or

#parade# positions.

• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF

When in this display, you may select the brightness with

the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and

“–”setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any

point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the

touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the

touchscreen.

NOTE: To make changes to the #Display Brightness with

Headlights OFF# setting, the headlights must be off and

the interior dimmer switch must not be in the #party# or

#parade# positions.

• Set Theme

This feature will allow you to choose a background

theme for the display screen. The theme will change the

background color, highlight color, and button color of the

display screen.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403

• Set Language

When in this display, you may select one of multiple

languages (English/Français/Español) for all display no-

menclature, including the trip functions and the naviga-

tion system (if equipped.) Press the “Set Language”

button on the touchscreen and then press the desired

language button until a check-mark appears next to the

language, showing that setting has been selected. Press

the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the

previous menu.

• Units

When in this display, you may select to have the DID,

odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed

between US and Metric units of measure. Press “US” or

“Metric” until a check-mark appears next to the setting,

showing that setting has been selected. Press the back

arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous

menu.

• Touchscreen Beep

When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the

sound heard when button on the touchscreen is pressed.

Press the “Touchscreen Beep” button on the touchscreen

until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing

that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow

button on the touchscreen to return to the previous

menu.

• Controls Screen Time-Out

When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the

ability for the controls screen to time out. Press the

“Controls Screen Time-Out” button on the touchscreen

until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing

that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow

button on the touchscreen to return to the previous

menu.

404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Navigation Turn-By-Turn Displayed In Cluster — If

Equipped

When this feature is selected, To make your selection,

press the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn Displayed In Clus-

ter” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark ap-

pears next to the setting, showing that setting has been

selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen

to return to the previous menu.

Voice

• Voice Response Length

When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-

sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response

Length, press the “Brief” or “Detailed” button on the

touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the

setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the

back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the

previous menu.

• Show Command List

When in this display, you may choose to Always, With

Help, or Never display the Teleprompter with possible

options while in a voice session. To change the Show

Command List settings, press the “Always,” “With

Help,” or “Never” button on the touchscreen until a

check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that

setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on

the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

Clock

After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the

following settings will be available:

• Sync Time With GPS

This feature will allow the radio to sync time with a GPS

signal. To change the Sync Time setting, press the “Sync

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405

time with GPS” button on the touchscreen until a check-

mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has

been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touch-

screen to return to the previous menu.

• Set Time Hours

This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync

time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be

unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”

buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or

down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to

return to the previous menu.

• Set Time Minutes

This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The

“Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be

unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”

buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or

down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to

return to the previous menu.

• Time Format

This feature will allow you to select the time format

display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the

touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the

“12hrs” or “24hrs” setting, showing that setting has been

selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen

to return to the previous menu.

• Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped

This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the

digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time

Status setting press the “Show Time in Status Bar” button

on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to

setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press

the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the

previous menu.

406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Safety & Driving Assistance

After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button

on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-

able:

• Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped

The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an

audible and/or visual warning to potential forward

collisions. The feature can be can be set to Far, or set to

Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This

means the system will warn you of a possible collision

with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther

away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change

the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near

setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you

are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change

the FCW status, press and release the “Near” or “Far”

button. Then press the back arrow button on the touch-

screen.

For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con-

trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your

Vehicle”.

• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Active Braking —

If Equipped

The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).

When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional

brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient

brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The

ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make

your selection, press the “Forward Collision Warning

(FCW) with Mitigation - Active Braking” button on the

touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,

indicating that the setting had been selected. Press the

back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the

previous menu. For further information, refer to “For-

ward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation” in “Un-

derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407

• ParkSense®

The ParkSense® system will scan for objects behind the

vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE

and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It

will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate

the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled

with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the

ParkSense® status, press and release the “Sound” or

“Sound and Display” button. Then press the back arrow

button on the touchscreen. Refer to “ParkSense®” in

“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for sys-

tem function and operating information.

• Front ParkSense® Chime Volume

The Front ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be

selected from the Driver Information Display (DID) or

Uconnect® System — if equipped. The chime volume

settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory

default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make your selec-

tion, press the “ParkSense® Front Chime Volume” button

on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to

setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.

Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return

to the previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its last

known configuration state through ignition cycles.

• Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume

The Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be

selected from the DID or Uconnect® System — if

equipped. The chime volume settings include LOW,

MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting

is MEDIUM. To make your selection, press the

“ParkSense® Rear Chime Volume” button on the touch-

screen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indi-

cating that the setting had been selected. Press the back

408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous

menu. ParkSense® will retain its last known configura-

tion state through ignition cycles.

• Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse

When this feature is selected, the exterior side view

mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the

RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the

REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their

previous position when the transmission is shifted out of

REVERSE. To make your selection, press the “Tilt Side

Mirrors In Reverse” button on the touchscreen, until a

check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the

setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on

the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

• Blind Spot Alert

When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature

Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects

in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be

activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected,

the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and

will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors.

When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind

Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the

exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn

signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot

Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the

Blind Spot Alert status, press the “Off,” “Lights” or

“Lights & Chime” button on the touchscreen. Then press

the back arrow button on the touchscreen.

NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in

the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is

not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.

Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor

alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result

in the BSM not operating to specification.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409

• ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines

Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear

Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see

active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera

display whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE.

The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen

display along with a caution note to “check entire sur-

roundings” across the top of the screen. After five sec-

onds, this note will disappear. To change the mode status,

press the “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines”

button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears

next to setting, indicating that the setting had been

selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen

to return to the previous menu.

• ParkView® Backup Camera Delay

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera

delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and

the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the

vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay

turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines

will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of

“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds

8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into

“PARK” or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.

To set the ParkView® Backup Camera Delay press the

“Controls” button on the touchscreen, the “settings”

button on the touchscreen, then the “Safety & Driving

Assistance” button on the touchscreen. Press the

“Parkview Backup camera Delay” button on the touch-

screen to turn the ParkView® Delay ON or OFF.

• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers

When this feature is selected, the system will automati-

cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture

on the windshield. To make your selection, press the

“Rain Sensing” button on the touchscreen, until a check-

mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting

410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

had been selected. Press the back arrow button on the

touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)

system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control

System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function

and operating information. To make your selection, press

the “Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen, until a

check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the

setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on

the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

Lights

After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen the

following settings will be available.

• Headlight Off Delay

When this feature is selected, it allows adjustment of the

amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine

is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay setting,

press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select

your desired time interval, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec,

60 sec or 90 seconds. Press the back arrow button on the

touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the

back button on the faceplate.

• Headlight Illumination On Approach

When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate

and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors

are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,

press the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to select

your desired time interval. Press the back arrow button

on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or

push the back button on the faceplate.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411

• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is

in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-

proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.

The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are

turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make

your selection, press the Headlights With Wipers button

on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to

setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the

back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the

previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.

• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights

will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To

make your selection, press the “Auto High Beams”

button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears

next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.

Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return

to the previous menu, or push the back button on the

faceplate. Refer to “Lights/Automatic High Beam — If

Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your

Vehicle” for further information.

• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on

whenever the vehicle is set in motion. To make your

selection, press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on

the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to

setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the

back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the

previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.

• Flash Lights With Lock

When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash

when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be

selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature

selected. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights

412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

with Lock” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark

appears next to setting, showing that setting has been

selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen

to return to the previous menu, or push the back button

on the faceplate.

Doors & Locks

After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touch-

screen the following settings will be available.

• Auto Door Locks

When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto-

matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph

(24 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto Door

Locks” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark

appears next to setting, showing that setting has been

selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen

to return to the previous menu, or push the back button

on the faceplate.

• Auto Unlock On Exit

When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when

the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or

NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To

make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock on Exit”

button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears

next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.

Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return

to the previous menu, or push the back button on the

faceplate.

• Flash Lights With Lock

When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash

when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the

passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with

or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To

make your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock”

button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 413

next to setting, indicating that the setting has been

selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen

to return to the previous menu.

• Sound Horn With Lock

When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when

the door locks are activated. To make your selection,

press either the “Off,” “1st Press,” or “2nd Press” button

on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to

setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the

back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the

previous menu.

• Sound Horn With Remote Start

When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when

the remote start is activated. To make your selection,

press the “Sound Horn with Remote Start” button on the

touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting,

showing that setting has been selected. Press the back

arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous

menu.

• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks

When #Driver Door# is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob

Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first

press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter

UNLOCK button. You must press the RKE transmitter

UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.

When #All Doors# is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob

Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the

RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.

414 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob

Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter

which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If

1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is pro-

grammed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the

driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press

Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed,

touching the handle more than once will only result in

the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected,

once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/

unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use

RKE transmitter).

• Passive Entry

This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles

door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless

Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make

your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the

touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,

showing that setting has been selected. Press the back

arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous

menu, or push the back button on the faceplate. Refer to

“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know Before

Starting Your Vehicle”.

• Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob — If Equipped

This feature provides automatic recall of all settings

stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior

mirrors, steering column position and radio station pre-

sets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and

exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the

“Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” button on the

touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,

showing that setting has been selected. Press the back

arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous

menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 415

NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat

location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set

to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter

is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory

Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”

for further information.

• Power Lift Gate Chime — If Equipped

This feature plays an alert when the power lift gate is

raising or lowering. To make your selection, press the

“Power Lift Gate Chime” button on the touchscreen, until

a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that

setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on

the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push

the back button on the faceplate.

Auto-On Comfort — If Equipped

After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the

touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering

Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped

When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat will

automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F

(4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the

driver vented seat will turn on. To make your selection,

press the “Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat &

Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start” button on the touch-

screen, then select either “Off,” “Remote Start” or “All

Starts” until a check-mark appears next to setting, show-

ing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow/

Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous

menu.

Engine Off Options

After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the

touchscreen the following settings will be available.

416 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped

This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to

enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the

vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit

Seat” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark

appears next to setting, showing that setting has been

selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen

to return to the previous menu.

• Engine Off Power Delay

When this feature is selected, the power window

switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (if equipped),

DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if

equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to

10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening

either front door will cancel this feature. To change the

Engine Off Power Delay status press the press the “+” or

“-” button to choose from “0 seconds,” “45 seconds,” “5

minutes,” or “10 minutes.” Press the back arrow button

on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

• Headlight Off Delay

When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to

have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds

when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off

Delay status press the “+” or “-” button on the touch-

screen to select your desired time interval. Press the back

arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous

menu.

Audio

After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the

following settings will be available.

• Balance/Fade

This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade

settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 417

to adjust, or tap the ‘C’ icon to readjust to the center. Press

the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the

previous menu.

• Equalizer

This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble

settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting

buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on

the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the

touchscreen. Press the back arrow button on the touch-

screen to return to the previous menu.

NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your

finger up or down to change the setting as well as press

directly on the desired setting.

• Speed Adjusted Volume

This feature increases or decreases volume relative to

vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume

press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen.

Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return

to the previous menu.

• Surround Sound — If Equipped

This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.

To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”

button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.” Press the

back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the

previous menu.

• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped

This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level

for portable devices connected through the AUX input.

To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match

button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3.

Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return

to the previous menu.

418 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Loudness — If Equipped

Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To

make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the

touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” Press the back

arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous

menu.

Phone/Bluetooth®

After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth®” button on the

touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Paired Phones

This feature shows which phones are paired to the

Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer

to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.

• Paired Audio Sources

This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the

Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer

to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.

SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped

After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-

screen, the following settings will be available:

• Channel Skip

SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of

channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to

exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make

your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the

touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip

followed by pressing the back arrow button on the

touchscreen.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 419

• Subscription Information

New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free

limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio

with your radio. Following the expiration of the free

services, it will be necessary to access the information on

the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.

Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen

to access the Subscription Information screen.

Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To

reactivate your service, either call the number listed on

the screen or visit the provider online.

NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription

and is available for U.S. residents only.

Restore Settings

After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the

touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Restore Settings

When this feature is selected it will reset the Display,

Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.

To restore the settings to their default setting, press the

Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking

#Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?”

select “OK” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the

settings are restored, a pop up appears stating #settings

reset to default.#

420 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Clear Personal Data

After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button

on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-

able:

• Clear Personal Data

When this feature is selected it will remove personal data

including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To remove

personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”

button and a pop-up will appear asking #Are you sure

you want to clear all personal data?” select “OK” to

Clear, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data has been cleared,

a pop up appears stating #Personal data cleared.”

System Information

After pressing the “System Information” button on the

touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• System Information

When System Information is selected, a System Informa-

tion screen will appear displaying the system software

version.

Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED

For detailed information about your Uconnect® radio,

refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 421

iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

Located in the front storage area, this feature allows an

iPod® or external USB device to be plugged into the USB

port.

iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®

and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions

may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please

visit Apple’s website for software updates.

For further information, refer to the Uconnect® User’s

Manual.

STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF

EQUIPPED

The remote sound system controls are located on the rear

surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to

access the switches.

Media Hub

1—USBPort

2—SDCardSlot

3—AUXPort

422 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a

pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and

mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker

switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom

of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.

Pushing the center button will make the radio switch

between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM/

CD/AUX, etc.).

The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a

pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand

control is different depending on which mode you are in.

The following describes the left-hand control operation in

each mode.

Radio Operation

Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next

listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch

will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.

The button located in the center of the left-hand control

will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-

grammed in the radio preset button.

Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering

Wheel)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 423

CD Player

Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next

track on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once

will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the

beginning of the previous track if it is within eight

seconds after the current track begins to play.

If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the

second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.

The center button on the left side rocker switch has no

function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a

multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the

center button will select the next available CD in the

player.

CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE

To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following

precautions:

1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the

surface.

2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,

wiping from center to edge.

3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-

ing the disc.

4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,

or anti-static sprays.

5. Store the disc in its case after playing.

6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.

7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become

too high.

424 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular

disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coat-

ing removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)

oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known

good disc before considering disc player service.

RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES

Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in

your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from

your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated

by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is

not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does

not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the

antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be

turned down or off during mobile phone operation when

not using Uconnect® (if equipped).

General Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and

RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the

following conditions:

• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by

the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

• This device may not cause harmful interference.

• This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 425

CLIMATE CONTROLS

The air conditioning and heating system is designed to

make you comfortable in all types of weather. This

system can be operated through either the controls on the

instrument panel or through the Uconnect® system dis-

play.

When the Uconnect® system is in different modes (Ra-

dio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger

temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the

display.

Manual Climate Controls Without Touchscreen —

If Equipped

The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning

system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary

dials and inner push knobs. These comfort controls can

be set to obtain desired interior conditions.

Manual Climate Controls

1—RECIRCULATIONControl 5—AirConditioning(A/C)

2—FrontBlowerControl 6—REARDEFROSTMode

3—MAXAirConditioning

(A/C)

7—MODEControl

4—TemperatureControl

426 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Front Blower Control

There are seven blower speeds. Use

this control to regulate the amount of

air forced through the system in any

mode you select. The blower speed

increases as you move the control

clockwise from the OFF position.

Temperature Control

Use this control to regulate the tem-

perature of the air inside the passenger

compartment. Rotating the knob coun-

terclockwise, from top center into the

blue area of the scale, indicates cooler

temperatures. Rotating the knob clock-

wise, into the red area, indicates

warmer temperatures.

Air Conditioning Operation

Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning

(A/C). A LED will illuminate when the A/C system is

engaged.

MAX A/C

For maximum cooling, when MAX A/C is selected the

A/C is turned on automatically and the air is

recirculated.

NOTE: A/C cannot be deselected when in MAX A/C

position. The LED will blink three times if the A/C

button is pushed. If your air conditioning performance

seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C

condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accu-

mulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water

spray from behind the radiator and through the con-

denser. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow

to the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 427

Mode Control (Air Direction)

Mode control allows you to choose

from several patterns of air distribu-

tion. You can select either a primary

mode, as identified by the symbols, or

a blend of two of these modes. The

closer the control is to a particular

mode, the more air distribution you

receive from that mode.

Panel Mode

Air is directed through the outlets in the instru-

ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct

airflow.

Bi-Level Mode

Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.

NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any

conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the

upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer

air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved

comfort during sunny but cool conditions.

Floor Mode

Air is directed through the floor outlets with a

small amount through the defrost and side win-

dow demist outlets.

428 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Mix Mode

Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side

window demist outlets. This setting works best in

cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the

windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort,

while reducing moisture on the windshield.

Defrost Mode

Air is directed through the windshield and side

window demist outlets. Use the DEFROST mode

with maximum blower and warm temperature settings

for best windshield and side window defrosting.

NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX

and DEFROST, or a blend of these modes even if the A/C

button is not pushed. This dehumidifies the air to help

dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these

modes only when necessary.

Recirculation Control

Push this button to choose between outside air intake or

recirculation of the air inside the vehicle. A LED will

illuminate when you are in Recirculation mode. Only use

the Recirculation mode to temporarily block out any

outside odors, smoke, or dust, and to cool the interior

rapidly upon initial start-up in very hot or humid

weather.

NOTE:

• If the RECIRCULATION button is pushed when the

system is in Defrost mode the Recirculation LED

indicator will flash three times and then turn off to

indicate Recirculation mode is not allowed.

• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make

the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.

Extended use of this mode is not recommended.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 429

• In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation

mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because

of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For maximum

defogging, select the outside air position.

• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-

ing the mode control selection by pushing the A/C

button.

Air Outlets

The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can

be adjusted for direction, and turned on or off to control

airflow.

NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center

instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear

seat passengers.

Economy Mode

If ECONOMY mode is desired, push the A/C button to

turn off the LED indicator and the A/C compressor.

Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired tem-

perature. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or

Floor modes.

Windshield Wiper De-icer — If Equipped

The windshield wiper de-icer is a heating element lo-

cated at the base of the windshield.

The windshield wiper de-icer operates automatically

once the following conditions are met:

• Activation By Front Defrost

The wiper de-icer activates automatically during a cold

weather manual start with full defrost, the blower speed

is greater than five, and when the ambient temperature

is below 40° F (4.4° C).

430 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Activation By Rear Defrost

The wiper de-icer activates automatically when the Rear

Defrost is operating and the ambient temperature is

below 40° F (4.4° C).

• Activation By Remote Start Operation

When the Remote Start is activated and the outside

ambient temperature is less than 40° F (4.4° C) the

windshield wiper de-icer is activated. Upon exiting Re-

mote Start, the climate control functions will resume their

previous operation except, if the de-icer is active, the

de-icer timer and operation will continue.

Stop/Start System — If Equipped

While in an Autostop, the Climate Controls system may

automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.

Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an

engine running condition.

Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen — If

Equipped

Buttons On Your Uconnect® Faceplate

The buttons on the faceplate are located below the

Uconnect® screen.

Uconnect® Manual Climate Controls — Buttons On The

Faceplate

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 431

Buttons On Your Uconnect® Touchscreen

The buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the

Uconnect® system screen.

Button Descriptions (Applies To Both The Buttons On

Your Faceplate And The Buttons On Your Touchscreen)

1. MAX A/C Button

Push and release to change the current setting, the

indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing

Uconnect® 5.0 Manual Temperature Controls — Buttons

On The Touchscreen

Uconnect® 8.4 Manual Temperature Controls — Buttons

On The Touchscreen

432 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to

switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator

will turn off.

2. A/C Button

Push and release to change the current setting, the

indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this

function again will cause the A/C operation to switch

into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.

3. Recirculation Button

Push and release to change the current setting, the

indicator illuminates when ON.

4. Front Defrost Button

Push and release to change the current airflow setting to

Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-

ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side

window demist outlets. When the defrost button is

selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode

with maximum temperature settings for best windshield

and side window defrosting and defogging.

5. Rear Defrost Button

Push and release this button to turn on the rear window

defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).

An indicator will illuminate when the rear window

defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically

turns off after 10 minutes. For each additional push of

this button, five additional minutes will be added to the

timer function.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 433

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to

the heating elements:

•

Use care when washing the inside of the rear

window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on

the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth

and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the

heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after

soaking with warm water.

• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive

window cleaners on the interior surface of the

window.

• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

6. Blower Control

Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air

forced through the climate system. There are seven

blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause

automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The

speeds can be selected using either the blower control

knob on the faceplate or buttons on the touchscreen as

follows:

Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate

The blower speed increases as you turn the blower

control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.

The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower

control knob counterclockwise.

Buttons On The Touchscreen

Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting

and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.

Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar

area between the icons.

434 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

7. Modes

The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air

comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,

and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:

• Panel Mode

Air comes from the outlets in the instrument

panel. Each of these outlets can be individually

adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the

center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and

down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There

is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off

or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.

• Bi-Level Mode

Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and

floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed

through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-

ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and

warmer air from the floor outlets.

• Floor Mode

Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount

of air is directed through the defrost and side

window demister outlets.

• Mix Mode

Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window

demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or

snowy conditions.

NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX

and DEFROST modes even if the A/C button is not

pushed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the wind-

shield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only

when necessary.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 435

8. Climate Control OFF Button

Push and release this button to turn the Climate Control

ON/OFF.

9. Temperature Control Down Button (Uconnect® 8.4)

Provides temperature control. Push the button on the

faceplate for cooler temperature settings or on the touch-

screen, press and slide the button on the touchscreen

temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the

touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.

10. Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect® 8.4)

Provides temperature control. Push the button on the

faceplate for warmer temperature settings or on the

touchscreen, press and slide the button on the touch-

screen temperature bar towards the red arrow button on

the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings.

11. Temperature Control (Uconnect® 5.0)

Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to

regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger

compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red

area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the tem-

perature bar into the blue area indicates cooler tempera-

tures.

Dual Zone Automatic Climate Controls With

Touchscreen — If Equipped

Buttons On Your Uconnect® Faceplate

The buttons on the faceplate are located below the

Uconnect® screen.

436 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Buttons On Your Uconnect® Touchscreen

The buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the

Uconnect® system screen.

Uconnect® Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On

Your Faceplate

Uconnect® 5.0 Automatic Temperature Controls —

Buttons On Your Touchscreen

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 437

Button Descriptions (Applies To Both The Buttons On

Your Faceplate And The Buttons On Your Touchscreen)

1. MAX A/C Button

Press and release to change the current setting, the

indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing

this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to

switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator

will turn off.

2. A/C Button

Press and release to change the current setting, the

indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this

function again will cause the A/C operation to switch

into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.

3. Recirculation Button

Press and release to change the current setting, the

indicator illuminates when ON.

4. AUTO Operation Button

Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by

adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing

this function will cause the system to switch between

manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic

Operation” for more information.

Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls —

Buttons On Your Touchscreen

438 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

5. Front Defrost Button

Press and release to change the current airflow setting to

Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-

ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side

window demist outlets. When the defrost button is

selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode

with maximum temperature settings for best windshield

and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing

this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual

mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate

system will return to the previous setting.

6. Rear Defrost Button

Press and release this button to turn on the rear window

defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).

An indicator will illuminate when the rear window

defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically

turns off after 10 minutes. For each additional press of

this button, five additional minutes will be added to the

timer function.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to

the heating elements:

•

Use care when washing the inside of the rear

window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on

the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth

and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the

heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after

soaking with warm water.

• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive

window cleaners on the interior surface of the

window.

• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 439

7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button

(Uconnect® 8.4 Only)

Provides the passenger with independent temperature

control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer

temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and

slide the button on the touchscreen temperature bar

towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for

warmer temperature settings.

NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will

automatically exit Sync.

8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button

(Uconnect® 8.4 Only)

Provides the passenger with independent temperature

control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler

temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and

slide the button on the touchscreen temperature bar

towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for

cooler temperature settings.

NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will

automatically exit Sync.

9. SYNC

Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the

Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated

when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize

the passenger temperature setting with the driver tem-

perature setting. Changing the passenger temperature

setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.

10. Blower Control

Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air

forced through the climate system. There are seven

blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause

automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The

440 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

speeds can be selected using either the blower control

knob on the faceplate or buttons on the touchscreen as

follows:

Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate

The blower speed increases as you turn the blower

control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.

The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower

control knob counterclockwise.

Button On The Touchscreen

Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting

and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.

Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar

area between the icons.

11. Modes

The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air

comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,

and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:

• Panel Mode

Air comes from the outlets in the instrument

panel. Each of these outlets can be individually

adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the

center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and

down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There

is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off

or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.

• Bi-Level Mode

Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and

floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed

through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-

ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and

warmer air from the floor outlets.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 441

• Floor Mode

Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount

of air is directed through the defrost and side

window demister outlets.

• Mix Mode

Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window

demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or

snowy conditions.

12. Climate Control OFF Button

Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control

ON/OFF.

13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button

(Uconnect® 8.4 Only)

Provides the driver with independent temperature con-

trol. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler tempera-

ture settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the

button on the touchscreen temperature bar towards the

blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler tempera-

ture settings.

NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically

adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same

time.

14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect®

8.4 Only)

Provides the driver with independent temperature con-

trol. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer tem-

perature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide

the button on the touchscreen temperature bar towards

the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer

temperature settings.

NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically

adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same

time.

442 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

15. Temperature Control (Uconnect® 5.0 Only)

Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to

regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger

compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red

area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the tem-

perature bar into the blue area indicates cooler tempera-

tures.

Climate Control Functions

A/C (Air Conditioning)

The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator

to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning

system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,

cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into

the cabin. For improved fuel economy, push the A/C

button to turn off the air conditioning and manually

adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make

sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.

NOTE:

• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,

select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if

needed.

• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than

expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo-

cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of

dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from

behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric

front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the

condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.

MAX A/C

MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-

mance.

Press to toggle between MAX A/C and the prior settings.

The button on the touchscreen illuminates when MAX

A/C is ON.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 443

In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be

adjusted to desired user settings. Pushing other settings

will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the

selected setting and cause MAX A/C to exit.

Recirculation

When outside air contains smoke, odors, or

high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,

you may wish to recirculate interior air by

pressing the Recirculation control button. The

recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is

selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the

Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.

NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may

lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation

feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen

greyed out). The Recirculation mode is not allowed in

Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation.

Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode

is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this

mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink

and then turn off.

Windshield Wiper De-icer — If Equipped

The windshield wiper de-icer is a heating element lo-

cated at the base of the windshield.

444 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The windshield wiper de-icer operates automatically

once the following conditions are met:

• Activation By Front Defrost

The wiper de-icer activates automatically during a cold

weather manual start with full defrost, the blower speed

is greater than five, and when the ambient temperature

is below 40° F (4.4° C).

• Activation By Rear Defrost

The wiper de-icer activates automatically when the Rear

Defrost is operating and the ambient temperature is

below 40° F (4.4° C).

• Activation By Remote Start Operation

When the Remote Start is activated and the outside

ambient temperature is less than 40° F (4.4° C) the

windshield wiper de-icer is activated. Upon exiting Re-

mote Start, the climate control functions will resume their

previous operation except, if the de-icer is active, the

de-icer timer and operation will continue.

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)

Automatic Operation

1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate or press the

“AUTO” button on the touchscreen.

2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the

system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas-

senger temperature buttons on the faceplate or but-

tons on the touchscreen. Once the desired temperature

is displayed, the system will achieve and automati-

cally maintain that comfort level.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 445

3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is

not necessary to change the temperature. You will

experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing

the system to function automatically.

NOTE:

• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.

The system automatically adjusts the temperature,

mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly

as possible.

• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric

units by selecting the Uconnect® customer-

programmable feature. Refer to the “Uconnect® Sys-

tem Settings” in this section of the manual.

To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic

mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain

on low until the engine warms up. The blower will

increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.

Manual Operation Override

The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,

air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con-

trol.

The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by

adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at

a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This

allows the front occupants to control the volume of air

circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.

The operator can also select the direction of the airflow

by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C

operation and Recirculation control can also be manually

selected in Manual operation.

NOTE: Each of these features operates independently

from each other. If any feature is controlled manually,

temperature control will continue to operate automati-

cally.

446 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Operating Tips

NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for

suggested control settings for various weather condi-

tions.

Summer Operation

The engine cooling system must be protected with a

high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-

sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.

A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)

coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material

Standard MS-12106 and 50% water is recommended.

Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your

Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.

Winter Operation

Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months

is not recommended because it may cause window

fogging.

Vacation Storage

Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service

(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air

conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the

fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure

adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility

of compressor damage when the system is started again.

Window Fogging

Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-

moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The

Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear

windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win-

dow fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower

speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side win-

dows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild

but rainy or humid weather.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 447

NOTE:

• Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long

periods, as fogging may occur.

• Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automati-

cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or

eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.

When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.

Outside Air Intake

Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the

windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves

collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they

enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In

Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,

slush, and snow.

A/C Air Filter

The climate control system filters outside air containing

dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be

totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in

“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instruc-

tions.

448 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 449

Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS

Introducing Uconnect®

Start using Uconnect® Voice Recognition with these

helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands

and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect® 5.0

or 8.4A/8.4AN system.

Key Features:

• 5” touchscreen

• Three buttons on either side of the display

Uconnect® 5.0 Uconnect® 8.4AN

450 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

If you see the

icon on your touchscreen, you have

the Uconnect® 8.4AN system. If not, you have a

Uconnect® 8.4A system.

Get Started

All you need to control your Uconnect® system with

your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.

1. Visit

UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device

and feature compatibility and to find phone pair-

ing instructions.

2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger con-

versations are examples of noise that may impact

recognition.

3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while

facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned

on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.

4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first

push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after

the beep, then say your Voice Command.

5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts

by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice

Command from current category.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 451

Basic Voice Commands

The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any

point while using your Uconnect® system.

Push the VR button

. After the beep, say$

• Cancel to stop a current voice session

• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands

• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again

Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice

recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-

screen.

Uconnect® Voice Command

1—PushToInitiateOrToAnswerAPhoneCall,SendOrRe-

ceive A Text

2 — For all radios: Push To Begin Radio or Media functions. For

8.4A/8.4AN only: Push to begin Navigation, Apps And Climate

Functions

3—PushToEndCall

452 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Uconnect® 5.0 Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 453

Radio

Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM

Satellite Radio® stations you would like to hear. (Sub-

scription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio® trial

required.)

Push the VR button

. After the beep, say$

• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM

• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1

TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or

want to learn a Voice Command, press the VR button

and say “Help.” The system will provide you

with a list of commands.

Uconnect® 5.0 Radio

454 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Media

Uconnect® offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth®

and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only

available for connected USB and iPod® devices. (Remote

CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)

Push the VR button

. After the beep, say one of the

following commands and follow the prompts to

switch your media source or choose an artist.

• Change source to Bluetooth®

• Change source to iPod®

• Change source to USB

• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play

song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical

TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all

of the music on your iPod® or USB device. Your Voice

Command must match exactly how the artist, album,

song and genre information is displayed.

Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Radio

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 455

Phone

Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy

with Uconnect®. When the Phonebook button is illumi-

nated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check

UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility

and pairing instructions.

Uconnect® 5.0 Media Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Media

456 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Push the Phone button

. After the beep, say one of

the following commands$

• Call John Smith

• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts

• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)

• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)

TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the

Phone button

and say “Call,” then pronounce the

name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When

a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say

“Call John Smith work.”

Uconnect® 5.0 Phone

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 457

Voice Text Reply

Uconnect® will announce incoming text messages. Push

the Phone button

and say Listen. (Must have com-

patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect® system.)

1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push

the Phone button

. After the beep, say: “Reply”

2. Listen to the Uconnect® prompts. After the beep,

repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the

system prompts.

PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES

Yes. Stuck in Traffic. See you later.

No.

Start without

me.

I’ll be Late.

Okay. Where are you? I will be <num-

ber> minutes

late.

Call me.

Are you there

yet?

I’ll call you

later.

I need

directions.

See you in

<number> of

minutes.

I’m on my way.

Can’t talk right

now.

I’m lost. Thanks.

Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Phone

458 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementa-

tion of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advan-

tage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit

Ucon-

nectPhone.com. Apple iPhone® iOS6 or later supports

reading incoming text messages only.

Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)

Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-

free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep

moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate

control.)

Push the VR button

. After the beep, say one of the

following commands:

• Set temperature to 70 degrees

• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees

• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees

TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to

adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice

Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or

steering wheel if equipped.

Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Climate

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 459

Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN)

The Uconnect® navigation feature helps you save time

and become more productive when you know exactly

how to get to where you want to go. (Navigation is

optional on the Uconnect® 8.4A system. See your dealer

to activate navigation at any time.)

1. To enter a destination, push the VR button

. After

the beep, say:

• For the 8.4A Uconnect® System, say: “Enter state.”

• For the 8.4AN Uconnect® System, say: “Navigate to

800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”

2. Then follow the system prompts.

TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button

After the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”

Uconnect® Access* (8.4A/8.4AN)

An included trial and/or subscription is required to take

advantage of the Uconnect® Access services in the next

section of this guide. To register with Uconnect® Access,

Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation

460 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get

started. Detailed registration instructions can be found

on the next page.

*Uconnect® Access is available only on equipped ve-

hicles purchased within the continental United States and

Alaska. Services can only be used where coverage is

available; see coverage map for details.

9-1-1 Call

Theft Alarm Notification

Remote Door Lock/Unlock

Stolen Vehicle Assistance

Remote Vehicle Start**

Remote Horn and Lights

Yelp® Search

Voice Texting

Roadside Assistance Call

Wi-Fi Hotspot***

**If vehicle is equipped.

***Extra charges apply.

1. Press the Apps button on the bottom of the 8.4-inch

touchscreen.

2. If a pop-up message appears, press Register or go to

the Favorite Apps menu and press Uconnect® Regis-

tration.

3. Read through the registration instructions. Enter and

confirm your personal email address. Then press

Send.

4. Check your personal inbox for an email from

Uconnect® Access.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 461

5. Click on the link inside the email within 72 hours and

complete the easy online registration process to create

a personal Mopar® Owner Connect account linked to

your vehicle.

Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN)

Securely link your mobile device to your vehicle with the

Uconnect® Access App. Once you have downloaded the

App, you may start your vehicle or lock it from virtually

any distance. (Vehicle must be properly equipped with

factory-installed Remote Start.)

Uconnect® Registration 8.4A/8.4AN

Mobile App

462 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Download the Uconnect® Access App to a compatible

Apple® or Android® mobile devices. All you need to do

is:

1. After registering with Uconnect® Access, log on to

your Mopar® Owner Connect account at

mop-

arownerconnect.com.

2. On the Dashboard page, enter your mobile phone

number to receive a link to download the App on your

mobile device. Or go to iTunes®, or Google Play, and

search for the Uconnect® Access App.

3. To activate the App, enter your Mopar Owner Connect

user name and password and log in. Your vehicle is

then connected to your mobile device.

Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN)

1. To send a message, push the Phone button

. After

the beep, say the following command: “Send mes-

sage to John Smith.”

2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the

message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect®

to process your message.

3. The Uconnect® system will repeat your message and

provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or

hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect®

what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy

with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”

You must be registered with Uconnect® Access and have

a compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your

voice to send a personalized text message.

TIP:

• Not compatible with iPhone®.

• Messages are limited to 140 characters.

• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be

illuminated to use the feature.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 463

Yelp® (8.4A/8.4AN)

Once registered with Uconnect® Access, you can use

your voice to search for the most popular places or things

around you.

1. Press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen.

2. Press the “All Apps” button on the touchscreen.

3. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.

4. Once the YELP® home screen appears on the touch-

screen, push the VR button

, then say: “YELP

search.”

5. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell

Uconnect® the place or business that you’d like

Uconnect® to find.

TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the

results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or

Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.

Yelp®

464 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SiriusXM Travel Link™ (8.4A/8.4AN)

Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,

check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?

SiriusXM Travel Link™ is a suite of services that brings a

wealth of information right to your Uconnect® 8.4AN

system. (Not available for 8.4A system.)

Push the VR button

. After the beep, say one of the

following commands:

• Show fuel prices

• Show 5 - day weather forecast

• Show extended weather

TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Com-

mand.

SiriusXM Travel Link™

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 465

Additional Information

and Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar

Owner Connect is a trademark of Chrysler Group LLC.

Android is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all

related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM

Radio Inc. Yelp, Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks

are registered trademarks of Yelp.

Uconnect® System Support:

•

DriveUconnect.com

• U.S. residents call 1-877-855-8400

• Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or

1-800-387-9983 (French)

Mon. – Fri., 7:00 am – 12:00 am, ET

Sat., 8:00 am – 10:00 pm, ET

Sun., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET

Uconnect® Access Services Support 1-855-792-4241.

Please have your Uconnect® Security PIN ready when

you call.

466 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

STARTING AND OPERATING

CONTENTS

! STARTING PROCEDURES — GASOLINE

ENGINES ............................472

▫ Normal Starting.......................472

▫ Extreme Cold Weather

(Below –20°F Or −29°C) ................473

▫ Extended Park Starting..................473

▫ If Engine Fails To Start .................474

▫ After Starting ........................475

! STOP/START SYSTEM — 3.2L ENGINE.......475

▫ Automatic Mode ......................475

▫ Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not

AUTOSTOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476

▫ To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode. .477

▫

To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System . .479

▫ To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System . .479

▫ System Malfunction ....................479

! ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .480

! AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ............481

▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock...............483

▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .483

▫ Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode ..............484

▫ Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission ........484

▫ Gear Ranges .........................486

! FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION .........494

▫ 1-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4X4) — If

Equipped ...........................494

▫ 2-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4X4) — If

Equipped ...........................495

▫ Shift Positions ........................497

▫ Shifting Procedures ....................498

▫ Rear Electronic Locker (E-Locker) System — If

Equipped ...........................501

! SELEC-TERRAIN™ .....................503

▫ Description ..........................503

! ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS ................505

! OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS ................505

▫ When To Use 4WD LOW Range ...........505

▫ Driving Through Water .................506

▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand ..........507

▫ Hill Climbing ........................507

▫ Traction Downhill .....................508

▫ After Driving Off-Road .................508

! POWER STEERING .....................509

! ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (EPB) .........511

▫ Auto Park Brake ......................515

▫ Safehold ...........................516

▫ Brake Service Mode ....................516

468 STARTING AND OPERATING

! BRAKE SYSTEM .......................518

! ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .519

▫ Anti-Lock Brake System ................519

▫ Traction Control System (TCS) ............521

▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) ...............522

▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ..........523

▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) .................523

▫ Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped . . .526

▫ Selec Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped . . . .530

▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..........533

▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And

ESC OFF Indicator Light ................538

▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ...............539

▫ Ready Alert Braking (RAB)...............540

▫ Rain Brake Support (RBS)................540

! TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION .............540

▫ Tire Markings ........................540

▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN)...........544

▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ..........546

▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........547

! TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION ........552

▫ Tire Pressure ........................552

▫ Tire Inflation Pressures .................553

▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .555

▫ Radial Ply Tires ......................555

▫ Tire Types ...........................556

STARTING AND OPERATING 469

▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped .............558

▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ...............558

▫ Tire Spinning ........................561

▫ Tread Wear Indicators ..................561

▫ Life Of Tire .........................562

▫ Replacement Tires .....................562

! TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .......564

! TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS .....566

! TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .568

▫ Base System .........................572

▫ Premium System — If Equipped ...........574

▫ General Information ...................579

! FUEL REQUIREMENTS ..................579

▫ Reformulated Gasoline .................580

▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............580

▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles .......581

▫ MMT In Gasoline .....................582

▫ Materials Added To Fuel ................582

▫ Fuel System Cautions...................583

▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings .............584

! FLEXIBLE FUEL (2.4L ENGINE ONLY) — IF

EQUIPPED ...........................584

▫ E-85 General Information ...............584

▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) ....................586

▫ Fuel Requirements ....................586

▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles

(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles .............587

470 STARTING AND OPERATING

▫ Starting ............................587

▫ Cruising Range .......................587

▫ Replacement Parts ....................588

▫ Maintenance ........................588

! ADDING FUEL ........................588

▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release.........590

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............590

! VEHICLE LOADING ....................591

▫ Certification Label ....................591

! TRAILER TOWING .....................593

▫ Common Towing Definitions .............593

▫ Trailer Hitch Classification ...............597

▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight

Ratings) ............................598

▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ..............599

▫ Towing Requirements ..................600

▫ Towing Tips .........................605

! RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND

MOTORHOME, ETC.) ...................606

▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .606

▫ Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)

Models ............................606

▫ Recreational Towing — 4X4 Models With 1-Speed

Power Transfer Unit....................607

▫ Recreational Towing — 4X4 Models With 2-Speed

Power Transfer Unit....................607

STARTING AND OPERATING 471

STARTING PROCEDURES — GASOLINE

ENGINES

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both

inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.

WARNING!

• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key

fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is

dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or

others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-

dren should be warned not to touch the parking

brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or

in a location accessible to children, and do not

leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with

Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN

mode. A child could operate power windows, other

controls, or move the vehicle.

Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or

PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any

driving range.

Normal Starting

NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine

is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator

pedal.

472 STARTING AND OPERATING

Cycle the ignition switch to the START position and

release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start

within 10 seconds, cycle the ignition switch to the

LOCK/OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat

the “Normal Starting” procedure.

Tip Start Feature

Cycle the ignition switch to START position and release it

as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will

continue to run, but will automatically disengage itself

when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the

starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this

occurs, cycle the ignition switch to the LOCK position,

wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”

procedure.

Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)

To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of

an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-

able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.

Extended Park Starting

NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle

has not been started or driven for at least 35 days.

1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery

to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.

2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it

when the engine starts.

3. If the engine fails to start within ten seconds, cycle the

ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait five

seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the

Extended Park Starting procedure.

4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow

the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat

the procedure.

STARTING AND OPERATING 473

CAUTION!

To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously

crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time.

Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.

If Engine Fails To Start

WARNING!

• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the

throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start

the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing

serious personal injury.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it

started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-

mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel

could enter the catalytic converter and once the

engine has started, ignite and damage the converter

and vehicle.

• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster

cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster

battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type

of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer

to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergen-

cies” for further information.

474 STARTING AND OPERATING

With Tip Start

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the

#Normal Starting#, “Extreme Cold Weather# and #Ex-

tended Park Starting# procedures, it may be flooded. To

clear any excess fuel, press the accelerator pedal all the

way to the floor and hold it. Then, cycle the ignition

switch to the START position and release it as soon as the

starter engages. The starter motor will disengage auto-

matically in 10 seconds. Once this occurs, release the

accelerator pedal, cycle the ignition to the LOCK posi-

tion, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal

Starting” procedure.

CAUTION!

To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15

seconds before trying again.

After Starting

The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will

decrease as the engine warms up.

STOP/START SYSTEM — 3.2L ENGINE

The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce emis-

sions. The system will stop the engine automatically

during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met.

Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the accelerator

pedal will automatically re-start the engine.

Automatic Mode

The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal

customer engine start. At that time, the system will go

into STOP/START READY and if all other conditions are

met, can go into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE

“Autostop” mode.

STARTING AND OPERATING 475

To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must

Occur:

• The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A

STOP/START READY message will be displayed in

the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or

Driver Information Display (DID) within the Stop/

Start section. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)”

in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further

information.

• The vehicle must be completely stopped.

• The shifter must be in a forward gear and the brake

pedal depressed.

The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to

the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illumi-

nate indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings

will be maintained upon return to an engine running

condition.

Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not

AUTOSTOP

Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many

safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.

Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/

Start system may be viewed in the EVIC/DID Stop/Start

Screen. In the following situations the engine will not

stop:

• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.

• Driver’s door is not closed.

• Battery temperature is too warm or cold.

476 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Battery charge is low.

• The vehicle is on a steep grade.

• Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an accept-

able cabin temperature has not been achieved.

• HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower

speed.

• HVAC set to MAX A/C.

• Engine has not reached normal operating temperature.

• The transmission is not in a forward gear.

• Hood is open.

• Vehicle is in 4LO transfer case mode.

• Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.

Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop Include:

• Fuel level.

• Accelerator pedal input.

• Engine temp too high.

• 5 MPH threshold not achieved from previous AU-

TOSTOP.

• Steering angle beyond threshold.

• ACC is on and speed is set.

It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several

times without the STOP/START system going into a

STOP/START READY state under more extreme condi-

tions of the items listed above.

To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode

While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the

brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is depressed.

The transmission will automatically re-engage upon en-

gine restart.

STARTING AND OPERATING 477

Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Auto-

matically While In Autostop Mode:

• The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE.

• To maintain cabin temperature comfort.

• HVAC is set to full defrost mode.

• HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually

adjusted.

• Battery voltage drops too low.

• Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake pedal

applications).

• STOP/START OFF switch is pressed.

• A STOP/START system error occurs.

• 4WD system is put into 4LO mode.

Conditions That Force An Application Of The Electric

Park Brake While In Autostop Mode:

• The drivers door is open and brake pedal released.

• The drivers door is open and the drivers seat belt is

unbuckled.

• The engine hood has been opened.

• A STOP/START system error occurs.

If the Electric Park Brake is applied with the engine off,

the engine may require a manual restart and the electric

park brake may require a manual release (depress brake

pedal and press Electric Park Brake switch). Refer to

“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or

“Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

478 STARTING AND OPERATING

To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System

1. Press the STOP/START Off switch (located on the

switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.

2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or

Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Infor-

mation Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your In-

strument Panel” for further information.

3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the STOP/

START system) the engine will not be stopped.

4. The STOP/START system will reset itself back to an

ON condition every time the ignition is turned off and

back on.

To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System

Press the STOP/START Off switch (located on the switch

bank). The light on the switch will turn off.

System Malfunction

If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START system, the

system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE

STOP/START SYSTEM” message will appear in the

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver

Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle

STOP/START OFF Switch

STARTING AND OPERATING 479

Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Dis-

play (DID)“ in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”

for further information.

If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message ap-

pears in the EVIC, have the system checked by your

authorized dealer.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED

The engine block heater warms the engine and permits

quicker starts in cold weather.

Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet

with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.

For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the engine

block heater is recommended. For ambient temperatures

below -20°F (-29°C), the engine block heater is required.

The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood,

behind to the driver’s side headlamp. Follow the steps

below to properly use the engine block heater:

1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the driv-

er’s side headlamp).

2. Undo the Velcro strap that secures the heater cord in

place.

3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it into

a grounded, three-wire extension cord.

4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to the

Velcro strap and properly stow away behind the

driver’s side headlamp.

480 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:

• The engine block heater cord is a factory installed

option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords

are available from your authorized MOPAR® dealer.

• The engine block heater will require 110 Volts AC and

6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.

• The engine block heater must be plugged in at least

one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the

engine.

WARNING!

Remember to disconnect the engine block heater

cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt

electrical cord could cause electrocution.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

WARNING!

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL

if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If

your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the

vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-

verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit

someone or something. Only shift into gear when

the engine is idling normally and your foot is

firmly pressing the brake pedal.

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 481

WARNING! (Continued)

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure

those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,

you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is

running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the

parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,

turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When

the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal)

position, the transmission is locked in PARK, se-

curing the vehicle against unwanted movement.

• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the

ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob

from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to

be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Children should be

warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal

or the transmission gear selector.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or

in a location accessible to children), and do not

leave the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with

Keyless Enter-N-Go™) in the ACC or ON/RUN

position. A child could operate power windows,

other controls, or move the vehicle.

482 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-

ing precautions are not observed:

• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after

the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-

TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle

speed.

• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot

is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while

shifting out of PARK.

Key Ignition Park Interlock

This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-

lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK

before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/

OFF (key removal) position. The key fob can only be

removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the

LOCK/OFF position, and the transmission is locked in

PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the LOCK/OFF

position.

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System

This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift

Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK

unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission

out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the

ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake

pedal must be pressed.

The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from

NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is

stopped or moving at low speeds.

STARTING AND OPERATING 483

Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode

The Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improve the vehi-

cle’s overall fuel economy during normal driving condi-

tions. To activate ECO mode press the “Controls” button

on the touchscreen and then press the “ECO” button on

the touchscreen. When ECO mode is engaged a green

light in the center stack of the instrument panel will be

illuminated and a green ECO light will also illuminate in

the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or

Driver Information Display (DID). In 4WD models, ECO

mode is only active in ’4WD Auto’ driving mode. If you

switch to another driving mode the ECO button will turn

grey and the ECO light in the instrument panel will

disappear indicating it is no longer in ECO mode. It will

automatically re-enable ECO mode when you switch

back into 4WD Auto.

Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission

The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both

beside the shift lever and in the Electronic Vehicle Infor-

mation Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display

(DID). To select a gear range, press the lock button on the

shift lever and move the lever rearward or forward. You

must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission

out of PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or

REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low

speeds (refer to #Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock Sys-

tem# in this section). Select the DRIVE range for normal

driving.

The electronically-controlled transmission provides a

precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are

self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new

vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal

condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few

hundred miles (kilometers).

484 STARTING AND OPERATING

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the

accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.

Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when

shifting between these gears.

The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEU-

TRAL, DRIVE, and Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift

positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the ERS

shift control (refer to #Electronic Range Select (ERS)

Operation# in this section for further information). Mov-

ing the shift lever into the ERS (-/+) position (beside the

DRIVE position) activates ERS mode, displays the cur-

rent gear in the instrument cluster, and prevents auto-

matic upshifts beyond this gear. In ERS mode, toggling

the shift lever forward (-) or rearward (+) will change the

highest available gear.

NOTE: If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK,

REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed for-

ward) it is probably in the ERS (+/-) position (beside the

DRIVE position). In ERS mode, the transmission gear

limit (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Move the shift lever to the right (into the DRIVE [D]

position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.

STARTING AND OPERATING 485

Gear Ranges

DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or

NEUTRAL into another gear range.

NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to

allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.

This is especially important when the engine is cold.

PARK (P)

This range supplements the parking brake by locking the

transmission. The engine can be started in this range.

Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in

motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the

vehicle in this range.

When parking on a level surface, you may shift the

transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking

brake.

Shift Lever

486 STARTING AND OPERATING

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before

shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on

the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi-

cult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added

precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a

downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill

grade.

WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the

parking brake. Always apply the parking brake

fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-

ment and possible injury or damage.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others

if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to

move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake

pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in

PARK before leaving the vehicle.

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL

if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If

your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the

vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-

verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit

someone or something. Only shift into gear when

the engine is idling normally and your foot is

firmly pressing the brake pedal.

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 487

WARNING! (Continued)

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure

those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,

you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is

running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the

parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,

turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When

the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal)

position, the transmission is locked in PARK, se-

curing the vehicle against unwanted movement.

• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the

ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob

from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to

be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Children should be

warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal

or the shift lever.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or

in a location accessible to children), and do not

leave the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with

Keyless Enter-N-Go™) in the ACC or ON/RUN

position. A child could operate power windows,

other controls, or move the vehicle.

488 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you

must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF

position to the ON/RUN position, and also press

the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift

lever could result.

• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from

PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this

can damage the drivetrain.

The following indicators should be used to ensure that

you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-

tion:

• When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the

shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way

forward until it stops and is fully seated.

• Look at the transmission gear position display and

verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).

• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever

will not move out of PARK.

REVERSE (R)

This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into

REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete

stop.

NEUTRAL (N)

Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged

periods with the engine running. The engine may be

started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift

the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 489

WARNING!

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the

ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe

practices that limit your response to changing traffic

or road conditions. You might lose control of the

vehicle and have a collision.

CAUTION!

Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other

reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause

severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational

Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A

Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”

for further information.

DRIVE (D)

This range should be used for most city and highway

driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-

shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission

automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The

DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-

tics under all normal operating conditions.

When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as

when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-

tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or

while towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range

Select (ERS) shift control (refer to #Electronic Range Select

(ERS) Operation# in this section for further information)

to select a lower gear range. Under these conditions,

using a lower gear range will improve performance and

extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting

and heat buildup.

490 STARTING AND OPERATING

If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat-

ing limits, the transmission controller may modify the

transmission shift schedule, reduce engine torque,

and/or expand the range of torque converter clutch

engagement. This is done to prevent transmission dam-

age due to overheating.

If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the “Trans-

mission Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and

the transmission may operate differently until the trans-

mission cools down.

During cold temperatures, transmission operation may

be modified depending on engine and transmission

temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im-

proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to

achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque

converter clutch, and shifts into 8th or 9th gear, are

inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the

“Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section).

Normal operation will resume once the transmission

temperature has risen to a suitable level.

SPORT — IF EQUIPPED

This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift

schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are in-

creased to make full use of available engine power.

SPORT mode is activated using the rotary switch on the

center console. Refer to #Selec-Terrain# in this section for

further information.

Transmission Limp Home Mode

Transmission function is monitored electronically for

abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could

result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home

Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains

in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is

selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue

STARTING AND OPERATING 491

to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be

illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be

driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam-

aging the transmission.

In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission

can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the

following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Shift the transmission into PARK.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.

4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.

5. Restart the engine.

6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no

longer detected, the transmission will return to normal

operation.

NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-

mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your

earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has

diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could

recur. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized

dealer service is required.

Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation

The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the

driver to limit the highest available gear. For example, if

you shift the transmission into 5 (fifth gear), the trans-

mission will not shift above fifth gear, but will shift

through the lower gears normally.

You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any

vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE

position, the transmission will operate automatically,

shifting between all available gears.

492 STARTING AND OPERATING

Moving the shift lever to the ERS position (beside

DRIVE) will activate ERS mode, display the current gear

in the instrument cluster, and maintain that gear as the

top available gear. Once in ERS mode, moving the shift

lever forward (-) or rearward (+) will change the top

available gear.

To exit ERS mode, simply return the shift lever to the

DRIVE position.

WARNING!

Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a

slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their

grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or

personal injury.

NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum

deceleration (engine braking), move the shift lever into

the ERS position, then simply press and hold it forward

(-). The transmission will shift to the range from which

the vehicle can best be slowed down.

Torque Converter Clutch

A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been

included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.

A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-

cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly

different feeling or response during normal operation in

the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during

some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.

STARTING AND OPERATING 493

NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until

the transmission fluid is warm (usually after 1 to 3 miles

[2 to 5 km] of driving). Because the engine speed is higher

when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may

seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when

cold, this is normal. The torque converter clutch will

function normally once the transmission is sufficiently

warm.

FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION

1-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4X4) — If Equipped

This feature provides on-demand four-wheel drive (4X4).

The system is automatic with no driver inputs or addi-

tional driving skills required. Under normal driving

conditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction.

If the front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted

automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front

wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the

rear wheels.

1-Speed 4X4 Switch

494 STARTING AND OPERATING

Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle

input (where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be

sent to the rear in a pre-emptive effort to improve vehicle

launch and performance characteristics.

CAUTION!

All wheels must have the same size and type tires.

Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire

size may cause failure of the power transfer unit.

2-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4X4) — If Equipped

2-Speed 4x4 Switch

STARTING AND OPERATING 495

The Four-Wheel Drive is fully automatic in the normal

driving mode. The Selec-Terrain buttons provide three

selectable mode positions:

• 4WD LOW

• REAR LOCK (If Equipped)

• NEUTRAL

When additional traction is required, the 4WD LOW

range position can be used to provide an additional gear

reduction which allows for increased torque to be deliv-

ered to both the front and rear wheels. 4WD LOW is

intended for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in

4WD LOW on dry, hard-surfaced roads may cause in-

creased tire wear and damage to driveline components.

When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine

speed is approximately three times that of the normal

driving mode at a given road speed. Take care not to

overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph

(40 km/h).

Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends

on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each

wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and

cause damage to the driveline components.

2-Speed 4x4 Switch (with Rear Lock)

496 STARTING AND OPERATING

Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,

there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping

speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.

Shift Positions

For additional information on the appropriate use of each

4WD system mode position, see the information below:

NEUTRAL

This range disengages the driveline from the powertrain.

It is to be used for flat towing behind another vehicle.

Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting and Operat-

ing” for further information.

WARNING!

You or others could be injured or killed if you leave

the vehicle unattended with the power transfer unit

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully

engaging the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N)

position disengages both the front and rear drive

shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle

to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The

parking brake should always be applied when the

driver is not in the vehicle.

4WD LOW

This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It provides

an additional gear reduction which allows for increased

torque to be delivered to both the front and rear wheels

while providing maximum pulling power for loose,

slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph

(40 km/h).

STARTING AND OPERATING 497

NOTE: Refer to “Selec-Terrain® – If Equipped” for fur-

ther information on the various positions and their

intended usages.

Shifting Procedures

Shifting Into 4X4 LOW

With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the

ignition switch in the ON position and the engine run-

ning, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL, and press

the “4WD LOW” button once. The “4WD LOW” indica-

tor light in the instrument cluster will begin to flash and

remain on solid when the shift is complete.

Selec-Terrain Switch

498 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met a mes-

sage will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) with

instructions on how to complete the requested shift.

Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/

Driver Information Display (DID) in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Shifting Out Of 4X4 LOW

With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the

ignition switch in the ON position and the engine run-

ning, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL, and press

the “4WD LOW” button once. The “4WD LOW” indica-

tor light in the instrument cluster will flash and go out

when the shift is complete.

NOTE:

• If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a message

will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) with

instructions on how to complete the requested shift.

Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) in “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-

tion.

• Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with the

vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may

occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being prop-

erly aligned. Several attempts may be required for

clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur.

The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 0 to

3 mph (0 to 5 km/h). If the vehicle is moving faster

than 3 mph (5 km/h), the 4WD system will not allow

the shift.

STARTING AND OPERATING 499

NEUTRAL Shift Procedure

WARNING!

You or others could be injured or killed if you leave

the vehicle unattended with the power transfer unit

in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully

engaging the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N)

position disengages both the front and rear drive

shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle

to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The

parking brake should always be applied when the

driver is not in the vehicle.

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop and shift the

transmission to PARK.

2. Turn the engine OFF.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but

do not start the engine.

4. Press and hold the brake pedal.

5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold

the recessed power transfer unit NEUTRAL (N) button

(located by the selector switch) for four seconds. The

light behind the NEUTRAL (N) symbol will blink,

indicating shift in progress. The light will stop blink-

ing (stay on solid) when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is

complete.

500 STARTING AND OPERATING

7. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N)

light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.

8. Start the engine.

9. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.

10. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure

that there is no vehicle movement.

11. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.

12. Apply the parking brake.

13. Shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine

OFF, and remove the key fob.

Repeat steps 1-7 to shift out of NEUTRAL.

Rear Electronic Locker (E-Locker) System — If

Equipped

The Rear E-Locker System features a mechanical locking

rear differential to provide better traction in the 4WD

LOW position. The “REAR LOCK” button is on the

Selec-Terrain Knob.

Neutral Switch

STARTING AND OPERATING 501

Activating The Rear E-Locker

To activate the Rear E-Locker System, the following

conditions must be met:

1. The 4WD system must be in 4WD LOW.

2. The ignition switch in the ON position and the engine

running.

3. Vehicle speed must be below 15 MPH (24 km/h).

4. To engage Rear E-Locker, press the REAR LOCK

button once.

Deactivating The Rear E-Locker System

To deactivate the Rear E-Locker System, the following

conditions must be met:

1. Rear E-Locker must be engaged, and the REAR LOCK

indicator light on.

2. The ignition switch in the ON position and the engine

running.

3. To disengage Rear E-Locker, press the REAR LOCK

button once.

NOTE:

• It may also be necessary to drive slowly steering back

and forth to complete engagement and disengagement

of the E-Locker.

• When engaging Rear E-Locker, the indicator lights in

the instrument cluster and on the REAR LOCK button

will begin to flash. When the shift is complete the

REAR LOCK indicator lights will remain on.

• When disengaging Rear E-Locker, the indicator lights

in the instrument cluster and on the REAR LOCK

button will begin to flash. When the shift is complete

the REAR LOCK indicator lights will remain off.

502 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Shifting into or out of Rear E-Locker is possible with

the vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty

may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being

properly aligned. Several attempts may be required for

clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur.

The preferred method is for the vehicle to be rolling,

below 15 MPH (24 km/h), while including right and

left steering maneuvers to allow for the clutch teeth to

align.

• The Rear E-Locker System must be disengaged prior to

taking the vehicle out of 4WD LOW range. If 4WD

LOW shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a mes-

sage will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) with

instructions on how to complete the requested shift.

SELEC-TERRAIN™

Description

Selec-Terrain™ combines the capabilities of the vehicle

control systems, along with driver input, to provide the

best performance for all terrains.

Rotate the Selec-Terrain™ knob to select the desired mode.

Selec-Terrain™ Switch

STARTING AND OPERATING 503

Selec-Terrain™ offers the following modes:

• Auto — Fully automatic full time four-wheel drive

operation can be used on and off road. Balances

traction with seamless steering feel to provide im-

proved handling and acceleration over two-wheel

drive vehicles.

• Snow — Tuning set for additional stability in inclem-

ent weather. Use on and off road on loose traction

surfaces such as snow. When in SNOW mode (depend-

ing on certain operating conditions), the transmission

may use second gear (rather than first gear) during

launches, to minimize wheel slippage.

• Sport — This mode alters the transmission’s automatic

shift schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are

increased to make full use of available engine power.

NOTE: SPORT mode is not available when 4WD LOW is

selected.

• Sand/Mud — Off road calibration for use on low

traction surfaces such as mud, sand, or wet grass.

Driveline is maximized for traction. Some binding may

be felt on less forgiving surfaces. The electronic brake

controls are set to limit traction control management of

throttle and wheel spin.

• Rock — Off-road calibration only available in 4WD

LOW range. Traction based tuning with improved

steer-ability for use on high traction off-road surfaces.

Use for low speed obstacles such as large rocks, deep

ruts, etc.

NOTE:

• Rock mode is only available on the vehicles equipped

with the Off-Road package.

•

Activate the Hill Descent Control or Selec Speed Control

for steep downhill control. See “Electronic Brake Control

System” in this section for further information.

504 STARTING AND OPERATING

Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) Display

Messages

When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will

appear in the EVIC/DID display. Refer to “Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information

Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument

Panel” for further information.

ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS

Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a

narrower track to make them capable of performing in a

wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design

characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than

ordinary cars.

An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better

view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.

They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as

conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than

low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto-

rily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp

turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this

type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in

loss of control or vehicle rollover.

OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS

When To Use 4WD LOW Range

When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional

traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain,

ascending or descending steep hills, and to increase

low-speed pulling power (refer to “All Wheel Drive and

Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in this section for further

details). This range should be limited to extreme situa-

tions such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additional

low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in

excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in

4WD LOW range.

STARTING AND OPERATING 505

Driving Through Water

Although your vehicle is capable of driving through

water, there are a number of precautions that must be

considered before entering the water:

CAUTION!

When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph

(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering

as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driv-

ing through water may cause damage that may not be

covered by the new vehicle limited warranty.

Driving through water more than a few inches/

centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure

safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must

drive through water, try to determine the depth and the

bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to

entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady

controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water

to minimize wave effects.

Flowing Water

If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm

run-off) avoid crossing until the water level recedes

and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross

flowing-water, avoid depths in excess of 9 inches (22 cm).

The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your

vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s)

that are downstream of your entry point to allow for

drifting.

Standing Water

Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 inches

(51 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize

wave effects. Maximum speed in 20 inches (51 cm) of

water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

506 STARTING AND OPERATING

Maintenance

After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle

fluids and lubricants (engine, transmission, Power Trans-

fer Unit and Rear Drive Module) to assure they have not

been contaminated. Contaminated fluids and lubricants

(milky, foamy in appearance) should be flushed/changed

as soon as possible to prevent component damage.

Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand

In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional

control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low

gear and shift the 4WD system to the appropriate terrain

mode, using 4WD LOW if necessary. Refer to “Four-

Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and Operating” for

further information. Do not shift to a lower gear than

necessary to maintain headway. Over-revving the engine

can spin the wheels and traction will be lost.

Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads be-

cause engine braking may cause skidding and loss of

control.

Hill Climbing

NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the

conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.

Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a

lower gear and shift the 4WD System to 4WD LOW. Use

first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.

If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a

steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and

immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine and

shift to REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing the

compression braking of the engine to help regulate your

speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed,

apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the

tires.

STARTING AND OPERATING 507

WARNING!

If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot

make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never

attempt to turn around. To do so may result in

tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back straight

down a hill in REVERSE gear carefully. Never back

down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake.

Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill - drive

straight up or down.

If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a

hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by

turning the front wheels slowly left and right. This may

provide a fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually

provide traction to complete the climb.

Traction Downhill

Shift the transmission into a low gear and the 4WD

System to 4WD LOW range or Select Hill Descent

Control if equipped (refer to #Electronic Brake Control

System# in this section for further information). Let the

vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four wheels

turning against engine compression drag. This will per-

mit you to control the vehicle speed and direction.

When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking

can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid

repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis-

sion whenever possible.

After Driving Off-Road

Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than

does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is

always a good idea to check for damage. That way you

can get any problems taken care of right away and have

your vehicle ready when you need it.

508 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.

Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and

exhaust system for damage.

• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as

required.

• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on

the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-

pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the

values specified in the Service Manual.

• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These

things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage

to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and

propeller shafts.

• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or

similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake

rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected

and cleaned as soon as possible.

WARNING!

Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause

excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might

not have full braking power when you need it to

prevent a collision. If you have been operating your

vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked

and cleaned as necessary.

• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in

mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for

impacted material. Impacted material can cause a

wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will

correct the situation.

POWER STEERING

The electric power steering system will give you good

vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability

in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide

STARTING AND OPERATING 509

light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If

the electric steering system experiences a fault that

reduces assist or prevents the vehicle from providing

assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle

manually.

WARNING!

Continued operation with reduced assist could pose

a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be

obtained as soon as possible.

If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING# OR

#POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE

SYSTEM” message and a steering wheel icon

are displayed on the EVIC/DID screen, it indi-

cates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for

service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering

assistance. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information

(EVIC) or #Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM HOT - PERFOR-

MANCE MAY BE LIMITED” message and an icon are

displayed on the EVIC/DID screen, it indicates that

extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred, which

caused an over temperature condition in the power

steering system. You will lose power steering assistance

momentarily until the over temperature condition no

longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull

over and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light

turns off. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information

(EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

510 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:

• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer

operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.

Under these conditions there will be a substantial

increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and

during parking maneuvers.

• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for

service.

ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (EPB)

Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Parking Brake

System (EPB) that offers simple operation, and some

additional features that make the parking brake more

convenient and useful.

The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the

vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the

vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is applied.

Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.

You can engage the parking brake in two ways;

• Manually, by applying the park brake switch.

• Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake fea-

ture in the customer programmable features section of

the Uconnect® settings.

The parking brake switch is located in the center console.

STARTING AND OPERATING 511

To apply the parking brake manually, pull up on the

switch momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring

sound from the back of the vehicle while the parking

brake engages. Once the parking brake is fully engaged,

the BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and

an indicator on the switch will illuminate. If your foot is

on the brake pedal while you apply the parking brake,

you may notice a small amount of brake pedal move-

ment. The park brake can be applied even when the

ignition switch is OFF but the BRAKE warning lamp will

not illuminate, however, it can only be released when the

ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.

NOTE: The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB

switch is held for longer than 20 seconds in either the

released or applied position. The light will extinguish

upon releasing the switch.

If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking

brake will automatically engage whenever the transmis-

sion is placed into PARK, or with a manual transmission,

when the ignition switch is turned OFF. If your foot is on

the brake pedal, you may notice a small amount of brake

pedal movement while the parking brake is engaging.

Electric Parking Brake Switch

512 STARTING AND OPERATING

The parking brake will release automatically when the

ignition switch is ON, the transmission is in Drive or

Reverse, the driver seat belt is buckled, and an attempt is

made to drive away.

To release the park brake manually, the ignition switch

must be in the ON/RUN position. Put your foot on the

brake pedal, then push the parking brake switch down

momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from

the back of the car while the parking brake disengages.

You may also notice a small amount of movement in the

brake pedal. Once the parking brake is fully disengaged,

The BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and

the LED indicator on the switch will extinguish.

NOTE: When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the

front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and

away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the

parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK,

otherwise the load on the transmission locking mecha-

nism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of

PARK. The parking brake should always be applied

whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the

parking brake. Always apply the parking brake

fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-

ment and possible injury or damage.

• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key

Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 513

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to

be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Children should be

warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal

or the shift lever.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or

in a location accessible to children, and do not

leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-

Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could

operate power windows, other controls, or move

the vehicle.

• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged

before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake

failure and a collision.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-

ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or

injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in

PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll

and cause damage or injury.

CAUTION!

If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with

the parking brake released, a brake system malfunc-

tion is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by

an authorized dealer immediately.

If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to

engage the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion,

maintain upward pressure on the electric park brake

switch for as long as engagement is desired. The Brake

warning lamp will illuminate, and a continuous chime

514 STARTING AND OPERATING

will sound. The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated

automatically while the vehicle remains in motion.

To disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is in

motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a

complete stop using the parking brake, when the vehicle

reaches approximately 3 mph, (5 km/h) the parking

brake will remain engaged.

WARNING!

Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged,

or repeated use of the parking brake to slow the

vehicle may cause serious damage to the brake sys-

tem.

In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the Electric Park

Brake system, a yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate.

This may be accompanied by the Brake warning lamp

flashing. In this event, urgent service of the electric park

brake system is required. Do not rely on the parking

brake to hold the vehicle stationary.

Auto Park Brake

The electric park brake can be programmed to be applied

automatically whenever the vehicle is at a standstill and

the automatic transmission is placed in PARK, or with a

manual transmission, whenever the ignition switch is

turned “OFF”. Auto Park Brake is enabled and disabled

by customer selection through the customer program-

mable features section of the Uconnect® Settings.

Any single auto park brake application can be bypassed

by pressing the EPB switch to the release position while

the transmission is placed in PARK.

STARTING AND OPERATING 515

Safehold

Safehold is a safety feature of the Electric Park Brake

System that will engage the park brake automatically if

the vehicle is left unsecured while the ignition switch is

in RUN.

For automatic transmissions, the park brake will auto-

matically engage if all of the following conditions are

met:

• The vehicle is at a standstill

• There is no attempt to depress the brake pedal or

accelerator pedal

• The seat belt is unbuckled

• The driver door is open

For manual transmissions, the park brake will automati-

cally engage if all of the following conditions are met:

• The vehicle is at a standstill

• There is no attempt to depress the brake pedal or

accelerator pedal

• The clutch pedal is not pressed

• The seat belt is unbuckled

• The driver door is open

Safehold can be temporarily bypassed by pressing the

Electric Park Brake Switch while the driver door is open.

Once manually bypassed, Safehold will be enabled again

once the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition

is turned to the OFF position and back to ON again.

Brake Service Mode

We recommend having your brakes serviced by your

authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for

which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.

You should only enter Brake Service Mode during brake

service.

516 STARTING AND OPERATING

When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for

you or your technician to push the rear piston into the

rear caliper bore. With the electric parking brake system,

this can only be done after retracting the Electric Parking

Brake actuator. Fortunately, actuator retraction can be

done easily by entering the Brake Service Mode through

the Uconnect® Settings in your vehicle. This menu based

system will guide you through the steps necessary to

retract the EPB actuator in order to perform rear brake

service.

Service Mode has requirements that must be met in order

to be activated:

• The vehicle must be at a standstill.

• The parking brake must be unapplied.

• The transmission must be in Park or Neutral.

While in service mode, the Electric Parking Brake fault lamp

will flash continuously while the ignition switch is ON.

When brake service work is complete, the following steps

must be followed to reset the parking brake system to

normal operation:

• Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.

• Press the brake pedal with moderate force.

• Apply the Electric Parking Brake Switch.

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a

motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which

you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If

you have any doubt about your ability to perform a

service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-

chanic.

STARTING AND OPERATING 517

BRAKE SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic

brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic

systems loses normal capability, the remaining

system will still function. However, there will

be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be

evident by increased pedal travel during application and

greater pedal force required to slow or stop the vehicle. In

addition, if the malfunction is caused by a leak in the

hydraulic system, the “Brake Warning Light” will turn on

as the brake fluid level drops in the master cylinder.

In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,

repeated brake applications with the engine OFF) the

brakes will still function. However, the effort required to

brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required

with the power system operating.

WARNING!

• Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and

possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting

or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnor-

mally high brake temperatures, excessive lining

wear, and possible brake damage. You would not

have your full braking capacity in an emergency.

• Driving a vehicle with the “Brake Warning Light”

on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking

performance or vehicle stability during braking

may occur. It will take you longer to stop the

vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control.

You could have a collision. Have the vehicle

checked immediately.

518 STARTING AND OPERATING

ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic

brake control system commonly referred to as ESC. This

system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction

Control System (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill

Start Assist (HSA), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), and

Electronic Stability Control (ESC). These systems work

together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in

various driving conditions.

Your vehicle is also equipped with Trailer Sway Control

(TSC), Ready Alert Braking (RAB) and Rain Brake Sup-

port (RBS). Further, all vehicles equipped with a two-

speed power transfer unit have Hill Descent Control

(HDC) and some vehicles may also be equipped with

Selec Speed Control (SSC).

Anti-Lock Brake System

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the

driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse

braking conditions. The system operates with a separate

computer to modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent

wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery

surfaces.

All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and

type, and tires must be properly inflated, to produce

accurate signals for the computer.

WARNING!

Significant over or under-inflation of tires or mixing

sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss

of braking effectiveness.

The ABS conducts a low-speed self-test at about 12 mph

(20 km/h). If you have your foot lightly on the brake

while this test is occurring, you may feel slight pedal

movement. The movement can be more apparent on ice

and snow. This is normal.

STARTING AND OPERATING 519

The ABS pump motor runs during the self-test at 12 mph

(20 km/h) and during an ABS stop. The pump motor

makes a low humming noise during operation, which is

normal.

WARNING!

• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish

their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.

Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just

press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to

slow down or stop.

• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-

ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase

braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded

by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or

the traction afforded.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those

resulting from excessive speed in turns, following

another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.

• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must

never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous

manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or

the safety of others.

CAUTION!

The ABS is subject to possible detrimental effects of

electronic interference caused by improperly in-

stalled aftermarket radios or telephones.

NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing sen-

sation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard. This

is normal, indicating that the ABS is functioning.

520 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Do not “ride” the brakes by resting your foot on the

pedal. This could overheat the brakes and result in

unpredictable braking action, longer stopping dis-

tances, or brake damage.

• When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking

can cause brake fade with loss of braking control.

Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the

transmission or locking out overdrive whenever pos-

sible.

• Engines may idle at higher speeds during warm-up,

which could cause rear wheels to spin and result in

loss of vehicle control. Be especially careful while

driving on slippery roads, in close-quarter maneuver-

ing, parking, or stopping.

• Do not drive too fast for road conditions, especially

when roads are wet or slushy. A wedge of water can

build up between the tire tread and the road. This

hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction, braking

ability, and control.

• After going through deep water or a car wash, brakes

may become wet, resulting in decreased performance

and unpredictable braking action. Dry the brakes by

gentle, intermittent pedal action while driving at very

slow speeds.

Traction Control System (TCS)

This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of

the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake

pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine

power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and

stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited

Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip

differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven

axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than

the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning

STARTING AND OPERATING 521

wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied

to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains

active even if TCS and ESC are in the “Partial Off” mode

or the “Full Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability

Control (ESC)” in this section for further information.

Brake Assist System (BAS)

The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking

capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The

system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-

ing the rate and amount of brake application and then

applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help

reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the

anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very

quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the

benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-

ing pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not

“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure

unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal

is released, the BAS is deactivated.

WARNING!

The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the

natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,

nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing

road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, in-

cluding those resulting from excessive speed in

turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-

planing. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle

must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous

manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or

the safety of others.

522 STARTING AND OPERATING

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)

This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by

monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the

speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate

of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed

are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then

applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce

engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will

occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or

evasive driving maneuvers. ERM can only reduce the

chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive

driving maneuvers. It cannot prevent wheel lift due to

other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the road-

way, or striking objects or other vehicles.

NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”

mode. Refer to Electronic Stability Control (ESC) for a

complete explanation of the available ESC modes.

WARNING!

Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-

tions, and driving conditions, influence the chance

that wheel lift or rollover may occur. Electronic Roll

Mitigation (ERM) cannot prevent all wheel lift or

rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the

roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The

capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never

be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner,

which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety

of others.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)

The HSA system is designed to help the driver accelerate

the vehicle from a complete stop while on an incline. If

the driver releases the brake while stopped on an incline,

HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a short

period. If the driver does not apply the throttle before this

STARTING AND OPERATING 523

time expires, the system will release brake pressure and

the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal. The system

will release brake pressure in proportion to amount of

throttle applied.

The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to

activate:

• The vehicle must be stopped.

• The vehicle must be on a 7% (approximate) grade or

greater hill.

• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction

(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle

backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).

• For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission,

the HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward

gears. The system will not activate if the transmission

is in PARK.

WARNING!

There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist

(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,

such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or

while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for

active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s

responsibility to be attentive to distance to other

vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly

brake operation to ensure safe operation of the ve-

hicle under all road conditions. Your complete atten-

tion is always required while driving to maintain

safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these

warnings can result in a collision or serious personal

injury.

524 STARTING AND OPERATING

Towing With HSA

HSA will provide assistance during acceleration on an

incline while towing a trailer.

WARNING!

• If you use a trailer brake controller with your

trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and

deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may

not be enough brake pressure to hold both the

vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake

pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an

incline while resuming acceleration, manually ac-

tivate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake

pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.

• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the

parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.

Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Failure to follow these warnings can result in a

collision or serious personal injury.

Disabling And Enabling HSA

If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done

using the Uconnect® Access Settings. Refer to

“Uconnect® Access Settings” in “Understanding Your

Instrument Panel” for further information.

STARTING AND OPERATING 525

Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped

HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in

4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while

descending hills during various driving situations. HDC

controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.

HDC has three states:

1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate)

2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation

conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding

with brake or throttle application)

3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling

vehicle speed)

Enabling HDC

HDC is enabled by pressing the HDC switch, but the

following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:

• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range

• Vehicle speed is below 5mph (8 km/h)

• Parking brake is released

• Driver door is closed

Hill Descent Control

526 STARTING AND OPERATING

Activating HDC

Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if

driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude (greater

than approximately 8%). The set speed for HDC is

selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by using the

gear shift lever. The following summarizes the HDC set

speeds:

• P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not

activate

• R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)

• N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)

• D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)

• 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)

• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)

• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)

• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)

• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)

• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)

• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)

• 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)

• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h)

NOTE:

• During HDC the ERS +/- shifter input is used for HDC

target speed selection but will not affect the gear

chosen by the transmission. During HDC the transmis-

sion will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set

speed and corresponding driving conditions.

• HDC performance is influenced by the Terrain Select

mode. This difference may be notable to the driver and

may be perceived as a varying level of aggressiveness.

STARTING AND OPERATING 527

Driver Override:

The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or

brake application at anytime.

Deactivating HDC

HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of

the following conditions occur:

• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake

application.

• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains

below 40 mph (64 km/h).

• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magni-

tude (less than approximately 8%), is on level ground,

or is on an uphill grade.

• Vehicle is shifted to park.

Disabling HDC

HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the

following conditions occur:

• The driver presses the HDC switch.

• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.

• The parking brake is applied.

• Driver door opens.

• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h)

for greater than 70 seconds.

• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h)

(HDC exits immediately.)

528 STARTING AND OPERATING

Feedback to the driver:

The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC

switch has an LED which offer feedback to the driver

about the state HDC is in.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and

remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated.

This is the normal operating condition for HDC.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several

seconds then extinguish when the driver presses the

HDC switch but enable conditions are not met.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several

seconds then extinguish when HDC deactivates due to

excess speed.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when HDC

deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will

stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have

cooled sufficiently.

The Hill Descent Switch is located within the Selec-

Terrain knob in the upper right position.

WARNING!

HDC is only intended to assist the driver in control-

ling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver

must remain attentive to the driving conditions and

is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.

STARTING AND OPERATING 529

Selec Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped

SSC is intended for off road driving in 4WD Low Range

only. SSC maintains vehicle speed by actively controlling

engine torque and brakes.

SSC has three states:

1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate)

2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation

conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding

with brake or throttle application)

3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling

vehicle speed)

Enabling SSC

SSC is enabled by pressing the SSC switch, but the

following conditions must also be met to enable SSC:

• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range

• Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h)

• Parking brake is released

• Driver door is closed

• Driver is not applying throttle

Selec Speed Control Switch

530 STARTING AND OPERATING

Activating SSC

Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once

the following conditions are met:

• Driver releases throttle

• Driver releases brake

• Transmission is in any selection other than P

• Vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h)

The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver, and can

be adjusted by using the gear shift lever. Additionally, the

SSC set speed is automatically reduced when climbing a

grade and the level of set speed reduction depends on the

magnitude of grade. The following summarizes the SSC

set speeds:

4WD Low Range Set Speeds

• 1st = .6 mph (1 km/h)

• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)

• 3rd = 4 mph (3 km/h)

• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)

• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)

• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)

• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)

• 8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)

• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h)

• REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h)

• NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)

• PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active

STARTING AND OPERATING 531

NOTE: These SSC default set speeds are dependent on

hill grade. That is the steeper the grade of the hill the

vehicle travels on the lower the values of the set speed

will be for all listed gears, with the minimal value being

.6 mph (1 km/h).

NOTE:

• During SSC the ERS +/- shifter input is used for SSC

target speed selection but will not affect the gear

chosen by the transmission. During SSC the transmis-

sion will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set

speed and corresponding driving conditions.

• SSC performance is influenced by the Terrain Select

mode. This difference may be notable to the driver and

may be perceived as a varying level of aggressiveness.

Driver Override:

The driver may override SSC activation with throttle or

brake application at any time.

Deactivating SSC

SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the

following conditions occur:

• Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle or brake

application.

• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains

below 40 mph (64 km/h).

• Vehicle is shifted to park.

Disabling SSC

SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the follow-

ing conditions occur:

• The driver presses the SSC switch.

• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.

• The parking brake is applied.

• Driver door opens.

532 STARTING AND OPERATING

• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h)

for greater than 70 seconds.

• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h)

(SSC exits immediately).

Feedback To The Driver:

The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the SSC

switch has an LED which offer feedback to the driver

about the state SSC is in.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and

remain on solid when SSC is enabled or activated. This

is the normal operating condition for SSC.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several

seconds then extinguish when the driver presses the

SSC switch but enable conditions are not met.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several

seconds then extinguish when SSC deactivates due to

excess speed.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash then

extinguish when SSC deactivates due to overheated

brakes.

WARNING!

SSC is only intended to assist the driver in control-

ling vehicle speed when driving in off road condi-

tions. The driver must remain attentive to the driving

conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe

vehicle speed.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

This system enhances directional control and stability of

the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-

rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by

applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in

counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-

gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle

maintain the desired path.

STARTING AND OPERATING 533

ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle

path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual

path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match

the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appro-

priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or

understeer condition.

• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than

appropriate for the steering wheel position.

• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than

appropriate for the steering wheel position.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” lo-

cated in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon

as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes

active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” also flashes when the TCS is active. If the “ESC

Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash

during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply

as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed

and driving to the prevailing road conditions.

WARNING!

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-

vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the

vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by

prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent col-

lisions, including those resulting from excessive

speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or

hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions

resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappro-

priate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,

attentive, and skillful driver can prevent collisions.

The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must

never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner

which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety

of others.

534 STARTING AND OPERATING

ESC Operating Modes

Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC

system has up to three operating modes: “ESC On”

“Partial Off,” and “Full Off.”

ESC On — Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four-Wheel

Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WD High Range

This is the normal operating mode for ESC when oper-

ating a two-wheel drive vehicle. It is also the normal

mode for operating a four-wheel drive vehicle in 2WD or

4WD HIGH range. The ESC system will be in “ESC On”

mode whenever the vehicle is started or the power

transfer unit (if equipped) is shifted out of 4WD LOW

range. This mode should be used for most driving

situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off” or

“Full Off” for specific reasons as noted. Refer to “Partial

Off” and to “Full Off” for additional information.

Partial Off — Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four-

Wheel Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WD High Range

The “Partial Off” mode is intended for driving in deep

snow, sand, or gravel. This mode raises the threshold for

TCS and ESC activation, which allows for more wheel

spin than what ESC normally allows.

The “ESC Off” button is located in the lower switch bank

above the climate control. To enter the “Partial Off”

mode, momentarily press the “ESC Off” button and the

#ESC Off# indicator light will illuminate. To turn the ESC

on again, momentarily press the #ESC OFF# button and

the #ESC Off# indicator light will turn off. This will restore

the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.

STARTING AND OPERATING 535

WARNING!

• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality

of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature de-

scribed in the TCS section), has been disabled and

the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated.

When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power

reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the

enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sys-

tem is reduced.

• Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the

ESC system is in the %Partial Off% mode.

NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving

with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,

sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the

“Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the “ESC

Off” button. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”

mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily

pressing the “ESC Off” button. This may be done while

the vehicle is in motion.

Full Off — Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles In 4WD High

And 4WD Low Range

The “Full Off” mode is intended for off-highway and

off-road use when ESC stability features could inhibit

vehicle maneuverability due to trail conditions.

The “ESC Off” button is located in the lower switch bank

above the climate control panel. To enter “Full Off”

mode, press and hold the “ESC Off” button for five

seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine

536 STARTING AND OPERATING

running. After five seconds, the #ESC Off# indicator light

will illuminate and an “ESC Off” message will appear in

the odometer.

In this mode, ESC and TCS are turned off (except for the

“limited slip” feature described in the TCS section) until

the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At

speeds over 40 mph (64 km/h), the system automatically

switches to “Partial Off” mode, described above. When

the vehicle speed returns to less than 35 mph (56 km/h),

the ESC system will return to “Full Off” mode. The #ESC

OFF# indicator light is always illuminated when ESC is

off. To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the “ESC

Off” button. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode

of operation.

WARNING!

With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle

stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emer-

gency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not

engage to assist in maintaining stability. “Full Off”

mode is only intended for off-highway or off-road

use.

NOTE:

•

“Full Off” is the only operating mode for ESC in 4WD

LOW range. The ESC system will be in this mode

whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW range or the

power transfer unit is shifted into 4WD LOW range.

• The “ESC OFF” message will display and a chime will

sound when the shift lever is moved from any position

STARTING AND OPERATING 537

to the PARK position and then moved out of the PARK

position. This will occur even if the message was

cleared previously.

ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And

ESC OFF Indicator Light

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” in the instrument cluster will come on

when the ignition switch is turned to the ON

position. It should go out with the engine

running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a

malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this

light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the

vehicle has been driven several miles/kilometers at

speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-

rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem

diagnosed and corrected.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-

cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as

the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also

flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/

Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac-

celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little

throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and

driving to the prevailing road conditions.

NOTE:

• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”

and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen-

tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.

• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system

will be ON even if it was turned off previously.

• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds

when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop

538 STARTING AND OPERATING

when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver

that caused the ESC activation.

The #ESC OFF Indicator Light# indicates the

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially

off or full off.

Trailer Sway Control (TSC)

The TSC system uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize

an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appro-

priate actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system

may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the

appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer.

TSC will become active automatically once an excessively

swaying trailer is recognized.

Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the

trailer tongue weight recommendations. When TSC is

functioning, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” will flash, the engine power may be reduced and

you may feel the brakes being applied to individual

wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is

only active in the default “ESC On” mode. TSC can be

disabled by pressing the “ESC Off” switch and entering

“ESC Partial Off” mode. It is not active in the “ESC

Partial Off” or “ESC Full Off” modes. Refer to the ESC

portion of this section for an explanation of the different

ESC operating modes.

NOTE: TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.

WARNING!

If the TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle

down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the

trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.

STARTING AND OPERATING 539

Ready Alert Braking (RAB)

Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to

reach full braking during emergency braking situations.

It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may

occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by

the driver. When the throttle is released very quickly,

Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake

pressure. This brake pressure will not be noticed by the

driver. The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow

a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes.

Rain Brake Support (RBS)

Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance

in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small

amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup

on the front brake rotors. It is triggered by the windshield

wiper setting and only functions when they are in use.

When Rainy Brake Support is active, there is no notifica-

tion to the driver and no driver interaction is required.

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

Tire Markings

1—U.S.DOTSafetyStandards

Code (TIN)

4—MaximumLoad

2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure

3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and

Temperature Grades

540 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:

• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.

design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”

molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-

tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.

• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European

design standards. Tires designed to this standard have

the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with

the section width. The letter #P# is absent from this tire

size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.

design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric

tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the

letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-

ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary

emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-

pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into

the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:

T145/80D18 103M.

• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design

standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded

into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

STARTING AND OPERATING 541

Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:

Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15

P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or

%....blank....% = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or

LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or

TorS= Temporary spare tire or

31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)

215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)

65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)

– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or

10.5 = Section width in inches (in)

542 STARTING AND OPERATING

EXAMPLE:

R = Construction code

– #R# means radial construction, or

– #D# means diagonal or bias construction

15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

Service Description:

95 = Load Index

– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

H = Speed Symbol

– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to

its load index under certain operating conditions

– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under

specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and

posted speed limits)

STARTING AND OPERATING 543

EXAMPLE:

Load Identification:

Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)

tire:

•

XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or

•

LL = Light load tire or

•

C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this

tire

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,

however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires

with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the

date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall

tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on

the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard

side of the tire.

544 STARTING AND OPERATING

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT = Department of Transportation

– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire

safety standards and is approved for highway use

MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

– 03 means the 3rd week

01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

– 01 means the year 2001

– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year

in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

STARTING AND OPERATING 545

Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition

B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located

behind the front door.

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after

the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven

less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three

hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per

square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).

Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible

cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation

pressure is molded into the sidewall.

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pres-

sure

Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure

as shown on the tire placard.

Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi-

cle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the

recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

546 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

Tire And Loading Information Placard Location

NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on

the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s

side door.

Example Tire Placard Location (Door)

STARTING AND OPERATING 547

Tire And Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information about the:

1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.

2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.

Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)

Tire And Loading Information Placard

548 STARTING AND OPERATING

3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.

4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and

spare tires.

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed

the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You

will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you

adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire

inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading

Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section

of this manual.

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,

gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear

axles must not be exceeded. For further information on

GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to

“Vehicle Loading” in this section.

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your

vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or

XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and

trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed

the weight referenced here.

Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-

pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or

XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and

passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-

sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.

STARTING AND OPERATING 549

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of

cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if

“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will

be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the

amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity

is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs

(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =

650 lbs [295 kg]).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo

being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load

capacity calculated in step 4.

NOTE:

• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your

trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-

ing table shows examples on how to calculate total

load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your

vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-

ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration

purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating

and load carry capacity of your vehicle.

• For the following example, the combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs

(392 kg).

550 STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING AND OPERATING 551

WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading

can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and

increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the

recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never

overload them.

TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION

Tire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and

satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas

are affected by improper tire pressure:

• Safety and Vehicle Stability

• Economy

• Tread Wear

• Ride Comfort

Safety

WARNING!

• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can

cause collisions.

• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-

sult in over-heating and tire failure.

• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion

shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can

cause damage that result in tire failure.

• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect ve-

hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in

loss of vehicle control.

• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-

lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.

(Continued)

552 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle

to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the

right or left.

• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-

mended cold tire inflation pressure.

Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability

of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish

response or over responsiveness in the steering.

NOTE:

• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause

erratic and unpredictable steering response.

• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the

vehicle to drift left or right.

Economy

Under-inflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance

resulting in higher fuel consumption.

Tread Wear

Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-

mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the

need for earlier tire replacement.

Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.

Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable

ride.

Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the

driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side

door.

STARTING AND OPERATING 553

At least once a month:

• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality

pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual

judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires

may look properly inflated even when they are under-

inflated.

• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.

CAUTION!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-

ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent

moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,

which could damage the valve stem.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always

“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure

is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not

been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1

mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.

The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the

maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side-

wall.

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range

of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with

temperature changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per

12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind

when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in

the winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the

outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire

inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),

which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this

outside temperature condition.

554 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)

during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure

build up or your tire pressure will be too low.

Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and

within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-

tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high

speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very

important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle

loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-

tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original

equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-

ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-

mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your

tires could cause them to fail. You could have a

serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the

maximum capacity at continuous speeds above

75 mph (120 km/h).

Radial Ply Tires

WARNING!

Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires

on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle

poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-

ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never

combine them with other types of tires.

STARTING AND OPERATING 555

Tire Repair

If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it

meets the following criteria:

• The tire has not been driven on when flat.

• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire

(sidewall damage is not repairable).

• The puncture is no greater than ¼# (6 mm).

Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and

additional information.

Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have

experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-

diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and

service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).

Tire Types

All Season Tires — If Equipped

All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,

summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary be-

tween different all season tires. All season tires can be

identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on

the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;

failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and

handling of your vehicle.

Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped

Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry

conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or

on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be

aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold

driving conditions. Install winter tires on your vehicle

when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if

roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informa-

tion, contact an authorized dealer.

556 STARTING AND OPERATING

Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or

mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use

summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may

adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not use summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You

could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury

or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates

the possibility of loss of vehicle control.

Snow Tires

Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires

during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a

“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.

If you need snow tires, select tires

equivalent in size and type to the origi-

nal equipment tires. Use snow tires

only in sets of four; failure to do so

may adversely affect the safety and

handling of your vehicle.

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what

was originally equipped with your vehicle and should

not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph

(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to

original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for

recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold

tire inflation pressures.

STARTING AND OPERATING 557

While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid

and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be

poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-

hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be

checked before using these tire types.

Run Flat Tires — If Equipped

Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles

(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation

pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the

Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire

inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a

Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited

driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi-

ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.

It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full

capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat

mode.

See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-

mation.

Spare Tires — If Equipped

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit

instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in

“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.

CAUTION!

Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take

your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a

compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.

Damage to the vehicle may result.

Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And

Wheel — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and

wheel equivalent in look and function to the original

558 STARTING AND OPERATING

equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle

of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire

rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,

refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended

tire rotation pattern.

Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped

The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.

You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a

compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on

the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the

driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.

Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”

or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/

80D18 103M.

T, S = Temporary Spare Tire

Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-

ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled

on your vehicle at the first opportunity.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a

conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the

wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.

Do not install more than one compact spare tire and

wheel on the vehicle at any given time.

WARNING!

Compact spares are for temporary emergency use

only. With these spares, do not drive more than

50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited

tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear

indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be

replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which

apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in

spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

STARTING AND OPERATING 559

Full Size Spare — If Equipped

The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.

This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the

front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare

tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn

to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size

spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as

your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the

original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the

first opportunity.

Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped

The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency

use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the

limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving

limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the

original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your

vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare

tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as

your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the

original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the

first opportunity.

WARNING!

Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-

stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle

handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the

speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep

inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on

your Tire and Loading Information Placard located

on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the

driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original

equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it

on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss

of vehicle control.

560 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Spinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not

spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or

for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-

ping.

Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In

Emergencies” for further information.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-

ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-

age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-

one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than

30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-

ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near

a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires

to help you in determining when your tires should be

replaced.

1—WornTire

2—NewTire

STARTING AND OPERATING 561

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread

grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth

becomes 1/16” (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the

tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer

to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further infor-

mation.

Life Of Tire

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying

factors including, but not limited to:

• Driving style

• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures

can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the

tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce

tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-

ment.

• Distance driven

• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or

higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced

tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-

tenance schedule is highly recommended.

WARNING!

Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six

years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to

follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.

You could lose control and have a collision resulting

in serious injury or death.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little

exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact

with oil, grease, and gasoline.

Replacement Tires

The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many

characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for

562 STARTING AND OPERATING

wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-

facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-

lent to the originals in size, quality and performance

when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on

“Tread Wear Indicator.” Refer to the Tire and Loading

Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for

the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and

Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original

equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-

ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this

manual for more information relating to the Load Index

and Speed Symbol of a tire.

It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two

rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously

affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a

wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match

those of the original wheels.

It is recommended you contact your authorized tire

dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions

you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure

to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect

the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.

WARNING!

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than

that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations

of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-

pension dimensions and performance characteris-

tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and

braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-

able handling and stress to steering and suspen-

sion components. You could lose control and have

a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use

only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings

approved for your vehicle.

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 563

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or

capacity, other than what was originally equipped

on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load

index could result in tire overloading and failure.

You could lose control and have a collision.

• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having

adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire

failure and loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION!

Replacing original tires with tires of a different size

may result in false speedometer and odometer read-

ings.

TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)

Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body

clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard

against damage.

• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as

recommended by the traction device manufacturer

• Use on Front Tires Only

• Due to limited clearance, the following traction de-

vices are recommended:

Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models

• Original equipment 225/60R17 and 225/55R18 tire

sizes are not chainable.

• The use of 7mm snow chains is permitted with the use

of 215/60R17 tires on size 17 x 7.0 ET41 wheels.

564 STARTING AND OPERATING

Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Non-Trailhawk Models with-

out a Two-Speed Power Takeoff Unit

• Original equipment 225/65R17 and 225/60R18 tire

sizes are not chainable.

• The use of 9mm snow chains is permitted with the use

of 215/60R17 tires on size 17 x 7.0 ET41 wheels.

Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Non-Trailhawk Models with a

Two-Speed Power Takeoff Unit

• The use of 7mm snow chains is permitted with 225/

65R17 and 225/60R18 tires.

Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Trailhawk Models

• The use of 9mm snow chains is permitted with the use

of 225/65R17 tires on size 17 x 7.5 ET31 wheels.

CAUTION!

• Use on Front Tires Only

• Damage to Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models may

result if tire chains or traction devices are used with

original equipment size tires.

• Damage to Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Models with-

out a Two-Speed Power Takeoff Unit may result if

tire chains or traction devices are used with origi-

nal equipment size tires.

• Damage to Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Trailhawk

Models may result if tire chains or traction devices

are used with original equipment size tires.

WARNING!

Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)

between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable

handling. You could lose control and have a collision.

STARTING AND OPERATING 565

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the

following precautions:

• Because of restricted traction device clearance be-

tween tires and other suspension components, it is

important that only traction devices in good condi-

tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious

damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise

occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove

the damaged parts of the device before further use.

• Install device as tightly as possible and then re-

tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).

• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).

• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large

bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.

• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-

ment.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-

tions on the method of installation, operating

speed, and conditions for use. Always use the

suggested operating speed of the device manufac-

turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).

• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.

TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at

different loads and perform different steering, handling,

and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at

unequal rates.

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.

The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with

aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road

566 STARTING AND OPERATING

type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-

tain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to

a smooth, quiet ride.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or

unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being

performed.

The suggested Front Wheel Drive (FWD) rotation

method is the “rearward cross” shown in the following

diagram. This rotation pattern does not apply to some

directional tires that must not be reversed.

The suggested Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire rotation

method is the “forward-cross” shown in the following

diagram.

Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Tire Rotation

STARTING AND OPERATING 567

CAUTION!

Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles de-

pends on tires of equal size, type and circumference

on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

damage to the power transfer unit. Tire rotation

schedule should be followed to balance tire wear.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the

driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-

mended cold placard pressure.

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1

psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when

the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will

decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on

cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire

pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least

three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a

three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must

not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into

the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”

Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire Rotation

568 STARTING AND OPERATING

in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to

properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will

also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal and

there should be no adjustment for this increased pres-

sure.

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if

the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning

limit for any reason, including low temperature effects

and natural pressure loss through the tire.

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire

pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn

off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended

cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-

ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates,

you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended

cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off.

NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may

need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)

above the recommended cold placard pressure in order

to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.

The system will automatically update and the “Tire

Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the

system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle

may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph

(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-

tion.

For example, your vehicle may have a recommended

cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure

of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F

(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),

a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire

pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire

pressure is low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause

the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),

STARTING AND OPERATING 569

but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still

be on. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring

Telltale Light” will turn off only after the tires are inflated

to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure

value.

NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may

need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)

above the recommended cold placard pressure in order

to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.

CAUTION!

• The TPMS has been optimized for the original

equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and

warning have been established for the tire size

equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-

eration or sensor damage may result when using

replacement equipment that is not of the same size,

type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause

sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may

cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-

market tire sealant it is recommended that you take

your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have

your sensor function checked.

(Continued)

570 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION! (Continued)

• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,

always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will

prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve

stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-

toring Sensor.

NOTE:

• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care

and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire

failure or condition.

• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge

while adjusting your tire pressure.

• Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the

tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underin-

flation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,

and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping

ability.

• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-

nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain

correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure

gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level

to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitor-

ing Telltale Light.”

• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,

and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in

the tire.

STARTING AND OPERATING 571

Base System

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless

technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to

monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each

wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure

readings to the receiver module.

NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the

tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly

and to maintain the proper pressure.

The TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver Module

• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors

• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings

The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will

illuminate in the instrument cluster, a “LOW TIRE

PRESSURE” message will display in the instrument

cluster, an #Inflate to XX# message will be displayed and

a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or

more of the four active road tires. Should this occur, you

should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation

pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire

to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure

value as shown in the #Inflate to XX# message. Once the

system receives the updated tire pressures, the system

will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Moni-

toring Telltale Light” will turn off.

572 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may

need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)

above the recommended cold placard pressure in order

to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.

The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes

above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive

this information.

Service TPMS Warning

When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75

seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will

also sound a chime. If the ignition is cycled, this sequence

will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The

“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off

when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault

can occur due to any of the following:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to

facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the

TPMS sensors.

2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting

that affects radio wave signals.

3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel

housings.

4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.

5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.

Vehicles With Compact Spare or non-Matching Full

Size Spare

1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size spare

tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor.

Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in

the spare tire.

STARTING AND OPERATING 573

2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size

spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure

below the low-pressure warning limit, a chime will

sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light” and “LOW TIRE

PRESSURE” and #Inflate to XX# messages will turn on

upon the next ignition cycle.

3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above

15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will

flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on

solid.

4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will sound

and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off for

75 seconds and then remain on solid.

5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and

reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare

or non-matching full size spare, the TPMS will update

automatically and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will turn

off, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-

pressure warning limit in any of the four active road

tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20

minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the

TPMS to receive this information.

Premium System — If Equipped

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless

technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to

monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each

wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure

readings to the receiver module.

NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the

tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly

and to maintain the proper pressure.

The TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver Module

• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors

574 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,

which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID).

• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings

The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will

illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime

will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the

four active road tires. In addition, the Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC)/Driver information Display

(DID) will display a #Tire Low# message for a minimum

of five seconds, an #Inflate to XX# message and a graphic

showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire

pressure values in a different color.

Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible

and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a

different color in the EVIC/DID graphic) to the vehicle’s

recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in

the #Inflate to XX# message. Once the system receives the

updated tire pressures, the system will automatically

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning

STARTING AND OPERATING 575

update, the pressure values in the graphic display in the

EVIC/DID will return to their original color, and the

“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off.

NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may

need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)

above the recommended cold placard pressure in order

to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.

The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes

above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to

receive this information.

SERVICE TPMS Warning

When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75

seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will

also sound a chime. In addition, the EVIC/DID will

display a #SERVICE TPM SYSTEM# message for a mini-

mum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in

place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not

being received.

If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,

providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault

no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale

Light” will no longer flash, and the “SERVICE TPM

Tire Pressure Monitoring Service Warning

576 STARTING AND OPERATING

SYSTEM” message will no longer display, and a pressure

value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault

can occur due to any of the following:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to

facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the

TPMS sensors.

2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting

that affects radio wave signals.

3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel

housings.

4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.

5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.

Vehicles With Matching Full-Size Spare

1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly

has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be

monitored by the TPMS.

2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire

that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning

limit, a chime will sound and the “TPMS Telltale

Light” will turn on upon the next ignition key cycle. In

addition, the EVIC/DID will display a Tire Low

message, an #Inflate to XX# message and a graphic

showing the low tire pressure value in a different

color.

3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above

15.5 mph (25 km/h) the “TPMS Telltale Light” will

turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the

low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active

road tires.

4. The EVIC/DID will display a graphic showing the tire

pressure value in the same color as the other pressure

values in place of the different color low tire pressure

STARTING AND OPERATING 577

value. The EVIC/DID will also display a “SPARE

LOW PRESSURE” message to remind you to service

the flat tire.

Vehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching Full

Size Spare

1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size does

not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore,

the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact

spare tire.

2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size

spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure

below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next

ignition key cycle, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will

remain on and a chime will sound. In addition, the

graphic in the EVIC/DID will still display a different

color pressure value and an #Inflate to XX# message.

3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above

15.5 mph (25 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will

flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on

solid. In addition, the EVIC/DID will display a “SER-

VICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds and

then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.

4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will

sound, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off

for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the

EVIC/DID will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”

message for five seconds and then display dashes (- -)

in place of the pressure value.

5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and

reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare

or non-matching full size, the TPMS will update

automatically. In addition, the “TPMS Telltale Light”

will turn off and the graphic in the EVIC will display

a new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as

578 STARTING AND OPERATING

no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning

limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle

may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above

15.5 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive

this information.

General Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and

RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the

following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.

•

This device must accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause undesired operation.

The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow-

ing licenses:

United States GQ4-61T

Canada 1470A-42T

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

2.4L Engine

These engines are designed to meet all

emissions regulations and provide excel-

lent fuel economy and performance when

using high quality unleaded “regular”

gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The

use of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will

not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these

engines.

Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to

your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at

high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is

required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such

as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-

ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline

before considering service for the vehicle. Over 40 auto

manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed

STARTING AND OPERATING 579

consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel

Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties necessary

to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, and dura-

bility for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends

the use of gasoline that meet the WWFC specifications if

they are available.

3.2L Engine

These engines are designed to meet all

emissions regulations and provide satisfac-

tory fuel economy and performance when

using high quality unleaded gasoline hav-

ing an octane range of 87 to 89. The manu-

facturer recommends the use of 89 octane premium

gasoline for optimum performance.

Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to

your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at

high speeds can cause damage and should be reported to

your dealer immediately. Engine damage resulting from

operating with a heavy spark knock may not be covered

by the new vehicle warranty.

Reformulated Gasoline

Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner

burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”

Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are spe-

cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-

prove air quality.

The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-

line. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro-

vide excellent performance and durability of engine and

fuel system components.

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-

genates such as Ethanol.

580 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso-

line containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these

blends may result in starting and drivability prob-

lems, damage critical fuel system components, cause

emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or

cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illumi-

nate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a

fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.

Problems that result from using gasoline containing

Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol

are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may

not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles

Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-

line containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher

ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85

fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:

• Operate in a lean mode.

• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.

• Poor engine performance.

• Poor cold start and cold drivability.

• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.

To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with

E-85 perform the following:

• Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer).

STARTING AND OPERATING 581

• Change the engine oil and oil filter.

• Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the

engine controller memory.

More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged

exposure to E-85 fuel.

MMT In Gasoline

Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)

is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is

blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline

blended with MMT provides no performance advantage

beyond gasoline of the same octane number without

MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug

life and reduces emissions system performance in some

vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline

without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content

of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,

therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether

the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal

and California reformulated gasoline.

Materials Added To Fuel

All gasoline sold in the United States is required to

contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional

detergents or other additives is not needed under normal

conditions and they would result in additional cost.

Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the

fuel.

582 STARTING AND OPERATING

Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION!

Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s

performance:

• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.

Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-

mance and damage the emissions control system.

• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition

malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to

overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or

some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune

or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-

vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service

assistance.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• The use of fuel additives, which are now being

sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.

Most of these products contain high concentrations

of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-

mance problems resulting from the use of such

fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the

manufacturer.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control

system can result in civil penalties being assessed against

you.

STARTING AND OPERATING 583

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING!

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.

Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon

monoxide poisoning:

• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon

monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can

kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as

a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the

engine running for an extended period. If the

vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine

running for more than a short period, adjust the

ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into

the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-

tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every

time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal

conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive

with all side windows fully open.

FLEXIBLE FUEL (2.4L ENGINE ONLY) — IF

EQUIPPED

E-85 General Information

The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve-

hicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique

fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Un-

leaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those

subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to

the other sections of this manual for information on

features that are common between Flexible Fuel and

gasoline-only powered vehicles.

584 STARTING AND OPERATING

E-85 Fuel Cap E-85 Badge

STARTING AND OPERATING 585

Ethanol Fuel (E-85)

E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and

15% unleaded gasoline.

WARNING!

Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could

cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-

ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov-

ing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the

tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never

use it near an open flame.

Fuel Requirements

If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on

unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85

fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels.

For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternat-

ing between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recom-

mended.

When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:

• You do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when

refueling.

• You drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at

least 5 miles (8 km).

Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard

starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability

during warm up.

NOTE:

• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With

non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, you may experience

hard starting and rough idle following start up even if

the above recommendations are followed, especially

when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).

586 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully

compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your

engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be

caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline

additive, such as MOPAR® Injector Cleanup or

Techron may be used.

Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles

(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles

FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formu-

lated engine oils. These special requirements are included

in MOPAR® engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting

Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only

recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet

the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395

contains additional requirements, developed during ex-

tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to

Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR® or an

equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.

Starting

The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use

when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the

range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an

increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and

a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)

until the engine is fully warmed up.

NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is

beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient tempera-

ture is less than 32°F (0°C).

Cruising Range

Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter

than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel

consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon

(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease

by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.

STARTING AND OPERATING 587

Replacement Parts

Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are

designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure

that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com-

patible parts.

CAUTION!

Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol

compatible components can damage your vehicle.

Maintenance

CAUTION!

Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your

vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and

may affect drivability.

ADDING FUEL

The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door, on the

passenger side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or

damaged, be sure the replacement cap has been designed

for use with this vehicle.

Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)

588 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap

tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door rein-

forcement.

1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located on the

driver’s side door trim).

2. Open the fuel filler door, and remove the fuel filler

cap.

NOTE:

• In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel

door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the

fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the

fuel door using the inside release button. Do not pry

on the door.

• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank

is full.

• Tighten the gas cap about one quarter turn until you

hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is

properly tightened.

• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will

come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time

the vehicle is refueled.

CAUTION!

• Damage to the fuel system or emission control

system could result from using an improper fuel

cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impu-

rities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting

aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indi-

cator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors

escaping from the system.

• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn

on.

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 589

CAUTION! (Continued)

• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top

off” the fuel tank after filling.

WARNING!

• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the

vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is

being filled.

• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is

in violation of most state and federal fire regula-

tions and may cause the MIL to turn on.

• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a

portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You

could be burned. Always place gas containers on

the ground while filling.

Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release

If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel

filler door emergency release.

1. Open the liftgate.

2. Remove access door located on interior trim panel for

release cable with the tip of your key.

3. Grab the release cable tether and pull up to release the

fuel filler door.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel

filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a

“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver

Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle

Information (EVIC) or #Driver Information Display

(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for

further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a

590 STARTING AND OPERATING

“clicking” sound is heard. This is an indication that the

fuel filler cap is properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard

Diagnostic System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for

further information.

VEHICLE LOADING

Certification Label

As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-

istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label

affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.

This label contains the month and year of manufacture,

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight

Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is

included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and

Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the

bottom of the label is your VIN.

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle

including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.

The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and

rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so

GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.

Payload

The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load

weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the

driver, all passengers, options and cargo.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front

and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo

area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.

Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the

system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,

springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension

STARTING AND OPERATING 591

components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-

creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-

cle’s GVWR.

Tire Size

The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents

the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires

must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.

Rim Size

This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size

listed.

Inflation Pressure

This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for

all loading conditions up to full GAWR.

Curb Weight

The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight

of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full

capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo

loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight

values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a

commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are

added.

The actual total weight and the weight of the front and

rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined

by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.

The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-

cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.

The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should

then be determined separately to be sure that the load is

properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weigh-

ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the

front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is

within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted

from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the

592 STARTING AND OPERATING

specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier

items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed

equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.

Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect

on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way

the brakes operate.

CAUTION!

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR

or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,

parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the

way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to

lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of

your vehicle.

TRAILER TOWING

In this section you will find safety tips and information

on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do

with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully

review this information to tow your load as efficiently

and safely as possible.

To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,

follow the requirements and recommendations in this

manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.

Common Towing Definitions

The following trailer towing related definitions will assist

you in understanding the following information:

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.

This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue

weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not

STARTING AND OPERATING 593

exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle

Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for

further information.

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)

The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all

cargo, consumables, and equipment (permanent or tem-

porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its #loaded and

ready for operation# condition.

The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your

fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight

of the trailer must be supported by the scale.

WARNING!

If the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is 3,500 lbs (1

587 kg) or more, it is mandatory to use a weight-

distributing hitch to ensure stable handling of your

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

vehicle. If you use a standard weight-carrying hitch,

you could lose control of your vehicle and cause a

collision.

Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)

The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle

and trailer when weighed in combination.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear

axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles

evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or

rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-

tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further

information.

594 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

It is important that you do not exceed the maximum

front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition

can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose

control of the vehicle and have a collision.

Tongue Weight (TW)

The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the

hitch ball by the trailer. The recommended tongue weight

is 10% to 15% for a conventional hitch. You must consider

this as part of the load on your vehicle.

Frontal Area

The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the

maximum width of the front of a trailer.

Trailer Sway Control — Mechanical

The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be

installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue

that typically provides adjustable friction associated with

the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer

swaying motions while traveling.

Weight-Carrying Hitch

A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue

weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or

some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds

of hitches are the most popular on the market today and

they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized

trailers.

Weight-Distributing Hitch

A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-

age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used

for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the

STARTING AND OPERATING 595

tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used

in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro-

vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent

steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing

safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control

also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and

contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.

Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load

equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue

Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle

and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross

Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.

WARNING!

• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch

system may reduce handling, stability, braking

performance, and could result in a collision.

• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compat-

ible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your

hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec-

reational Vehicle dealer for additional information.

596 STARTING AND OPERATING

Trailer Hitch Classification

The following chart provides the industry standard for

the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can

tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the

correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.

Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions

Class Max. Trailer Hitch In-

dustry Standards

Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)

Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)

Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)

Class IV - Extra Heavy

Duty

10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)

Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum

Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given

drivetrain.

All trailer hitches should be professionally installed

on your vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 597

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight

Ratings)

The following chart provides the maximum trailer

weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.

Engine/

Transmission

Model Frontal Area

Maximum GTW

(Gross Trailer Wt.)

Maximum Tongue

Wt. (See Note)

2.4L/Automatic

with or without

Trailer Tow Package

FWD or 4WD 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)

3.2L/Automatic FWD or 4WD 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)

3.2L/Automatic

with Trailer Tow

Package

FWD or 4WD 39.44 sq ft (3.66 sq

4,500 lbs (2 041 kg) 450 lbs (204 kg)

Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.

598 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as

part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo (ie.

the GVWR), and the GVWR should never exceed the

weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information

placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Starting

and Operating” for further information.

Trailer And Tongue Weight

Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in

the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your

vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the

rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side

which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.

Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of

many trailer collisions.

Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on

your bumper or trailer hitch.

Consider the following items when computing the

weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:

• The tongue weight of the trailer.

• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment

put in or on your vehicle.

• The weight of the driver and all passengers.

STARTING AND OPERATING 599

NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the

trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional

factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must

be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.

Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for

the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo

for your vehicle.

Towing Requirements

To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-

train components, the following guidelines are recom-

mended:

WARNING!

Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these

guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as

possible:

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer

and that it will not shift during travel. When

trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic

load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the

driver to control. You could lose control of your

vehicle and have a collision.

• When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not

overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can

cause a loss of control, poor performance, or dam-

age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,

suspension, chassis structure, or tires.

• Safety chains must always be used between your

vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to

the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.

Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow

enough slack for turning corners.

(Continued)

600 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a

grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on

the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in

PARK. Always, block or %chock% the trailer wheels.

• GCWR must not be exceeded.

• Total weight must be distributed between the tow

vehicle and the trailer such that the following four

ratings are not exceeded:

1. GVWR

2. GTW

3. GAWR

4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti-

lized.

CAUTION!

• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles

(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle

or other parts could be damaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a

trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)

and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps

the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at

the heavier loads.

Towing Requirements — Tires

• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact

spare tire.

• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe

and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to

“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Oper-

ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.

STARTING AND OPERATING 601

• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-

sures before trailer usage.

• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage

before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General

Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the

proper inspection procedure.

• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-

mation” in “Starting And Operating” for the proper

tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a

higher load carrying capacity will not increase the

vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.

Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes

• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or

vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.

This could cause inadequate braking and possible

personal injury.

• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is

required when towing a trailer with electronically

actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with

a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic

brake controller is not required.

• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over

1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of

2,000 lbs (907 kg).

WARNING!

• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s

hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake

system and cause it to fail. You might not have

brakes when you need them and could have a

collision.

(Continued)

602 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping

distance. When towing you should allow for addi-

tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle

in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a

collision.

CAUTION!

If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)

loaded, it should have its own brakes and they

should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this

could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher

brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.

Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring

Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,

stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for

motoring safety.

The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-

pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-

ness and connector.

NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles

wiring harness.

The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle

but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.

Refer to the following illustrations.

STARTING AND OPERATING 603

Four-Pin Connector

1 — Female Pins 4 — Park

2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn

3—Ground 6—RightStop/Turn

Seven-Pin Connector

1—Battery 5—Ground

2—BackupLamps 6—LeftStop/Turn

3—RightStop/Turn 7—RunningLamps

4 — Electric Brakes

604 STARTING AND OPERATING

Towing Tips

Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,

and backing the trailer in an area located away from

heavy traffic.

Automatic Transmission — If Equipped

The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The

transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid

frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent

shifting does occur while in DRIVE, use the Electronic

Range Select (ERS) shift control to select a lower gear

range.

NOTE: Using a lower gear range while operating the

vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve

performance and extend transmission life by reducing

excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also

provide better engine braking.

Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped

• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.

• When using the speed control, if you experience speed

drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until

you can get back to cruising speed.

• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to

maximize fuel efficiency.

Cooling System

To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-

heating, take the following actions:

City Driving

When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans-

mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.

STARTING AND OPERATING 605

Highway Driving

Reduce speed.

Air Conditioning

Turn off temporarily.

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND

MOTORHOME, ETC.)

Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)

Models

DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain

will result.

Recreational towing (for front-wheel drive models) is

allowed ONLY if the front wheels are OFF the ground.

This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle

trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:

1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following

the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.

3. Apply the parking brake. Place the transmission in

PARK.

4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following

the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.

5. Release the parking brake.

CAUTION!

Towing with the front wheels on the ground will

cause severe transmission damage. Damage from

improper towing is not covered under the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

606 STARTING AND OPERATING

Recreational Towing — 4X4 Models With 1-Speed

Power Transfer Unit

Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do

not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the power transfer

unit.

NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle

trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.

CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the

ground can cause severe transmission and/or power

transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing

is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited War-

ranty.

Recreational Towing — 4X4 Models With 2-Speed

Power Transfer Unit

The power transfer unit must be shifted into NEUTRAL

(N) and the transmission must be in PARK for recre-

ational towing. The NEUTRAL (N) selection button is

adjacent to the power transfer unit selector switch. Shifts

into and out of NEUTRAL (N) can take place with the

selector switch in any mode position.

CAUTION!

• DO NOT dolly tow any 4x4 vehicle. Towing with

only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear)

will cause severe transmission and/or power trans-

fer unit damage. Tow with all four wheels either

ON the ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle

trailer).

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 607

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this ve-

hicle backwards can cause severe damage to the

power transfer unit.

• The transmission must be in PARK for recreational

towing.

• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure

outlined under “Shifting into NEUTRAL (N)” to be

certain that the power transfer unit is fully in

NEUTRAL (N). Otherwise, internal damage will

result.

• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-

quirements can cause severe transmission and/or

power transfer unit damage. Damage from im-

proper towing is not covered under the New Ve-

hicle Limited Warranty.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar

on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be

damaged.

Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)

WARNING!

You or others could be injured or killed if you leave

the vehicle unattended with the power transfer unit

in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully

engaging the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N)

position disengages both the front and rear drive-

shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle

to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The

parking brake should always be applied when the

driver is not in the vehicle.

608 STARTING AND OPERATING

Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for

recreational towing.

CAUTION!

It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that

the power transfer unit is fully in NEUTRAL (N)

before recreational towing to prevent damage to

internal parts.

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop and shift the

transmission to PARK.

2. Turn the engine OFF.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but

do not start the engine.

4. Press and hold the brake pedal.

5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold

the recessed NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the

selector switch) for four seconds. The light behind the

NEUTRAL (N) symbol will blink, indicating shift in

progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid)

when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete.

Neutral Switch

STARTING AND OPERATING 609

7. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N)

light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.

8. Start the engine.

9. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.

10. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure

that there is no vehicle movement.

11. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.

Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.

12. Apply the parking brake.

13. Shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine

OFF, and remove the key fob.

14. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable

tow bar.

15. Release the parking brake.

NOTE:

• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met

before pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must

continue to be met until the shift has been completed.

If any of these requirements are not met before press-

ing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met

during the shift, then the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light

will flash continuously until all requirements are met

or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.

• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position

for a shift to take place and for the position indicator

lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the

ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no

position indicator lights will be on or flashing.

• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light

indicates that shift requirements have not been met.

610 STARTING AND OPERATING

Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)

Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for

normal usage.

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it con-

nected to the tow vehicle.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but

do not start the engine.

4. Press and hold the brake pedal.

5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold

the recessed power transfer unit NEUTRAL (N) button

(located by the selector switch) for one second.

7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off,

release the NEUTRAL (N) button.

8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released, the

power transfer unit will shift to the position indicated

by the selector switch.

Neutral Switch

STARTING AND OPERATING 611

NOTE: When shifting the power transfer unit out of

NEUTRAL (N), the engine should remain OFF to avoid

gear clash.

9. Shift the transmission into PARK.

10. Release the brake pedal.

11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.

12. Start the engine.

13. Press and hold the brake pedal.

14. Release the parking brake.

15. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the brake

pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.

NOTE:

• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met

before pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must

continue to be met until the shift has been completed.

If any of these requirements are not met before press-

ing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met

during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will

flash continuously until all requirements are met or

until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.

• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position

for a shift to take place and for the position indicator

lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the

ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no

position indicator lights will be on or flashing.

• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light

indicates that shift requirements have not been met.

612 STARTING AND OPERATING

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CONTENTS

! HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...........615

! IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............615

! WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE

SPECIFICATIONS ......................616

▫ Torque Specifications ..................616

! TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED .........618

▫ Tire Service Kit Storage .................618

▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .619

▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions..........620

▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit .........622

! JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ..........628

▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage .........629

▫ Preparations For Jacking ................631

▫ Jacking Instructions ...................632

▫ Road Tire Installation ...................639

! JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES ...........640

▫ Preparations For Jump-Start ..............641

▫ Jump-Starting Procedure ................642

! FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............644

! RECOVERY STRAP — IF EQUIPPED .........646

! SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE ................647

! TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...........648

▫ Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models .........650

▫ 4x4 Models With 1–Speed Power Transfer Unit —

With Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650

▫ 4x4 Models With 2–Speed Power Transfer Unit —

With Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651

614 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the

switch bank below the radio screen.

Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning

flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-

tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming

traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to

turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.

This is an emergency warning system and it should not

be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your

vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for

other motorists.

When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the

Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even

though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.

NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers

may wear down your battery.

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

In any of the following situations, you can reduce the

potential for overheating your engine by taking the

appropriate action.

• On the highways — slow down.

• In city traffic — while stopped, put transmission in

NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot cooling system could damage

your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”

pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with

the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops

back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on

the “H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the

engine off immediately and call for service.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 615

NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down

an impending overheat condition:

• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C

system adds heat to the engine cooling system and

turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.

• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum

heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control

to high. This allows the heater core to act as a

supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat

from the engine cooling system.

WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hot engine

coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If

you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,

do not open the hood until the radiator has had time

to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure

cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure

that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any

time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the

vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a

properly calibrated torque wrench.

Torque Specifications

Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/

Bolt Size

Lug Nut/

Bolt

Socket

Size

100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m) M12 x 1.25 19 mm

**Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and

clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.

616 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting

the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.

Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each

nut/bolt has been tightened twice.

After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be

sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated

against the wheel.

Wheel Mounting Surface

Torque Patterns

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 617

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,

do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has

been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may

result in personal injury.

TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED

Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be

sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws

or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service

Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approxi-

mately -4°F (-20°C).

This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you

to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a

maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).

Tire Service Kit Storage

The Tire Service Kit is stowed under the load floor behind

the rear seat.

1. Open the liftgate.

2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle.

Load Floor Handle

618 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Tire Service Kit Components And Operation Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses

Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following

symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.

Selecting Air Mode

Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to

this position for air pump operation only. Use

the Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting

this mode.

Selecting Sealant Mode

Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and

turn to this position to inject the Tire

Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the

tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose)

(6) when selecting this mode.

Tire Service Kit Components

1—SealantBottle 5—ModeSelectKnob

2 — Deflation Button 6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)

3—PressureGauge 7—AirPumpHose(Black)

4—PowerButton 8—PowerPlug(locatedonthebot-

tom side of the Tire Service Kit)

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 619

Using The Power Button

Push and release the Power Button (4) once to

turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release

the Power Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire

Service Kit.

Using The Deflation Button

Press the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air

pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.

Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions

• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and

Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at

the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to

assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to

“Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F)

“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.

• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one

tire application use and need to be replaced after each

use. Always replace these components immediately at

your original equipment vehicle dealer.

• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,

clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material

Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location

620 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once

the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and

properly discarded.

• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem

on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire

Service Kit.

• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate

bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,

located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the

bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,

or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air

Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob

(5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to

avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit

Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than ¼”

(6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle.

• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the

vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the

road to avoid the danger of being hit when using

the Tire Service Kit.

• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle

under the following circumstances:

– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately

1/4” (6 mm) or larger.

– If the tire has any sidewall damage.

– If the tire has any damage from driving with

extremely low tire pressure.

– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat

tire.

– If the wheel has any damage.

– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or

the wheel.

(Continued)

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 621

WARNING! (Continued)

• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or

heat source.

• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a

collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants

of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in

the place provided. Failure to follow these warn-

ings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to

you, your passengers, and others around you.

• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service

Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.

Tire Service Kit is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,

or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye,

and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with

plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or

skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there

is any contact with clothing.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In

case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a phy-

sician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of

reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth imme-

diately with plenty of water and drink plenty of

water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician

immediately.

Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit

(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:

1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s

Hazard Warning flashers.

2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the

deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.

This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to

reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat

622 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

on the ground. This will provide the best positioning

of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated

tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as

necessary to place the valve stem in this position

before proceeding.

3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or

in Gear (manual transmission) and turn Off the igni-

tion.

4. Set the parking brake.

(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:

1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the

Sealant Mode position.

2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap

from the fitting at the end of the hose.

3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the

deflated tire.

4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw

the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the

valve stem.

5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the

vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.

NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or

nails) from the tire.

Deflated Tire:

• Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire

Service Kit.

NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the

parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.

• After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white

fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the

Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 623

NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the

tire.

If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within0–10

seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):

1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service

Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve

stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.

Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.

Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant

Mode position and not Air Mode. Press the Power

Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.

2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt

power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if

available. Make sure the engine is running before

turning ON the Tire Service Kit.

3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous

use. Call for assistance.

NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and

the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air

Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).

If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the

Sealant Hose (6):

1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no

longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70

seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant

Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70

psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease

quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the

actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is

empty.

2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi-

ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to

operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure

indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side

624 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire

pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).

If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)

pressure within 15 minutes:

• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive

the vehicle further. Call for assistance.

NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Defla-

tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-

mended inflation pressure before continuing.

If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at

least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:

1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service

Kit.

2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the

Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instru-

ment panel.

3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the

valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of

the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle

storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Ve-

hicle.”

CAUTION!

• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get

hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.

• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end

of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant con-

tacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s inte-

rior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal

Tire Service Kit components which may cause

permanent damage to the kit.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 625

(D) Drive Vehicle:

Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,

drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure

distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.

Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).

WARNING!

Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.

Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after

using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90

km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to

follow this warning can result in injuries that are

serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others

around you.

(E) After Driving:

Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop

to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.

1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air

Mode position.

2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the

vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.

3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and

screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve

stem.

4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure

Gauge (3).

If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):

The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive

the vehicle further. Call for assistance.

626 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:

1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit

and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire

and loading information label on the driver-side door

opening.

NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Defla-

tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-

mended inflation pressure before continuing.

2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,

reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12

Volt outlet.

3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in

the vehicle.

4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the

earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire

service center.

5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument

panel after the tire has been repaired.

6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)

assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos-

sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace-

ment”.

NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-

rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed

using the Tire Service Kit.

(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:

1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).

2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the

recessed area under the sealant bottle.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 627

3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant

Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose

of it accordingly.

4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit

housing.

5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so

that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in

the front of the housing. Press the bottle into the

housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the

bottle is locked into place.

6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end

of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its

storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).

7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the

vehicle.

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the

vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off

the road to avoid the danger of being hit when

operating the jack or changing the wheel.

• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The

vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You

could be crushed. Never put any part of your body

under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get

under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center

where it can be raised on a lift.

• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is

on a jack.

(Continued)

628 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING! (Continued)

• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for

changing tires only. The jack should not be used to

lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle

should be jacked on a firm level surface only.

Avoid ice or slippery areas.

Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage

The jack, wheel chocks and spare tire are stowed under

the load floor behind the rear seat.

1. Open the liftgate.

2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle.

3. Remove the fastener securing the jack and spare tire.

Load Floor Handle

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 629

4. Remove the chocks.

5. Remove the scissors jack and wheel bolt wrench from

the spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to

the left to loosen the wheel bolt wrench, and remove

the wrench from the jack assembly.

NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack

with two attachment points. When the jack is partially

expanded, the tension between the two attachment

points holds the jack handle in place.

6. Remove the spare tire.

Jack And Spare Tire Fastener Jack And Tool Assembly

630 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or

hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-

hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in

the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire

repaired or replaced immediately.

Preparations For Jacking

1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the

edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery

areas.

WARNING!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the

vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off

the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack

or changing the wheel.

2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

3. Set the parking brake.

4. Place the shift lever into PARK (automatic transmis-

sion) or REVERSE (manual transmission).

5. Turn the ignition off to the LOCK position.

6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally

opposite of the jacking position. For

example, if changing the right front

tire, chock the left rear wheel.

NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle

when the vehicle is being jacked.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 631

Jacking Instructions

WARNING!

Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to

help prevent personal injury or damage to your

vehicle:

• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the

edge of the roadway as possible before raising the

vehicle.

• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

• Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to

be raised.

• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic

transmission in PARK.

• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a

jack.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a

jack.

• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If

you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a

service center where it can be raised on a lift.

• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for

lifting this vehicle during a tire change.

• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely

careful of motor traffic.

• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are

securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the

valve stem facing the ground.

632 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!

Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on

locations other than those indicated in the Jacking

Instructions for this vehicle.

1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt wrench.

2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center

cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench

to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the

vehicle.

3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench

to loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the

wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counter-

clockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the

ground.

4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to

the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly

engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill

flange, centering the jack saddle inside the cutout in

the sill cladding.

Jack Warning Label

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 633

Jacking Locations Rear Jacking Location

634 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Rear Jacking Engagement Point Front Jacking Location

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 635

5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire.

WARNING!

Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make

the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and

hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough

to remove the tire.

6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.

7. Remove the alignment pin from the jack assembly and

thread the pin into the wheel hub to assist in mounting

the spare tire.

8. Mount the spare tire.

CAUTION!

Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem

facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the

spare tire is mounted incorrectly.

Front Jacking Engagement Point

636 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

NOTE:

• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a

center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.

• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use

Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in

“Starting and Operating” for additional warnings,

cautions, and information about the spare tire, its

use, and operation.

9. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the

wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the

wheel bolts.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,

do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle

has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may

result in personal injury.

Mounting Spare Tire

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 637

10. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack

handle counterclockwise.

11. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the

wrench while at the end of the handle for increased

leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern

until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer

to “Torque Specifications” in this section for the

proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct

tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench

by your authorized dealer or at a service station.

12. Securely stow the jack, tools, chocks and flat tire.

Assembled Jack

638 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or

hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-

hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire

repaired or replaced immediately.

Road Tire Installation

1. Mount the road tire on the axle.

2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded

end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly

tighten the wheel bolts.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,

do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has

been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may

result in personal injury.

Stowed Tire, Jack And Chock

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 639

3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack

handle counterclockwise.

4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the

wrench while at the end of the handle for increased

leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until

each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to

“Torque Specifications” in this section for the proper

lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness,

have them checked with a torque wrench by your

authorized dealer or service station.

5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel

chocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assem-

bly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the

assembly using the means provided. Release the park-

ing brake before driving the vehicle.

6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque

with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are

properly seated against the wheel.

JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES

If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-

started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in

another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster

pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly

so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.

NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack

follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and

precautions.

CAUTION!

Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any

other booster source with a system voltage greater

than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,

alternator or electrical system may occur.

640 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!

Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.

It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.

Preparations For Jump-Start

The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the

engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.

NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a

protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the

positive battery post.

Positive Battery Post

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 641

WARNING!

• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-

ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the

ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by

moving fan blades.

• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch

bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent

electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.

• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your

skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is

flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or

sparks away from the battery.

1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission

into PARK (manual transmission in NEUTRAL) and

turn the ignition to LOCK.

2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-

cal accessories.

3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park

the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the

parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!

Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this

could establish a ground connection and personal

injury could result.

Jump-Starting Procedure

WARNING!

Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could

result in personal injury or property damage due to

battery explosion.

642 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these procedures could result in

damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle

or the discharged vehicle.

Connecting The Jumper Cables

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the

positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.

2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper

cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the

negative (-) post of the booster battery.

4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper

cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of

the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery

and the fuel injection system.

WARNING!

Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)

post of the discharged battery. The resulting electri-

cal spark could cause the battery to explode and

could result in personal injury. Only use the specific

ground point, do not use any other exposed metal

parts.

5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster

battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then

start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged

battery.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 643

6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables

in the reverse sequence:

Disconnecting The Jumper Cables

1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable

from the engine ground of the vehicle with the dis-

charged battery.

2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper

cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable

from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper

cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the

discharged battery.

If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle

you should have the battery and charging system in-

spected at your authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets

draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not

in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if

plugged in long enough without engine operation,

the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to

degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from

starting.

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE

If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it

can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the

steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the

front wheels. Press and hold the lock button on the shift

lever. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and

REVERSE, while gently pressing the accelerator.

644 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be

achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.

Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for

more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal

to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.

Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that

will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the

wheels or racing the engine.

CAUTION!

• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead

to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the

engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL

for at least one minute after every five rocking-

motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and

reduce the risk of transmission failure during pro-

longed efforts to free a stuck vehicle.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-

tween DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the

wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain

damage may result.

• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast

may lead to transmission overheating and failure.

It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels

above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-

mission shifting occurring).

NOTE: Press the “ESC Off” switch (if necessary), to place

the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial

Off” mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Elec-

tronic Brake Control” in “Starting And Operating” for

further information. Once the vehicle has been freed,

press the #ESC Off# switch again to restore “ESC On”

mode.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 645

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-

ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or

even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could

explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-

cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for

longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-

ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near

a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

RECOVERY STRAP — IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be included with a recovery strap.

Recovery straps do not act like traditional tow straps,

chains, or winch cables.

WARNING!

Recovery straps should only be used in emergencies

to rescue stranded vehicles. Only use Recovery straps

on vehicles that fit within the recommended GVW of

your recovery strap. Only attach recovery straps to

OE recommended anchor points or emergency tow-

ing anchor points. Never attach to tow ball or vehicle

tie down point, these are not designed for this

purpose. Never attach to vehicle steering, drive train,

or any other suspension components. NEVER pull a

strap over sharp edges or abrasive surfaces that can

damage the recovery strap. NEVER use a damaged

strap, it has reduced strength. DO NOT attempt to

repair straps. ONLY persons involved in the recovery

should be in either vehicle. No passengers. Anyone

inside the vehicles can be struck by strap recoil,

causing serious injury. MOVE bystanders at least 40

feet from the recovery area when using the recovery

strap.

646 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Using Recovery Strap

1. Review all warnings and instructions first.

2. Position the recovery vehicle.

3. Connect the recovery strap.

4. Add a recovery damper or blanket.

5. Clear the danger zone.

6. Safely and slowly start pulling.

7. Disconnect the recovery strap after both vehicle are

secure and parked.

SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE

If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be

moved out of the PARK position, you can use the

following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:

1. Turn the engine OFF.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully separate

the shifter bezel and boot assembly from the center

console bezel.

4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.

5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down into

the shift lever override access hole (at the right front

corner of the shift lever assembly), and push and hold

the override release lever down.

6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.

7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.

8. Reinstall the shift lever boot.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 647

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the

transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled 4x4 vehicles may also be towed as described under “Recreational

Towing” in the “Starting And Operating” section.

4X4 MODELS

Towing Condition Wheels OFF

the Ground

FWD MOD-

ELS

1–SPEED

POWER TRANSFER

UNIT

2–SPEED

POWER TRANSFER

UNIT

Flat Tow NONE NOT AL-

LOWED

NOT ALLOWED See instructions under

“Recreational Towing” in

“Starting And Operating”

• Transmission in PARK

• Power Transfer Unit in

NEUTRAL

• Tow in forward direc-

tion

648 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

4X4 MODELS

Towing Condition Wheels OFF

the Ground

FWD MOD-

ELS

1–SPEED

POWER TRANSFER

UNIT

2–SPEED

POWER TRANSFER

UNIT

Wheel Lift or Dolly

Tow

Rear NOT AL-

LOWED

NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED

Front OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED

Flatbed ALL BEST

METHOD

OK BEST METHOD

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent

damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other

equipment designed for this purpose, following equip-

ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is

mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to

main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers

or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding

vehicles under tow must be observed.

If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)

while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN

position, not the ACC position.

If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is

discharged, refer to “Shift Lever Override” in this section

for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK

so that the vehicle can be moved.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 649

CAUTION!

• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.

Vehicle damage may occur.

• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do

not attach to front or rear suspension components.

Damage to your vehicle may result from improper

towing.

Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models

The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with

all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.

If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must

towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a

towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front

wheels raised).

CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-

ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-

age from improper towing is not covered under the

New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

4x4 Models With 1–Speed Power Transfer Unit —

With Key Fob

The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels

OFF the ground.

Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed,

or with one end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on

a towing dolly.

650 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!

• DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its wheels

on the ground. Damage to the drivetrain will result.

• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal

damage to the transmission or power transfer unit

will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when

towing.

• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-

quirements can cause severe transmission and/or

power transfer unit damage. Damage from im-

proper towing is not covered under the New Ve-

hicle Limited Warranty.

4x4 Models With 2–Speed Power Transfer Unit —

With Key Fob

The manufacturer recommends towing with all four

wheels OFF the ground.

Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or

with one end of the vehicle raised and the opposite end

on a towing dolly.

If flatbed equipment is not available and the Power

Transfer Unit is operable, vehicles with a 2–speed Power

Transfer Unit may be towed (in the forward direction,

with ALL wheels on the ground), under the following

conditions:

• The Power Transfer Unit must be in NEUTRAL (N).

• If equipped with an Automatic transmission, it must

be in PARK.

• If equipped with a Manual transmission, it must be in

gear ( Not in Neutral).

Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting and Operat-

ing” for detailed instructions.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 651

CAUTION!

• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal

damage to the transmission or power transfer unit

will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when

towing.

• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-

quirements can cause severe transmission and/or

power transfer unit damage. Damage from im-

proper towing is not covered under the New Ve-

hicle Limited Warranty.

652 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

! ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L ..........655

! ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.2L ..........656

! ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .657

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............657

! EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

PROGRAMS ..........................658

! REPLACEMENT PARTS ..................659

! DEALER SERVICE ......................659

! MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ...........660

▫ Engine Oil ..........................661

▫ Engine Oil Filter ......................664

▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................664

▫ Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ...........668

▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ...............669

▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance .............670

▫ Body Lubrication .....................675

▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ...............676

▫ Adding Washer Fluid ..................683

▫ Exhaust System ......................684

▫ Cooling System ......................686

▫ Brake System ........................692

▫ Automatic Transmission ................694

▫ Sky Slider™ Top Care ..................696

▫ Appearance Care And Protection From

Corrosion ...........................698

! FUSES ..............................705

▫ Power Distribution Center ...............706

▫ Interior Fuses ........................719

! VEHICLE STORAGE ....................720

! REPLACEMENT BULBS .................721

! BULB REPLACEMENT ..................722

▫ Low Beam And High Beam Headlamps .....722

▫ Front Turn Signals And Front Side

Marker Lamps .......................724

▫ Front Fog Lamp ......................724

▫ Front Fog Lamp (Trailhawk) .............725

▫ Bodyside Mounted Back-up Lamp .........725

▫ Liftgate Mounted Back-up Lamp ..........726

▫ License Plate Lamp ....................726

! FLUID CAPACITIES ....................727

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS . .728

▫ Engine .............................728

▫ Chassis ............................730

654 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L

1 — Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 6 — Battery

3 — Oil Fill Cap 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 655

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.2L

1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

2 — Engine Oil Filter Access Cover 6 — Engine Oil Dipstick

3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Fill

4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Air Cleaner Filter

656 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard

diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors

the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic

transmission control systems. When these systems are

operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent

performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-

sions well within current government regulations.

If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system

will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It

will also store diagnostic codes and other information to

assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-

though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not

need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as

soon as possible.

CAUTION!

• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause

further damage to the emission control system. It

could also affect fuel economy and driveability.

The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions

tests can be performed.

• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,

severe catalytic converter damage and power loss

will soon occur. Immediate service is required.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel

filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a

“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver

Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle

Information (EVIC) or #Driver Information Display

(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 657

further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a

“clicking” sound is heard. This is an indication that the

fuel filler cap is properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard

Diagnostic System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for

further information.

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

PROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass

an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.

Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.

For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-

nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not

on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II

system is ready for testing.

Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II

system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently

serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-

ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not

ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which

you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if

your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the

following:

1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do

not crank or start the engine.

NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to

start this test over.

2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON

position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part

of a normal bulb check.

658 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will

happen:

• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then

return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF

the ignition or start the engine. This means that your

vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should

not proceed to the I/M station.

• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully

illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the

engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system

is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.

If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your

authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was

recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,

you may need to do nothing more than drive your

vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II

system to update. A recheck with the above test routine

may then indicate that the system is now ready.

Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is

ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal

vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced

before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail

your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine

running.

REPLACEMENT PARTS

Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled

maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-

sure the designed performance. Damage or failures

caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainte-

nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

DEALER SERVICE

Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-

nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service

operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 659

available which include detailed service information for

your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before

attempting any procedure yourself.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control

systems may void your warranty and could result in civil

penalties being assessed against you.

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a

motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you

have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If

you have any doubt about your ability to perform a

service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-

chanic.

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

The pages that follow contain the required maintenance

services determined by the engineers who designed your

vehicle.

Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed

“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components

which may require servicing or replacement in the future.

CAUTION!

• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-

form repairs and service when necessary could

result in more costly repairs, damage to other

components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-

mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions

examined by an authorized dealer or qualified

repair center.

(Continued)

660 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids

that protect the performance and durability of your

vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-

vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-

nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,

transmission or air conditioning. Such damage is

not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

If a flush is needed because of component malfunc-

tion, use only the specified fluid for the flushing

procedure.

Engine Oil

Checking Oil Level

To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must

be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at

regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to

check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a

fully warmed up engine is shut off.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will

improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always

maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the

dipstick. Adding 1 quart (0.9 L) of oil when the reading is

at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at

the top of the safe zone on these engines.

CAUTION!

Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause

aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage

your engine.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 661

Change Engine Oil

The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is

time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-

tion.

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-

tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve

months, whichever occurs first.

Engine Oil Selection

For best performance and maximum protection under all

types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only

recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet

the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.

American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil

Identification Symbol

This symbol means that the oil has

been certified by the American

Petroleum Institute (API). The

manufacturer only recommends

API Certified engine oils.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the

chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is

not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

662 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.4L Engine

MOPAR® SAE 0W-20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil®

or Shell Helix® is recommended for all operating tem-

peratures. This engine oil improves low temperature

starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler

cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity

grade for your engine.

Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-

fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-

ber should not be used.

Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.2L Engine

MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil®

or Shell Helix® is recommended for all operating tem-

peratures. This engine oil improves low temperature

starting and vehicle fuel economy. The engine oil filler

cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for

your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap

location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining

Your Vehicle” for further information.

Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-

fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-

ber should not be used.

Synthetic Engine Oils

You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-

mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-

mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes

are followed.

Materials Added To Engine Oil

The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-

dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to

the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its

performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-

tives.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 663

Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters

Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and

oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,

indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the

environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service

station or governmental agency for advice on how and

where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in

your area.

Engine Oil Filter

The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter

at every engine oil change.

NOTE: For best access to the oil filter, a drive on hoist

should be used instead of a chassis hoist.

Engine Oil Filter Selection

This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-

able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The

quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only

high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient

service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are high quality oil

filters and are recommended.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals.

NOTE: Be sure to follow the “dusty or off-road condi-

tions” maintenance interval if applicable.

WARNING!

The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can

provide a measure of protection in the case of engine

backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air

cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary

for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is

near the engine compartment before starting the

(Continued)

664 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,

hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in

serious personal injury.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection

The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters

varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be

used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air

cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-

mended.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and

Replacement

Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or debris, if

you find evidence of either dirt or debris you should

change your air cleaner filter.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal

1. Remove the screws from the air cleaner cover.

Air Cleaner Filter Cover

1 — Clean Air Hose Clamp

2—AirHose

3—Screws

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 665

2. Push in on the quick connect clip with your thumb

and remove by pulling hose away from air cleaner

filter cover.

3. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter.

Air Cleaner Air Hose

1 — Air Filter Cleaner Cover

2—AirHose

3 — Quick Connect Clip

Open Air Cleaner Filter Assembly

1 — Air Cleaner Cover

2 — Air Cleaner Filter

666 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

4. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing

assembly.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation

NOTE: Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is

present before replacing the air filter element.

1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing

assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface

facing downward.

2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing assembly

locating tabs.

3. Install screws to secure the air cleaner cover to the

housing assembly and install air hose.

Air Cleaner Filter

1 — Air Cleaner Filter

2 — Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 667

Accessory Drive Belt Inspection

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt

with vehicle running.

• When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-

connect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature

controlled and can start at any time regardless of

ignition switch position. You could be injured by

the moving fan blades.

• You can be badly injured working on or around a

motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you

have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If

you have any doubt about your ability to perform a

service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-

chanic.

When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that

run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are

considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt.

However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not

normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be

replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive

wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.

Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)

668 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Conditions that would require replacement:

• Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt

body)

• Rib or belt wear

• Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)

• Belt slips

• “Groove jumping# (belt does not maintain correct

position on pulley)

• Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before

new belt is installed)

• Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is

heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)

Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component

such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully

inspected for damage and proper alignment.

Belt replacement on some models requires the use of

special tools, we recommend having your vehicle ser-

viced at an authorized dealer.

Maintenance-Free Battery

Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.

You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-

tenance required.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 669

WARNING!

• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can

burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid

to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean

over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid

splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-

diately with large amounts of water. Refer to

“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In

Emergencies” for further information.

• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep

flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use

a booster battery or any other booster source with

an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable

clamps to touch each other.

• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories

contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands

after handling.

CAUTION!

• It is essential when replacing the cables on the

battery that the positive cable is attached to the

positive post and the negative cable is attached to

the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive

(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the

battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the

terminal posts and free of corrosion.

• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the

vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-

fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not

use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.

Air Conditioner Maintenance

For best possible performance, your air conditioner should

be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the

start of each warm season. This service should include

cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.

Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.

670 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants

approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-

tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are

flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other

unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the

system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to

Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,

for further warranty information.

• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant

under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal

injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant

or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected

should be done by an experienced technician.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning

system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-

tioning components. Such damage is not covered by

the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If

Equipped

R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-

carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental

Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-

ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning

service be performed by authorized dealer or other

service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system

PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 671

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf

— If Equipped

HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro-

fluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmen-

tal Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product

with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However,

the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning ser-

vice be performed by authorized dealer or other service

facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system

PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.

Air Conditioning Filter Replacement (A/C Air

Filter)

WARNING!

Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is

operating or personal injury may result.

The A/C air filter is located in front of the evaporator on

the lower right of center console. Perform the following

procedure to replace the filter:

1. Remove the passenger side console closeout cover.

672 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

2. Pull the console closeout cover rearward to disengage

the front retaining tab and remove the cover.

3. Pull down the passenger hush panel under the dash

panel

Console Closeout Panel Hush Panel

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 673

4. Remove the filter door by pushing down the tab on the

top of the door to release the cover then rotate the door

out and lift up.

5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of

the housing. Take note of the air filter position indica-

tors.

Air Filter Cover Location A/C Air Filter

674 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

6. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position

indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.

CAUTION!

The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to

indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure

to properly install the filter will result in the need to

replace it more often.

7. Install the passenger side hush panel under the dash

panel and console closeout.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals.

Body Lubrication

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as

seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,

tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should

be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,

such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy

operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to

the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned

should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after

lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.

Particular attention should also be given to hood latching

components to ensure proper function. When performing

other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-

nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.

The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a

year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small

amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®

Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 675

Windshield Wiper Blades

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the

windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a

mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-

tions of salt or road film.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods

may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use

washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt

from a dry windshield.

Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from

the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with

petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-

ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor

performance of blades may be present with chattering,

marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions

are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces-

sary.

The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected

periodically, not just when wiper performance problems

are experienced. This inspection should include the fol-

lowing points:

• Wear Or Uneven Edges

• Foreign Material

• Hardening Or Cracking

• Deformation Or Fatigue

If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the

affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not

attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.

676 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation

CAUTION!

Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against

the glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass

may be damaged.

1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the

glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.

Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position

1—Wiper

2 — Release Tab

3—WiperArm

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 677

2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip

up the release tab on the wiper blade and while

holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper

blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.

Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position

1—WiperBlade

2 — Release Tab

3—WiperArm

678 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper

blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm

with one hand and separating the wiper blade from

the wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper

blade toward the right side of the vehicle to separate

the wiper blade from the wiper arm).

4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.

Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm

1—WiperBlade

2—WiperArm

3 — Release Tab

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 679

Installing The Front Wipers

1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm

is in the full up position.

2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the

wiper arm with the wiper release tab open and the

blade side of the wiper facing up and away from the

windshield.

3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the

opening in the wiper blade under the release tab.

4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper

arm and rotate the wiper blade until it is flush against

the wiper arm. Fold down the latch release tab and

snap it into its locked position. Latch engagement will

be accompanied by an audible click.

5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.

Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation

1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass

to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the

glass.

NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the

glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first.

Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without

unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the

vehicle.

680 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.

Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position

1—WiperArmPivotCap

2—WiperArm

Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position

1—WiperArmPivotCap

2—WiperArm

3—WiperBlade

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 681

3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, grasp

the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest to wiper

arm with your right hand. With your left hand hold

the wiper arm as you pull the wiper blade away from

the wiper arm past its stop far enough to unsnap the

wiper blade pivot pin from the receptacle on the end

of the wiper arm.

NOTE: Resistance will be accompanied by an audible

snap.

4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper blade, move

the wiper blade upward and away from the wiper arm

to disengage.

Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm

1—WiperBlade

2—WiperBladePivotPin

3—WiperArm

4 — Wiper Arm Receptacle

682 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass.

Installing The Rear Wiper

1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass

to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the

glass.

NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the

glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first.

Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without

unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the

vehicle.

2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.

3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on

the end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of the

wiper arm with one hand, and press the wiper blade

flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into place.

4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the

wiper arm pivot cap back into place.

Adding Washer Fluid

The windshield and rear window washers share the same

fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is located in the front

of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid

level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir

with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze)

and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the

residual water.

When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some

washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe

clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.

To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system

in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or

exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 683

rating information can be found on most washer fluid

containers.

WARNING!

Commercially available windshield washer solvents

are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care

must be exercised when filling or working around

the washer solution.

Exhaust System

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into

the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust

system.

If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;

or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;

or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;

have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-

haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-

aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams

or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep

into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the

exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised

for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

WARNING!

• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain

carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and

odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious

and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing

CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things

To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further

information.

(Continued)

684 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park

over materials that can burn. Such materials might

be grass or leaves coming into contact with your

exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-

hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-

tact anything that can burn.

CAUTION!

• The catalytic converter requires the use of un-

leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the

effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control

device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-

mance and cause serious damage to the engine.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your

vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.

In the event of engine malfunction, particularly

involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of

performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.

Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe

malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,

resulting in possible damage to the converter and

vehicle.

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-

verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-

portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure

proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst

damage.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 685

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control

systems can result in civil penalties being assessed

against you.

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning

engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe

and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop

the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.

Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-

tions, should be obtained immediately.

To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-

age:

• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,

when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in

motion.

• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the

vehicle.

• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires

disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic

testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough

idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.

Cooling System

WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hot engine

coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If

you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,

do not open the hood until the radiator has had time

to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure

cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

686 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Engine Coolant Checks

Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12

months (before the onset of freezing weather, where

applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the

system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with

fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) by an

authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser

for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by

gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically

down the face of the condenser.

Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,

cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at

the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the

entire system for leaks.

With the engine at normal operating temperature (but

not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for

proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of

engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.

If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-

freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery

bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE

CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.

Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill

NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant

properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead

to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is

needed to be added to the system please contact your

local authorized dealer.

If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains

visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and

flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS-

12106).

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 687

Selection Of Coolant

Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in

“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

CAUTION!

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than

specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-

gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine

damage and may decrease corrosion protection.

Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-

ant is different and should not be mixed with

Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-

gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-

ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine

coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling

system in an emergency, the cooling system will

need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an

authorized dealer as soon as possible.

• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine

coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional

rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not

be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and

may plug the radiator.

• This vehicle has not been designed for use with

propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).

Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-

tifreeze) is not recommended.

Adding Coolant

Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine

coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that

allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool-

ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000

688 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc-

ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that

you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform-

ing to MS-12106) throughout the life of your vehicle.

Please review these recommendations for using Organic

Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)

that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan-

dard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):

• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant

10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive

Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler

Material Standard MS-12106.

• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant

that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan-

dard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concen-

trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below

−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.

• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-

ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant

(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water

will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the

engine cooling system.

Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-

tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-

cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where

the vehicle is operated.

NOTE:

• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant

properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could

lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is

needed to be added to the system please contact your

local authorized dealer.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 689

• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-

mended and can result in cooling system damage. If

HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,

have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with

OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon as

possible.

Cooling System Pressure Cap

The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine

coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant

(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant

recovery tank.

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any

accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

WARNING!

• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add

engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is

overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool

an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to

build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding

or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the

system is hot or under pressure.

• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one

specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-

gine damage may result.

690 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant

Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is

a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check

with your local authorities to determine the disposal

rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-

mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based

engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in

puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek

emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground

spills immediately.

Coolant Level

The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for

determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the

engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant

(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges

indicated on the bottle.

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is

no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap

unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze

point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant

of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is

satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once

a month.

When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to

maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets

the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-

12106 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not

overfill.

Points To Remember

NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/

kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming

from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-

mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high

humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-

ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine

coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 691

If an examination of your engine compartment shows no

evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be

safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.

• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in

the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-

freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant

expansion bottle must also be protected against freez-

ing.

• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are

required, the cooling system should be pressure tested

for leaks.

• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a

minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS-

12106) and distilled water for proper corrosion protec-

tion of your engine which contains aluminum compo-

nents.

• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow

hoses are not kinked or obstructed.

• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is

equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the

condenser clean.

• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter

operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install

ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may

result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)

performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis-

sions.

Brake System

In order to assure brake system performance, all brake

system components should be inspected periodically.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals.

692 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and

possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or

riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally

high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and

possible brake damage. You would not have your full

braking capacity in an emergency.

Brake Master Cylinder

The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when

performing under hood services or immediately if the

“Brake Warning Light” is illuminated.

Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before

removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the

fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake

fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be

expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level

should be checked when pads are replaced. However,

low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup

may be needed.

Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-

fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-

taining Your Vehicle” for further information.

WARNING!

• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake

fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine

Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further

information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid

can severely damage your brake system and/or

impair its performance. The proper type of brake

fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the

original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder

reservoir.

(Continued)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 693

WARNING! (Continued)

• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or

moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has

been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master

cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake

fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the

air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may

cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-

longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.

This could result in a collision.

• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in

spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing

the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also

damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be

taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate

the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be

damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.

This could result in a collision.

Automatic Transmission

Selection Of Lubricant

It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to

ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use

only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.

Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this

section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain

the transmission fluid at the correct level using the

recommended fluid.

694 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any

transmission; only the approved lubricant should be

used.

CAUTION!

Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-

turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration

in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter

shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine

Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.

Special Additives

The manufacturer strongly recommends against using

any special additives in the transmission. Automatic

Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and

its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-

tives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the

transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use

of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using

transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as

the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-

nents. Such damage is not covered by the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Fluid Level Check

The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not

require adjustment under normal operating conditions.

Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the

transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can

check your transmission fluid level using special service

tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunc-

tion, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 695

the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the ve-

hicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe

transmission damage.

CAUTION!

If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-

rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam-

age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper

tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.

Fluid And Filter Changes

Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at

the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the

life of the vehicle.

Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. How-

ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes

contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is

disassembled for any reason.

Sky Slider™ Top Care

Immediate removal of any contaminant is recommended.

Regular washing of the top will enhance its life and

appearance, and make successive cleaning easier. Do not

subject the top to excessive heat. Frequently vacuum the

top and tracks. Periodically wipe dust and dirt from the

top and inside of the tracks by hand with an alcohol

dampened cloth.

Washing

Hand washing or an automatic car wash with a soft cloth

system is preferred.

CAUTION!

Avoid pointing a high-pressure hand held spray

wand directly at the sides of the top, as this can

damage the seal and force water past the weather

strips.

696 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

General Cleaning

Careful vacuuming of the top before washing is helpful

in removing dust and other foreign particles.

If Hand Washing:

• Wash in partial shade instead of direct sun.

• Wet the entire vehicle before washing the top.

• Wash the top with a soft, natural bristle scrub brush,

and a mild soap solution such as liquid dish washing

soap. Do not use detergent.

• Scrub in all directions, covering an area of about two

square feet at a time. Avoid heavy scrubbing.

• Rinse the entire vehicle with water to remove all soap

and dirt from the top fabric and to prevent streaking

on painted and chrome surfaces.

• Allow the top to dry before opening. Vacuuming the

top with a wet/dry shop vacuum will decrease the

tops drying time, ensure removal of all dirt, and delete

streaks in the material.

• Multiple cleanings may be necessary to remove stub-

born stains. If stains persist, contact your local autho-

rized dealership for further suggestions.

CAUTION!

Never use an abrasive type cleaner or bleaches.

Cleaners should not contain silicones, organic sol-

vents, petroleum distillates, or plasticizers. Always

wait until the top is thoroughly dry before opening

it.

Additional Cleaning Procedure

For additional cleaning assistance in removing stubborn

stains, apply MOPAR® Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner or

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 697

equivalent to the complete stain, extending 2 inches (50

mm) beyond the stain. With a soft bristle brush, scrub in

all directions over the stain. Avoid heavy scrubbing.

Rinse the area with warm water. If the stain is still

apparent, repeat the cleaning procedure. When the stain

is no longer showing, rinse the complete top with warm

water. Let the top dry before opening it.

Protection

For appearance purposes, you may wish to protect the

acrylic (cloth) top periodically. A fabric protectant such as

Scotchguard® is suggested. The top should be clean and

dry before application of the protectant.

CAUTION!

Avoid getting Scotchguard® on the surrounding

weather strips, moldings, paint, or glass. Damage to

these items might occur.

Weather Strip Care

Lubricate the weather strips periodically with MOPAR®

Weather Strip Lubricant or equivalent, to keep them soft

and pliable.

Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion

Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-

graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads

passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on

trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly

corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,

which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,

road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme

hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will

have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-

body protection.

698 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

The following maintenance recommendations will enable

you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion

resistance built into your vehicle.

What Causes Corrosion?

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of

paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.

The most common causes are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.

• Stone and gravel impact.

• Insects, tree sap and tar.

• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.

• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

Washing

• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-

hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild

car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with

clear water.

• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-

lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug

and Tar Remover to remove.

• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®

Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect

your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.

• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing

that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 699

CAUTION!

• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials

such as steel wool or scouring powder that will

scratch metal and painted surfaces.

•

Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)

can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.

Special Care

• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive

near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once

a month.

• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges

of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and

open.

• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,

touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is

considered the responsibility of the owner.

• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar

cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,

have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The

cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of

the owner.

• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,

de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well

packaged and sealed.

• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider

mud or stone shields behind each wheel.

• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as

possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to

match the color of your vehicle.

700 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care

• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and

chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly

with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.

• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use

MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or

Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,

abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma-

nently damage this finish and such damage is not cov-

ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY

MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used

on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain

this finish.

CAUTION!

Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,

or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These

products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.

Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions

or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s pro-

tective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or

equivalent is recommended.

Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If

Equipped

Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-

ner:

• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting

with a clean, dry towel.

• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 701

• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a

mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove

stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.

• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose

Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use

a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.

• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of

protectants on Stain Repel products.

Interior Care

Instrument Panel Cover

The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,

which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not

use protectants or other products, which may cause

undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to

restore the low glare surface.

Cleaning Interior Trim

Clean interior trim with a damp cloth and MOPAR®

Total Clean or equivalent, and if necessary, follow with

MOPAR® Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent. Do not

use harsh cleaners or Armor All®. Use MOPAR® Total

Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery.

Cleaning Leather Upholstery

MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom-

mended for leather upholstery.

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular

cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt

can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery

and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.

Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth

and MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be

taken to avoid soaking leather upholstery with any

liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,

702 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean

leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is

not required to maintain the original condition.

WARNING!

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.

Many are potentially flammable, and if used in

closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.

Cleaning Headlights

Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog

lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone break-

age than glass headlights.

Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore

different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and

reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To

remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-

lowed by rinsing.

Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel

wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.

Glass Surfaces

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis

with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial

household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type

cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-

dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear

quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do

not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may

scratch the elements.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 703

When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the

towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner

directly on the mirror.

Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses

The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are

molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care

must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.

1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be

used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive

cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp

rag.

2. Dry with a soft cloth.

Seat Belt Maintenance

Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical

solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.

Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.

If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or

lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to

wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.

Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the

buckles do not work properly.

704 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and

leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system

periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.

Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do

not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt

assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they

have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-

bing, etc.).

FUSES

WARNING!

•

When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-

priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as

the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another

fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown

fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure

to use proper fuses may result in serious personal

injury, fire and/or property damage.

• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition

is off and that all the other services are switched off

and/or disengaged.

• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-

rized dealer.

(Continued)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 705

WARNING! (Continued)

• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air

bag system, braking system), power unit systems

(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system

blows, contact an authorized dealer.

Power Distribution Center

The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine

compartment near the battery. This center contains car-

tridge fuses, mini-fuses and relays. A label that identifies

each component is printed on the inside of the cover.

Power Distribution Center

706 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description

F06 – – Not Used

F07 15 Amp Blue – Powertrain Control Module -

PCM

F08 25 Amp Clear – Engine Control Module (ECM)

F09 – – Not Used

F10 20 Amp Yellow – Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – If

Equipped

F11 – – Not Used

F12 20 Amp Yellow – Brake Vacuum Pump - If

Equipped

F13 10 Amp Red – Engine Control Module (ECM)

F14 10 Amp Red – Drivetrain Control Module

(DTCM) / Power Take-Off Unit

(PTU) / Brake System Module

(BSM) – If Equipped

F15 – – Not Used

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 707

Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description

F16 20 Amp Yellow – Powertrain

F17 – – Not Used

F18 – – Not Used

F19 – 40 Amp Green Starter Solenoid

F20 10 Amp Red – A/C Compressor Clutch

F21 – – Not Used

F22 5 Amp Tan – Radiator Fan

F23 70 Amp Tan – Body Controller Module (BCM)

- Feed 2

F23 50 Amp Red – Voltage Stability Module (VSM)

Feed #2 - If Equipped with

Stop/Start Engine Option

F24 20 Amp Yellow – Rear Wiper — If Equipped

with Stop/Start Engine Option

708 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description

F25B 20 Amp Yellow – Front Washer — If Equipped

with Stop/Start Engine Option

F26 – 30 Amp Pink Fuel Heater - Diesel Only

F27 – – Not Used

F28 15 Amp Blue – Transmission Control Module

(TCM)

F29 – – Not Used

F30 10 Amp Red – Engine Control Module

(ECM)/(EPS)/(PCM)

F31 – – Not Used

F32 – – Not Used

F33 – – Not Used

F34 – – Not Used

F35 – – Not Used

F36 – – Not Used

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 709

Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description

F37 – – Not Used

F38 – – Not Used

F38 – 60 Amp Yellow Glow Plugs (Diesel Only) - If

Equipped

F39 – 40 Amp Green HVAC Blower Motor

F40 – 20 Amp Blue Trailer Tow Park Light - If

Equipped

F40 – 30 Amp Pink Headlamp Washer Pump - If

Equipped

F41 – 60 Amp Yellow Body Controller Module (BCM)

- Feed 1

F41 – 50 Amp Red Voltage Stability Module - Feed

1 - If Equipped with Stop/Start

Engine Option

F42 – 30 Amp Pink Trailer Tow Electric Brake Mod-

ule

710 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description

F43 20 Amp Yellow – Fuel Pump Motor

F44 – 30 Amp Pink Trailer Tow / 7-Way Connector

- If Equipped

F45 – 30 Amp Pink Passenger Door Module (PDM)

- If Equipped

F46 – 25 Amp Clear Sunroof / Skyslider - If

Equipped

F47 – 30 Amp Pink Drivetrain Control Module

(DTCM)

F48 – 30 Amp Pink Driver Door Module - If

Equipped

F49 – 30 Amp Pink Power Inverter (115V A/C) - If

Equipped

F50 – 30 Amp Pink Power Liftgate - If Equipped

F51 – – Not Used

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 711

Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description

F52 – 30 Amp Pink Front Wipers - If Equipped

with Stop/Start Engine Option

F53 – 30 Amp Pink Brake System Module & Valves

F54 – 30 Amp Pink Body Control Module (BCM)

Feed 3

F55 10 Amp Red – Blind Spot Sensors / Compass

/ Rearview Camera / Trunk

Lamp With Flashlamp Charger

- If Equipped

F56 15 Amp Blue – Ignition Node Module

(IGNM)/KIN/RF Hub/Electric

Steering Column Lock (ESL)

F57 20 Amp Yellow – Trailer Tow Lights Left - If

Equipped

F58 10 Amp Red – Occupant Classification Module

712 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description

F59 – 30 Amp Pink Drivetrain Control Module

(DTCM) If Equipped

F60 20 Amp Yellow – Power Outlet - Center Console

F61 20 Amp Yellow – Trailer Tow Lights Right– If

Equipped

F62 20 Amp Yellow – Windshield de-icer - If

Equipped

F63 20 Amp Yellow – Front Heated Seats - If

Equipped

F64 20 Amp Yellow – Heated Steering Wheel – If

Equipped

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 713

Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description

F65 10 Amp Red – In Car Temperature Sensor /

Humidity Sensor / Driver As-

sist System Module (DASM) /

Park Assist (PAM) - If

Equipped With Stop/Start

option

F66 15 Amp Blue – HVAC (ECC) / Instrument

Panel Cluster (IPC)

F67 10 Amp Red – In Car Temperature Sensor /

Humidity Sensor / Driver As-

sist System Module (DASM) /

Park Assist (PAM) - If Not

Equipped With Stop/Start

Option

F68 – – Not Used

714 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description

F69 10 Amp Red – Power Transfer Unit Switch

(TSBM) / Active Grill Shutter

(AGS) - If Equipped

F70 5 Amp Tan – Intelligent Battery Sensor If

Equipped with Stop/Start

Engine Option

F71 20 Amp Yellow – HID Headlamp Right if

Equipped with Stop/Start

Engine Option

F72 10 Amp Red – Heated Mirrors - If Equipped

F73 – 20 Amp Blue Trailer Tow Back Up - If

Equipped

F74 – 30 Amp Pink Rear Defroster

F75 20 Amp Yellow – Cigar Lighter

F76 20 Amp Yellow – Rear Differential Module

(RDM) - If Equipped

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 715

Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description

F77 10 Amp Red – Fuel Door Release/Brake Pedal

Switch

F78 10 Amp Red – Diagnostic Port

F79 10 Amp Red – Integrated Center Stack (ICS) /

HVAC / Aux Switch Bank

Module (ASBM) / Instrument

Panel Cluster (IPC)

F80 20 Amp Yellow – Radio / CD - If Equipped

F81 – – Not Used

F82 – – Not Used

F83 – 20 Amp Blue Engine Controller Module

(Gas)

F84 – 30 Amp Pink Electric Park Brake (EPB) - Left

F85 – – Not Used

F86 20 Amp Yellow – Horns - If Equipped With

Stop/Start Engine Option

716 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description

F87A 20 Amp Yellow – HID Headlamp Left - If

Equipped with Stop/Start En-

gine Option

F88 15 Amp Blue – Collision Mitigation Module

(CMM) / Electrochromatic Mir-

ror / Smart Camera Module -

If Equipped

F89 10 Amp Red – Headlamp Leveling - If

Equipped

F90 – – Not Used

F91 20 Amp Yellow – Power Outlet Rear

F92 – – Not Used

F93 – 40 Amp Green Brake System Module (BSM) -

Pump Motor

F94 – 30 Amp Pink Electric Park Brake (EPB) -

Right

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 717

Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description

F95 10 Amp Red – Electrochromatic Mirror / Rain

Sensor / Sunroof - If Equipped

/ Passenger Window Switch /

Power Outlet Console

F96 10 Amp Red – Occupant Restraint Controller

(ORC) / (Airbag)

F97 10 Amp Red – Occupant Restraint Controller

(ORC) / (Airbag)

F98 25 Amp Clear – Audio Amplifier - If Equipped

F99 – – Not Used

F100 – – Not Used

718 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Interior Fuses

The interior fuse panel is located in the passenger com-

partment on the left side dash panel under the instru-

ment panel.

Cavity Blade Fuse Description

F13 15 Amp Blue Low Beam Left

F32 10 Amp Red Interior Lighting

F36 10 Amp Red Intrusion Module/Siren – If Equipped

F38 20 Amp Yellow Deadbolt All Unlock

F43 20 Amp Yellow Washer Pump Front

F48 25 Amp Clear Fog Lamp Rear Left/Right – If Equipped

F49 7.5 Amp Brown Lumbar Support

F50 7.5 Amp Brown Wireless Charging Pad If Equipped

F51 10 Amp Red Driver Window Switch/Power Mirrors – If Equipped

F53 7.5 Amp Brown UCI Port (USB & AUX)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 719

Cavity Blade Fuse Description

F89 10 Amp Red Door Locks – Driver Unlock

F91 7.5 Amp Brown Fog Lamp Front Left

F92 7.5 Amp Brown Fog Lamp Front Right

F93 10 Amp Red Low Beam Right

VEHICLE STORAGE

If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21

days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.

You may:

• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.

• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of

service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the

air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes

in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will

ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the

possibility of compressor damage when the system is

started again.

720 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

REPLACEMENT BULBS

Interior Bulbs

Bulb Number

Cargo Lamp TL212–2

Overhead Console Lamp PLW214–2A

Reading Lamp WL212–2

Exterior Bulbs

Bulb Number

Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Halogen) Headlamps HIR2LL

Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Xenon) Headlamps D3S (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)

Front Park/Daytime Running Lamps LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)

Front Turn Signal Lamps WY21W or 7440NA

Front Fog Lamps H11LL

Front Side Marker Lamps 194

Front Fog Lamps (Trailhawk) PSX24W

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 721

Bulb Number

Rear Tail/Turn/Stop Lamps LED ( Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)

Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)

Back-Up Lamps W16W or 921

License Plate Lamp W5W

BULB REPLACEMENT

NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-

spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric

conditions change to allow the condensation to change

back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually

accelerate the clearing process.

Low Beam And High Beam Headlamps

Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge (HID)

Headlamps — If Equipped

The headlamps contain a type of high voltage discharge

light source. High voltage can remain in the circuit even

with the headlamp switch off. Because of this, you should

not attempt to service a HID headlamp light source

yourself. If an HID headlamp light source fails, take your

vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.

NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,

when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to

the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after

approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.

722 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of

HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned

ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electro-

cution if not serviced properly. See your authorized

dealer for service.

Bi-Halogen Headlamps

1. Remove the 3 hex head screws from the wheel liner.

2. Pull the exterior edge of the liner towards the tire to

gain access to the headlamp bulb cap.

3. Firmly grasp the cap and rotate it counterclockwise to

unlock it.

4. Firmly grasp the bulb and connector assembly and

rotate counterclockwise to remove from the housing.

5. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector and

then connect the replacement bulb.

CAUTION!

Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil

contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the

bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the

bulb with rubbing alcohol.

6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the

headlamp housing and rotate clockwise to lock it in

place.

7. Install the bulb cap in the headlamp housing and

rotate clockwise to lock it in place.

8. Install the 3 hex head screws into the wheel liner.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 723

Front Turn Signals And Front Side Marker Lamps

1. Open the hood.

NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be

necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the upper lamp

assembly on the passenger side of the vehicle.

2. Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun-

terclockwise, and then remove the bulb and socket

assembly from the lamp housing.

3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace-

ment bulb.

4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing,

and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place.

5. Re-install air cleaner filter housing, if removed.

Front Fog Lamp

1. Remove the 3 hex head screws from the wheel liner.

2. Pull the exterior edge of the liner towards the tire to

gain access to the bulb.

3. Rotate the bulb’s socket counterclockwise, and remove

the bulb and socket assembly from the fog lamp

housing.

4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace-

ment bulb.

CAUTION!

Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil

contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the

bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the

bulb with rubbing alcohol.

5. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the into the

fog lamp housing, and rotate the connector clockwise

to lock it in place.

724 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

6. Install the 3 hex head screws into the wheel liner.

Front Fog Lamp (Trailhawk)

1. Unlock lower access door in wheel liner.

2. Reach behind the fog lamp housing to access the bulb.

3. Squeeze the two tabs on the side of the bulb socket and

pull straight out from the fog lamp.

4. Disconnect the wire harness from the bulb.

CAUTION!

Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil

contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the

bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the

bulb with rubbing alcohol.

5. Reconnect the wiring harness to the new bulb and

reinstall by inserting the new bulb straight into the fog

lamp housing until it locks in place.

6. Lock the lower door in the wheel liner.

Bodyside Mounted Back-up Lamp

1. Open the liftgate.

2. Remove the screws that fasten the tail lamp housing to

the vehicle.

3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to

disengage the lamp from the vehicle.

4. Disconnect the electrical connector.

5. Twist the socket counterclockwise and remove from

housing.

6. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.

7. Replace the bulb and install the socket.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 725

8. Reconnect the electrical connector.

9. Reinstall the tail lamp housing and screws.

10. Close the liftgate.

Liftgate Mounted Back-up Lamp

1. Open the liftgate.

2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the

lower trim from the liftgate.

3. Once the trim is loose, pull it back exposing the trim

panel.

4. Using a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver, open the

trim panel exposing the back of the liftgate lamp.

5. Disconnect the electrical connector.

6. Twist the socket counterclockwise and remove from

lamp.

7. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.

8. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket.

9. Connect the electrical connector.

10. Reinstall the trim panel and the lower trim.

11. Close the liftgate.

License Plate Lamp

1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward the locking

tab on the side of the lamp assembly and pull down on

the lamp assembly for removal.

2. Pull bulb from socket, replace, and reinstall the lamp

assembly into place ensuring the locking tab is secure.

726 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

FLUID CAPACITIES

U.S. Metric

Fuel (Approximate)

2.4L and 3.2L Engines 15.8 Gallons 60 Liters

Engine Oil With Filter

2.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters

3.2 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters

Cooling System*

2.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant

10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)

7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters

3.2 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant

10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)

10 Quarts 9.5 Liters

* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 727

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile

Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the require-

ments of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.

Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil, meeting the

requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Penn-

zoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.

Engine Oil – 3.2L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the

requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Penn-

zoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.

Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter.

Spark Plugs – 2.4L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs.

Spark Plugs – 3.2L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs.

Fuel Selection – 2.4L/3.2L En-

gines

87 Octane

728 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than

specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-

gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine

damage and may decrease corrosion protection.

Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-

ant is different and should not be mixed with

Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-

gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-

ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine

coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling

system in an emergency, the cooling system will

need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh

OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an

authorized dealer as soon as possible.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine

coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional

rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not

be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and

may plug the radiator.

• This vehicle has not been designed for use with

propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).

Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-

tifreeze) is not recommended.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 729

Chassis

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Automatic Transmission Use only MOPAR® ZF 8&9 Speed ATF™ Automatic

Transmission Fluid, or equivalent.

Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or

performance of your transmission.

Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 Brake Fluid,

SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake

fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only

recommended brake fluids.

730 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

CONTENTS

! MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE .............732 ▫ Maintenance Chart.....................734

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change

indicator system. The oil change indicator system will

remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for

scheduled maintenance.

Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change

indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-

vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions

such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or

cold ambient temperatures will influence when the “Oil

Change Required” message is displayed. Severe Operat-

ing Conditions can cause the change oil message to

illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last

reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,

within the next 500 miles (805 km).

Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator

message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a

scheduled oil change is performed by someone other

than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by

referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Dis-

play (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”

for further information.

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-

vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,

whichever comes first.

Severe Duty All Models

Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle

is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This

type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.

Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:

• Check engine oil level.

• Check windshield washer fluid level.

732 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or

damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,

even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns

on.

• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and

brake master cylinder, fill as needed.

• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.

Required Maintenance Intervals.

Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following

page for the required maintenance intervals.

At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil

Change Indicator System:

• Change oil and filter

• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregu-

lar wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator

system turns on.

• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as

required

• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses

and park brake

• Inspect engine cooling system protection and

hoses

• Inspect exhaust system

• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or

off-road conditions

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 733

Maintenance Chart

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Additional Inspections

Inspect the CV joints. XXX X X X X

Inspect front suspension, boot seals. tie rod ends,

and replace if necessary.

XXX X X X X

Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X

Additional Maintenance

Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X

Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. XXX X X X X

Replace spark plugs – 2.4L Engine ** X

734 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Replace spark plugs – 3.2L Engine ** X

Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years

or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes

first.

Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X

** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,

yearly intervals do not apply.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 735

WARNING!

• You can be badly injured working on or around a

motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you

have the knowledge and the right equipment. If

you have any doubt about your ability to perform a

service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-

chanic.

• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-

hicle could result in a component malfunction and

effect vehicle handling and performance. This

could cause an accident.

736 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

CONTENTS

! SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR

YOUR VEHICLE .......................739

▫ Prepare For The Appointment.............739

▫ Prepare A List ........................739

▫ Be Reasonable With Requests .............739

! IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............739

▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center.......740

▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center ......740

▫ In Mexico Contact:.....................741

▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech

Impaired (TDD/TTY)...................741

▫ Service Contract ......................741

! WARRANTY INFORMATION .............742

! MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .743

! REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............743

▫

In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .743

▫ In Canada...........................743

! PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ............744

! DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM

TIRE QUALITY GRADES .................745

▫ Treadwear...........................745

▫ Traction Grades .......................745

▫ Temperature Grades....................746

738 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR

YOUR VEHICLE

Prepare For The Appointment

If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have

the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All

work to be performed may not be covered by the

warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service

manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s

service history. This can often provide a clue to the

current problem.

Prepare A List

Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the

specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident

or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the

service advisor know.

Be Reasonable With Requests

If you list a number of items and you must have your

vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with

the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.

At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental

vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it

is advisable to make these arrangements when you call

for an appointment.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally

interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy

with our products and services.

Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.

We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an

authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and

are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality

service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 739

facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and

the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed

correctly and in a timely manner.

This is why you should always talk to an authorized

dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re-

solved with this process.

• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the

general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.

They want to know if you need assistance.

• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con-

cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer

center.

Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-

ter should include the following information:

• Owner’s name and address

• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)

• Authorized dealer name

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Vehicle delivery date and mileage

Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center

P.O. Box 21–8004

Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004

Phone: (877) 426–5337

Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center

P.O. Box 1621

Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French

740 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

In Mexico Contact:

Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240

Sante Fe C.P. 05109

Mexico, D. F.

In Mexico City: 5081-7568

Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech

Impaired (TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the

manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-

cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer

center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who

has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter

(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the

manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.

Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require

assistance can use the special needs relay service offered

by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711

and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with

a Bell Relay Service operator.

Service Contract

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle

to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected

repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited

Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only

the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a

manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan

Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail

within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you

have any questions about the service contract, call the

manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer

Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)

465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 741

The manufacturer will not stand behind any service

contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It

is not responsible for any service contract other than the

manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-

vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,

and you require service after the manufacturer’s New

Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the

contract documents, and contact the person listed in

those documents.

We appreciate that you have made a major investment

when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer

has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and

training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with

the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their

sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related

concerns.

WARNING!

Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),

some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-

nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State

of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or

other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids

contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-

nent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,

or other reproductive harm.

WARRANTY INFORMATION

See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the

DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group

LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.

742 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

MOPAR® PARTS

MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are

available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-

mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle

operating at its best.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could

cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should

immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the

manufacturer.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an

investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in

a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in

individual problems between you, your authorized

dealer, and the manufacturer.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety

Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),

or go to

http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin-

istrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West

Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain

other information about motor vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you

should contact the Customer Service Department imme-

diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety

defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-

port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and

Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to

http://www.tc.gc.ca/

roadsafety/

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 743

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS

To order the following manuals, you may use either the

website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-

tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-

cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call

for an order form.

NOTE: A street address is required when ordering

manuals (no P.O. Boxes).

Service Manuals

These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-

mation that students and professional technicians need in

diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-

ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC ve-

hicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,

system, and/or components is written in straightforward

language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,

charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals

make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix

problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and

features. They show exactly how to find and correct

problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-

ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests

and a complete list of all tools and equipment.

Owner’s Manuals

These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the

assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-

quaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.

Included are starting, operating, emergency and mainte-

nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities

and safety tips.

744 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

Call toll free at:

• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)

• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)

Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:

•

www.techauthority.com

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM

TIRE QUALITY GRADES

The following tire grading categories were established by

the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The

specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer

in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on

your vehicle.

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety

requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on

the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified government test course. For

example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half

times as well on the government course as a tire graded

100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the

actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart

significantly from the norm due to variations in driving

habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-

teristics and climate.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,

and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on

wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions

on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 745

concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-

mance.

WARNING!

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on

straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not

include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or

peak traction characteristics.

Temperature Grades

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,

representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat

and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under

controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the

material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The

grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all

passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-

sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test

wheel, than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!

The temperature grade for this tire is established for

a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.

Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-

ing, either separately or in combination, can cause

heat buildup and possible tire failure.

746 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

INDEX

About Your Brakes ........................518

ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) ................519

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .191

Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............688

Additives, Fuel ...........................582

Air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

Air Bag

Advance Front Air Bag ....................66

Air Bag Components .....................65

Air bag Operation .......................69

Air Bag Warning Light ....................70

Driver Knee Air Bag ......................79

Enhanced Accident Response ................87

Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................91

Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

Front Passenger Knee Air bag ...............79

If A Deployment Occurs ...................85

Knee Impact Bolsters .....................79

Lighter Weight Passengers ..................73

Maintaining Your Air Bag System ............90

Occupant Classification Module (OCM) ........71

Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ............89

Side Air Bags ...........................80

Transporting Pets .......................115

Air bag Deployment ........................65

Air bag Light .............................87

Air bag Maintenance........................90

Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .664

Air Conditioner Maintenance .................670

Air Conditioning..........................426

Air Conditioning Controls ...................426

Air Conditioning Filter .....................448

Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ..............447

Air Conditioning Refrigerant .................670

Air Conditioning System ....................426

Air Filter ...............................664

Air Pressure, Tires.........................553

748 INDEX

Alarm

Arm The System ........................19

Alarm, Panic .............................25

Alarm (Security Alarm) ......................19

Alarm System (Security Alarm) ................19

All Wheel Drive (AWD).....................494

Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ...............8

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..................688

Disposal ..............................691

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................519

Anti-Lock Warning Light ....................333

Appearance Care .........................698

Arming System (Security Alarm) ...............19

Assist, Hill Start ..........................523

Auto Down Power Windows ..................45

Automatic Door Locks ......................36

Automatic Headlights ......................169

Automatic High Beams .....................170

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..........426

Automatic Transaxle .......................481

Automatic Transmission ....................484

Adding Fluid ..........................696

Fluid and Filter Changes ..................696

Fluid Change ..........................696

Fluid Level Check .......................694

Fluid Type ............................694

Special Additives .......................695

Torque Converter .......................493

Auto Unlock, Doors ........................36

Auto Up Power Windows ....................45

Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ........302

Auxiliary Power Outlet .....................302

Axle Fluid ..............................730

Axle Lubrication ..........................730

Battery.................................669

Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ........26

Belts, Seat...............................118

INDEX 749

Blind Spot Monitoring ......................141

Body Mechanism Lubrication .................675

B-Pillar Location ..........................547

Brake Assist System .......................522

Brake Control System, Electronic ..............519

Brake Fluid .............................730

Brakes .................................518

Brake System ............................518

Anti-Lock (ABS) ........................519

Fluid Check ...........................693

Master Cylinder ........................693

Warning Light .........................331

Brake/Transmission Interlock .................483

Brightness, Interior Lights ...................176

Bulb Replacement .........................721

Bulbs, Light .............................120

Camera, Rear ............................286

Capacities, Fluid ..........................727

Caps, Filler

Fuel .................................588

Oil (Engine) ...........................655

Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ................690

Carbon Monoxide Warning ..................117

Cargo Area Cover .........................318

Cargo Area Features .......................316

Cargo Compartment .......................316

Cargo Load Floor .........................316

Cargo Tie-Downs .........................316

Car Washes .............................699

Cellular Phone ...........................425

Certification Label.........................591

Changing A Flat Tire .......................628

Chart, Tire Sizing .........................542

Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .658

Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ..............116

Checks, Safety............................116

Child Restraint ............................92

750 INDEX

Child Restraints

Booster Seats ...........................97

Child Restraints .........................92

Child Seat Installation ....................113

How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt .......109

Infants And Child Restraints ................95

Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint . . . .108

Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat

Belt .................................110

LATCH Positions .......................101

Locating The LATCH Anchorages ............104

Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children ......100

Older Children And Child Restraints ..........95

Seating Positions ........................99

Child Safety Locks .........................37

Clean Air Gasoline ........................580

Cleaning

Wheels ...............................701

Climate Control ..........................426

Automatic ............................426

Coin Holder .............................313

Cold Weather Operation ....................473

Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance ..............424

Compact Spare Tire........................559

Console ................................313

Console, Floor ...........................313

Contract, Service ..........................741

Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ...........690

Cooling System...........................686

Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............688

Coolant Capacity .......................727

Coolant Level ..........................691

Disposal of Used Coolant .................691

Drain, Flush, and Refill ...................687

Inspection ............................687

Points to Remember .....................691

Pressure Cap ..........................690

Radiator Cap ..........................690

INDEX 751

Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .............688

Corrosion Protection .......................698

Cruise Control (Speed Control)................191

Cupholders..............................311

Customer Assistance .......................739

Data Recorder, Event .......................91

Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights.............177

Daytime Running Lights ....................172

Dealer Service............................659

Defroster, Rear Window.....................321

Defroster, Windshield ......................119

Diagnostic System, Onboard .................657

Dimmer Switch, Headlight...................174

Dipsticks

Oil (Engine) ...........................661

Disabled Vehicle Towing ....................648

Disposal

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................691

Door Locks

Door Locks ............................34

Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Remote ...............................34

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ................34

Door Locks, Automatic ......................36

Door Opener, Garage.......................288

Driver Information Display

DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380

Instrument Cluster Display ................380

Driver Information Display (DID)

Instrument Cluster ......................374

Oil Change ............................374

Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ......................153

Driving ................................505

E-85 Fuel ...............................584

Economy (Fuel) Mode ......................484

Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) ........302

752 INDEX

Electric Parking Brake ......................511

Electric Remote Mirrors .....................138

Electronic Brake Control System ...............519

Electronic Range Select (ERS) .................492

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ..............523

Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ........187

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..............533

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) ......286

Change Engine Oil ......................351

Selectable Menu Items ....................356

Emergency, In Case of

Hazard Warning Flasher ..................615

Jacking ...............................628

Jump Starting ..........................640

Overheating ...........................615

Emission Control System Maintenance ..........658

Engine .................................655

Air Cleaner ...........................664

Block Heater ..........................480

Break-In Recommendations ................116

Checking Oil Level ......................661

Coolant (Antifreeze) .....................728

Cooling ..............................686

Exhaust Gas Caution .....................117

Fails to Start ...........................474

Flooded, Starting .......................474

Fuel Requirements ......................579

Jump Starting ..........................640

Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661

Oil Filler Cap ..........................655

Oil Filter .............................664

Oil Selection ...........................662

Oil Synthetic ..........................663

Overheating ...........................615

Starting ..............................472

Temperature Gauge ......................338

Engine

Oil Viscosity .......................663

Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ...................663

INDEX 753

Enhanced Accident Response Feature ............87

Entry System, Illuminated ....................22

Ethanol ................................580

Event Data Recorder ........................91

Exhaust Gas Caution .......................117

Exhaust System...........................117

Exterior Lighting..........................168

Exterior Lights ...........................120

Fabric Care..............................702

Filters

Air Cleaner ...........................664

Air Conditioning .......................448

Engine Oil ............................664

Engine Oil Disposal .....................664

Flashers

Hazard Warning ........................615

Turn Signal ...........................120

Flash-To-Pass ............................174

Flexible Fuel Vehicles

Cruising Range .........................587

Engine Oil ............................587

Fuel Requirements ......................584

Maintenance ...........................588

Replacement Parts .......................588

Starting ..............................587

Flooded Engine Starting ....................474

Floor Console ............................313

Fluid, Brake .............................730

Fluid Capacities ..........................727

Fluid Leaks .............................121

Fluid Level Checks

Brake ................................693

Engine Oil ............................661

Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts ...........728

Fog Lights ..............................172

Fog Light Service .........................724

Folding Rear Seat .........................159

754 INDEX

Forward Collision Warning ..................218

Four Wheel Drive .........................503

Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .....................644

Fuel...................................579

Additives .............................582

Clean Air .............................580

Economy Mode ........................484

Ethanol ..............................580

Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .....................588

Gasoline ..............................579

Gauge ...............................338

Materials Added ........................582

Methanol .............................580

Octane Rating ..........................579

Requirements ..........................579

Specifications ..........................728

Tank Capacity ..........................727

Fuel, Flexible ............................584

Fuses ..................................705

Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) ............288

Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...................588

Gasoline, Clean Air ........................580

Gasoline (Fuel) ...........................579

Gasoline, Reformulated .....................580

Gauges

Coolant Temperature .....................338

Fuel .................................338

Speedometer ..........................335

Tachometer ............................331

Gear Ranges .............................486

Gear Select Lever Override ..................647

General Information .......................425

Glass Cleaning ...........................703

Gross Axle Weight Rating ...................594

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating..................593

INDEX 755

GVWR .................................591

Hazard Warning Flasher ....................615

Headlights

Automatic ............................169

Bulb Replacement .......................723

Cleaning .............................703

Delay ................................169

High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .........174

Lights On Reminder .....................172

On With Wipers ........................169

Passing ..............................174

Replacing .............................722

Switch ...............................168

Time Delay ............................169

Head Restraints ..........................157

Head Rests..............................157

Heated Mirrors ...........................140

Heater .................................426

Heater, Engine Block .......................480

High Beam Indicator .......................331

High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .174

Hill Descent Control .......................346

Hill Descent Control Indicator ................526

Hill Start Assist...........................523

Hitches

Trailer Towing .........................597

Holder, Coin.............................313

Holder, Cup .............................311

HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) ............288

Hood Release ............................166

Ignition

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

Illuminated Entry ..........................22

Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ....................16

Inside Rearview Mirror .....................130

Instrument Cluster ........................329

756 INDEX

Instrument Cluster ......................351

Instrument Panel and Controls ................328

Instrument Panel Cover .....................702

Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ...............704

Interior Appearance Care....................702

Interior Fuses ............................719

Interior Lights ...........................176

Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers).............180

Introduction ..............................4

Inverter, Power ...........................306

Jacking Instructions........................632

Jack Location ............................629

Jack Operation ...........................628

Jump Starting ............................640

Key Fob

Arm The Alarm .........................19

Panic Alarm ............................25

Programming Additional Key Fobs ...........18

Programming Additional Transmitters .........18

Key-In Reminder ..........................15

Keyless Enter-N-Go ........................38

Keyless Enter-N-Go™

Lock The Vehicle’s Doors ..................393

Passive Entry Programming ................393

Unlock Liftgate .........................393

Keyless Entry System .......................22

Key, Replacement ..........................18

Keys ...................................12

Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ....................16

Lane Change and Turn Signals ................174

Lane Change Assist ........................174

LaneSense ..............................223

Lap/Shoulder Belts.........................55

Latches ................................121

Hood ................................166

INDEX 757

Lead Free Gasoline ........................579

Leaks, Fluid .............................121

Life of Tires .............................562

Liftgate .................................47

Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer ...............320

Light Bulbs..............................120

Lights .................................120

Airbag ................................87

Anti-Lock .............................333

Automatic Headlights ....................169

Back-Up ..............................725

Battery Saver ..........................178

Brake Assist Warning ....................538

Brake Warning .........................331

Bulb Replacement .......................721

Daytime Running .......................172

Dimmer Switch, Headlight .................173

Exterior ..............................120

Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172

Hazard Warning Flasher ..................615

Headlights ............................168

Headlights On Reminder ..................172

Headlights On With Wipers ................169

Headlight Switch .......................168

High Beam ............................174

High Beam Indicator .....................331

High Beam/Low Beam Select ...............174

Hill Descent Control Indicator ..............526

Illuminated Entry ........................22

Instrument Cluster ......................168

Intensity Control ........................176

Interior ..............................176

License ..............................726

Lights On Reminder .....................172

Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .........339

Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) ...........177

Passing ..............................174

Rear

Servicing .........................725

758 INDEX

Rear Tail Lamps ........................725

Seat Belt Reminder ......................335

Security Alarm .........................340

Service ...............................721

Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .339

Side Marker ...........................724

Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ............336

Traction Control ........................538

Turn Signal ...........................120

Vanity Mirror ..........................140

Load Floor, Cargo .........................316

Loading Vehicle ..........................591

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547

Locks ..................................34

Automatic Door .........................36

Auto Unlock ...........................36

Child Protection .........................37

Door .................................34

Power Door ............................35

Low Tire Pressure System ...................568

Lubrication, Body .........................675

Luggage Carrier ..........................322

Lug Nuts ...............................616

Maintenance Free Battery....................669

Maintenance Procedures ....................660

Maintenance Schedule ......................732

Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine).......339

Manual, Service ..........................744

Marker Lights, Side........................724

Master Cylinder (Brakes) ....................693

Memory Feature (Memory Seat) ...............162

Memory Seat ............................162

Memory Seats and Radio ....................162

Methanol ...............................580

Mirrors ................................130

Electric Powered ........................138

Electric Remote .........................138

INDEX 759

Heated ...............................140

Outside ..............................137

Rearview .............................130

Vanity ...............................140

Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ...............8

Monitor, Tire Pressure System ................568

MOPAR® Parts...........................659

MTBE/ETBE ............................580

Multi-Function Control Lever .................173

New Vehicle Break-In Period .................116

Occupant Restraints ........................52

Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ................579

Odometer...............................333

Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333

Oil, Engine ..............................661

Capacity .............................727

Change Interval ........................662

Checking .............................661

Dipstick ..............................661

Disposal ..............................664

Filter ................................664

Filter Disposal .........................664

Identification Logo ......................662

Materials Added to ......................663

Recommendation .......................662

Synthetic .............................663

Viscosity .............................663

Oil Filter, Change .........................664

Oil Filter, Selection ........................664

Onboard Diagnostic System ..................657

Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) ............288

Operating Precautions ......................657

Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) .............5

Outside Rearview Mirrors ...................137

Overheating, Engine .......................338

760 INDEX

Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) .............5

Paint Care ..............................698

Panic Alarm ..............................25

Parking Brake ............................511

ParkSense® System, Rear....................234

Passing Light ............................174

Pets ...................................115

Placard, Tire and Loading Information ..........548

Power

Brakes ...............................518

Door Locks ............................35

Inverter ..............................306

Lift Gate ..............................49

Mirrors ..............................138

Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ...........302

Sunroof ..............................297

Sunroof (Sky Slider) .....................696

Windows ..............................44

Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ................62

Preparation for Jacking .....................631

Pretensioners

Seat Belts ..............................62

Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .22

Radial Ply Tires ..........................555

Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ...........690

Radio Operation ..........................425

Radio Remote Controls .....................422

Radio (Sound Systems) .....................421

Rain Sensitive Wiper System .................183

Rear Camera ............................286

Rear Cross Path ..........................146

Rear ParkSense System .....................234

Rear Seat, Folding .........................159

Rear Window Defroster .....................321

Rear Window Features .....................320

Rear Wiper/Washer........................320

INDEX 761

Recorder, Event Data .......................91

Recreational Towing .......................606

Shifting into Power Transfer Unit Neutral (N) . . .608

Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) ........608

Shifting out of Power Transfer Unit Neutral (N) . .611

Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) ......611

Reformulated Gasoline .....................580

Refrigerant ..............................671

Release, Hood............................166

Reminder, Lights On .......................172

Reminder, Seat Belt.........................54

Remote Control

Starting System .........................29

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ..................22

Arm The Alarm .........................19

FCC General Information ..................29

Panic Alarm ............................25

Programming Additional Key Fobs ...........18

Programming Additional Transmitters .........18

Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls .........422

Remote Starting

Exit Remote Start Mode ...................32

Uconnect® Customer Programmable Features ....33

Uconnect® Settings .......................33

Remote Starting System......................29

Replacement Bulbs ........................721

Replacement Keys .........................18

Replacement Parts.........................659

Replacement Tires .........................562

Reporting Safety Defects ....................743

Restraint, Head...........................157

Restraints, Child...........................92

Restraints, Occupant ........................52

Retractable Cargo Area Cover ................318

Roll Over Warning ..........................4

Roof

Sky Slider Power .......................696

Roof Type Carrier .........................322

762 INDEX

Rotation, Tires ...........................566

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle..................118

Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ................120

Safety Defects, Reporting ....................743

Safety, Exhaust Gas ........................117

Safety Information, Tire .....................540

Safety Tips ..............................116

Schedule, Maintenance .....................732

Seat Belt

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ......60

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ...........63

Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode .......65

Energy Management Feature ................63

Engage The Automatic Locking Mode .........64

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................58

Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................55

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...............60

Pregnant Women ........................62

Seat Belt Extender .......................61

Seat Belt Pretensioner .....................62

Seat Belt Reminder .......................54

Seat Belt System .........................52

Seat Belt Maintenance ......................704

Seat Belt Reminder .........................54

Seat Belts ................................53

Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...................60

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .........60

Child Restraint ..........................92

Extender ..............................61

Front Seat .............................53

Inspection ............................118

Operating Instructions ....................58

Pregnant Women ........................62

Pretensioners ...........................62

Rear Seat ..............................55

Reminder .............................335

Untwisting Procedure .....................60

INDEX 763

Seats ..................................149

Adjustment ...........................149

Easy Entry ............................165

Head Restraints ........................157

Memory ..............................162

Rear Folding ..........................159

Seatback Release ........................153

Tilting ...............................153

Security Alarm ............................19

Arm The System ........................19

Selec-Terrain .............................503

Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze)...............728

SENTRY KEY®

FCC General Information ..................18

Key Programming .......................18

Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ....................16

Sentry Key Replacement .....................18

Service Assistance .........................739

Service Contract ..........................741

Service Manuals ..........................744

Shifting

Automatic Transmission ..................484

Power Transfer Unit, Shifting into Power Transfer

Unit Neutral (N) ........................608

Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer Case

Neutral (N) ...........................608

Transfer Case, Shifting out of Transfer Case

Neutral (N) ...........................611

Shift Lever Override .......................647

Shoulder Belts ............................55

Side View Mirror Adjustment.................137

Signals, Turn ............................120

Snow Chains (Tire Chains)...................564

Snow Tires ..............................557

Spare Tire...............................559

Spark Plugs .............................728

Specifications

Fuel (Gasoline) .........................728

764 INDEX

Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .728

Speed Control (Cruise Control)................187

Speedometer.............................335

Starting .................................29

Cold Weather ..........................473

Engine Fails to Start .....................474

Remote ...............................29

Starting and Operating .....................472

Starting Procedures ........................472

Steering

Column Controls .......................173

Tilt Column ...........................185

Wheel, Heated .........................186

Wheel, Tilt ............................185

Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...............422

Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .422

Storage ................................315

Storage, Vehicle...........................447

Storing Your Vehicle .......................720

Stuck, Freeing............................644

Sun Roof ...............................297

Sun Visor Extension .......................141

Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ..........66

Sway Control, Trailer.......................595

Synthetic Engine Oil .......................663

System, Remote Starting .....................29

Tachometer..............................331

Telescoping Steering Column .................185

Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ..........436

Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant ............338

Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ....................316

Tilt Steering Column .......................185

Time Delay, Headlight ......................169

Tip Start................................473

Tire and Loading Information Placard...........547

Tire Markings ............................540

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

INDEX 765

Aging (Life of Tires) .....................562

Air Pressure ...........................552

Chains ...............................564

Changing .............................628

Compact Spare .........................559

General Information .....................552

High Speed ...........................555

Inflation Pressures .......................553

Jacking ...............................628

Life of Tires ...........................562

Load Capacity .........................547

Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ............568

Pressure Warning Light ...................336

Quality Grading ........................745

Radial ...............................555

Replacement ...........................562

Rotation ..............................566

Safety ...............................540

Sizes ................................542

Snow Tires ............................557

Spinning .............................561

Trailer Towing .........................601

Tread Wear Indicators ....................561

Tire Safety Information .....................540

Tire Service Kit ...........................618

Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ................599

To Open Hood ...........................166

Torque Converter Clutch ....................493

Towing ................................593

Disabled Vehicle ........................648

Guide ...............................598

Recreational ...........................606

Weight ...............................598

Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome ...........606

raction Control ..........................521

Trailer Towing ...........................593

Cooling System Tips .....................605

Hitches ..............................597

766 INDEX

Minimum Requirements ..................600

Trailer and Tongue Weight .................599

Wiring ...............................603

Trailer Towing Guide.......................598

Trailer Weight............................598

Transaxle ...............................481

Automatic ............................481

Operation .............................481

Transfer Case

Fluid ................................730

Transmission ............................484

Automatic ............................484

Fluid ................................730

Maintenance ...........................694

Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .26

Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®). . . .288

Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .22

Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .........22

Transporting Pets .........................115

Tread Wear Indicators ......................561

Turn Signals .............................174

Uconnect®

Customer Programmable Features ............33

Operation .............................421

Screen Activated Features ..................24

Uconnect® Settings .......................25

Uconnect® Settings.........................24

Customer Programmable Features ...........393

Passive Entry Programming ................393

Uconnect® Settings ......................393

Uconnect® Voice Command..................450

Uniform Tire Quality Grades .................745

Universal Transmitter ......................288

Unleaded Gasoline ........................579

Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................60

Upholstery Care ..........................702

INDEX 767

Vanity Mirrors ...........................140

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............7

Vehicle Loading ..........................549

Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...............8

Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) ..........19

Vehicle Storage ...........................447

Viscosity, Engine Oil .......................663

Warning Flasher, Hazard ....................615

Warning, Roll Over .........................4

Warnings and Cautions.......................7

Warranty Information ......................742

Washers, Windshield .......................178

Washing Vehicle ..........................699

Wheel and Wheel Trim .....................701

Wheel and Wheel Trim Care .................701

Wind Buffeting............................47

Window Fogging .........................447

Windows ................................44

Power ................................44

Windshield Defroster.......................119

Windshield Washers .......................178

Fluid ................................683

Windshield Wiper Blades ....................676

Windshield Wipers ........................178

Wiper Blade Replacement ...................676

Wipers, Intermittent .......................180

Wipers, Rain Sensitive ......................183

Wireless Charging Pad......................308

768 INDEX

INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING

EQUIPMENT

Special design considerations are incorporated into

this vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity

to radio frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios

and telephone equipment must be installed prop-

erly by trained personnel. The following must be

observed during installation.

The positive power connection should be made

directly to the battery and fused as close to the

battery as possible. The negative power connection

should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the

negative battery connection. This connection

should not be fused.

Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on

the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should

be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases.

Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of

the compass on vehicles so equipped.

The antenna cable should be as short as practical

and routed away from the vehicle wiring when pos-

sible. Use only fully shielded coaxial cable.

Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio

to ensure a low Standing W a v e Ratio (SWR).

Mobile radio equipment with output power greater

than normal may require special precautions.

All installations should be checked for possible in-

terference between the communications equip-

ment and the vehicle’s electronic systems.

Grand Cherokee

Chrysler Group LLC

OWNER’S MANUAL

2015 Grand Cherokee

15WK741-126-AA First Edition Printed in U.S.A.

2015

Jeep Cherokee - 2015 Handleiding

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Misbruik melden

Product:

Spelregels forum

Abonneren

Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Andere handleiding(en) van Jeep Cherokee - 2015

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Info